prospectus - 2020/2021 - namibia hubnamibiahub.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/prospectus.pdf ·...

2019PROSPECTUSwww.ium.edu.na

ContentsVIsIon 8MIssIon stAteMent 9tHe GoVeRnInG CoUnCIL 9eXeCUtIVe MAnAGeMent CoMMIttee 9CAMPUses/CentRes 10QUALIFICAtIons oFFeReD 11MessAGe FRoM tHe ACtInG VICe-CHAnCeLLoR 13BRIeF HIstoRICAL BACKGRoUnD 15

REGULATIONS 18GeneRAL ReGULAtIons (GR) 18ACADeMIC ReGULAtIons (AR) 27FInAnCe ReGULAtIons 35LIBRARY RULes AnD ReGULAtIons 36

FACULTY OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 39Certificate in Business Administration (Level 5) 40Certificate in Finance Management (Level 5) 44Diploma in Business Administration (Level 6) 46Diploma in Finance Management (Level 6) 51Postgraduate Diploma in Finance Management (Level 8) 55Bachelor of Business Administration (Level 7) 58Bachelor of Finance Management (Level 7) 64Bachelor of Business Administration Honours (Level 8) 69Bachelor of Finance Management Honours (Level 8) 74Bachelor of Accounting Honours (Level 8) 77

FACULTY OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT AND LEADERSHIP 83Certificate in Human Resource Management (Level 5) 84Certificate in Marketing Management (Level 5) 89Diploma in Human Resource Management ( Level 6) 93Diploma in Marketing Management (Level 6) 98Bachelor in Human Resource Management (Level 7) 102Bachelor of Marketing Management (Level 7) 108Bachelor in Human Resource Management (Honours) (Level 8) 115Bachelor of Marketing Management Honours (Level 8) 119Bachelor in Public Policy and Management Honours Degree (Level 8) 124

FACULTY OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY 127

DePARtMent oF InFoRMAtIon teCHnoLoGY (It) 128Certificate in Business Information systems (Level 5) 128Diploma in Business Information systems (Level 6) 133Bachelor of science in Business Information systems (Level 7) 139

Bachelor of science in Business Information systems Honours (Level 8) 146DePARtMent oF soFtWARe DeVeLoPMent (sD) 153Bachelor of science in software Development (Level 7) 153Bachelor of science in software Development Honours (Level 8) 159DePARtMent oF eLeCtRonICs AnD CoMMUnICAtIon (e & C) 163Bachelor of science in electronics Honours (Level 8) 163

FACULTY OF TOURISM, TRAVEL, HOSPITALITY, AND EVENTS

MANAGEMENT 175Certificate in tourism, Hospitality and events Management (Level 5) 176Diploma in tourism, Hospitality and events Management (Level 6) 180Bachelor in tourism, Hospitality and events Management (Level 7) 185Bachelor in tourism, Hospitality and events Management Honours (Level 8) 192Postgraduate Diploma in events Management (Level 8) 196

FACULTY OF HEALTH SCIENCES 201Bachelor in nursing Honours Degree – Bnur Hons (Level 8) 202Certificate in Pharmacist Assistant (Level 5) 205Postgraduate Diploma in Paediatric nursing (Level 8) 209Certificate in HIV/AIDs Management (Level 5) 213Diploma in HIV/AIDs Management (Level 6) 216Bachelor of HIV/AIDs Management (Level: 7) 220Bachelor of HIV/AIDs Management Honours (Level 8) 226Certificate in Health and Wellness studies (Level 5) 229Diploma in Health and Wellness studies (Level 6) 232Bachelor of Health and Wellness studies (Level 7) 236Bachelor of Health and Wellness studies Honours (Level 8) 242

FACULTY OF EDUCATION 245DIPLoMA In eDUCAtIon - PRe AnD JUnIoR PRIMARY: (LeVeL 7) 246BACHeLoR oF eDUCAtIon HonoURs (PRe AnD JUnIoR PRIMARY) ( LeVeL 8) 252BACHeLoR oF eDUCAtIon HonoURs (senIoR PRIMARY) (LeVeL 8) 259BACHeLoR oF eDUCAtIon HonoURs (seConDARY eDUCAtIon) (LeVeL 8) 265PostGRADUAte DIPLoMA In eDUCAtIon ( LeVeL 8) 271PostGRADUAte DIPLoMA In HIGHeR eDUCAtIon (LeVeL 8) 275BACHeLoR In eDUCAtIon : eDUCAtIonAL LeADeRsHIP, MAnAGeMent AnD PoLICY HonoURs DeGRee (LeVeL 8) 279

CENTRE FOR IMPROVED INSTITUTIONAL PERFORMANCE (CIIP) 281tHe CentRe FoR InstItUtIonAL IMPRoVeMent AnD PeRFoRMAnCe (CIIP) 282

DISTANCE AND E-LEARNING CENTRE 303DIstAnCe AnD e-LeARnInG CentRe

SCHOOL OF POSTGRADUATE STUDIES 305Master of Business Administration (Level 9) 307Master of Business Administration (Marketing) (Level 9) 309Master of Business Administration (Finance) ( Level 9) 309Master of Business Administration (Management) (Level 9) 310Master of Business Administration (Human Resources) ( Level 9) 310 Masters of Business Administration (MBA - 257 nQF credits) 311Master in HIV and AIDs Management ( Level 9) 313special Programme Regulations 314Master of education – educational Leadership, Management And Policy education ( Level 9) 315Master of science in Information technology ( Level 9) 320Master of science in tourism and Hospitality Management ( Level 9) 324Master in International Relations, Diplomacy and Management ( Level 9) 330Master in Public Policy & Management (Level 9) 336Doctor of Philosophy (PhD) Degree in Business Administration ( Level 10) 341Doctor of Philosophy (PhD) Degree in Information and Communication technolohy (Level 10) 345Doctor of Philosophy (PhD) in education (Level 10) 349Doctor of Philosophy (PhD) Degree in tourism and Hospitality ( Level 10) 353Regulations for the Degree of Master 357Regulations for the Degree of Doctor of Philosophy (PhD) 361

NOTE

That particular courses and/or programmes have been indicated in this Prospectus does not necessarily mean that they will be offered in the academic year 2019.

“We want a nation of great thinkers and achievers. We want to be a people who use brain power more than physical strength”

Dr. David Richard Namwandi

(Founder)

VISION

to encourage and develop an African cadre of men and women who can operate at international standards in business.

MISSION STATEMENT

to establish a higher seat of learning in namibia and train innovative specialists for the public and private sectors for namibia and other countries in the world.

to train dedicated knowledge workers who will provide leadership at national and international levels.

THE GOVERNING COUNCIL Hon. Dr. David Richard namwandi (Chairperson)Dr. Helen nkandi-shiimi (Deputy Chairperson)Prof. Kingo J. Mchombu (Acting Vice-Chancellor)Mr. John nautaDr. Ben MulongeniMr. Peter elindiDr. Lyndon JonesMr. Mikka AsinoDr. Cleophas KankondiCllr. György trepperMs. Dutte n. shinyemba Ms. Martha naandaMs. Lena BiwaMrs. Florette n. nakuseraMr. epaphras sheya ngolo (sRC President)Mrs. Justine Kamati : Legal Advisor (secretary)

EXECUTIVE MANAGEMENT COMMITTEE

Prof. Kingo J. Mchombu (Acting Vice-Chancellor )Prof. earle s. taylor (Deputy Vice-Chancellor)Prof. oladele Arowolo (Pro Vice-Chancellor : Academic & Research)Dr. Demus Makuwa (Pro Vice-Chancellor : Administration & Management and Director: Quality Assurance & Management)Prof. Fred opali (Director: Distance & e-Learning)Mr. sebedeus !naruseb (Director: Human Resources)Mrs. susan A. nganjone (Registrar)Mr. Wilfred Muller (Financial Controller)Mr. Gerry W. Munyama (Director: Marketing, Communication, and Public Relations)Ms. Petsy neiss (Director: Its and examinations Management)Ms. Hendrina Munyika (Director: student and Customer Liaison)Ms. seno namwandi (Director: Innovation & Intellectual Property)Mr. Aron J. stephanus (Manager: Internal Audit)Mrs. Justine Kamati (Legal Advisor)

CAMPUSES/CENTRESDorado Park Campus (Main Campus)Dorado Park, Extension 1, 21–31 Hercules Street • Private Bag 14005, Bachbrecht, Windhoek +264 61 433 6000 | +264 61 433 6152 | [email protected] www.ium.edu.na

City Branch (Windhoek)59 Bahnhof Street • Private Bag 14005, Bachbrecht, Windhoek +264 61 245 150 | +264 61 248 112 | [email protected]

ongwediva Campus4380 Dr. Libertina Amadhila Street • P.O. Box 2775, Oshakati +264 65 230 145/230 149 | +264 65 230 159 | [email protected]

Coastal Campus (Walvis Bay)Pelican Mall, Cnr: Sam Nujoma/Getrud Kandanga Road • P.O. Box 346, Walvis Bay +264 64 206 647 | +264 64 206 647 | [email protected]

swakopmund Research & Consultancy CentreHaus Meeresruh Complex • P.O. Box 3303, Vineta, Swakopmund +264 64 400 106 | +264 64 400 106 | [email protected]

nkurenkuru CampusErf 678 Nkurenkuru • P.O. Box 6038, Nkurenkuru +264 66 264957/264500 | [email protected]

Distance and e-Learning Centre10 Dr. W. Kultz Street • Private Bag 14005, Bachbrecht, Windhoek +264 61 433 6000 | +264 61 433 6152 | [email protected]

Centre for Improved Institutional Performance (CIIP)Dorado Park, Extension 1, 21–31 Hercules Street • Private Bag 14005, Bachbrecht, Windhoek +264 61 433 6000 | +264 61 433 6152 | [email protected]

11

QUALIFICATIONS OFFERED

QUALIFICATION TITLE NQF LEVEL

CeRtIFICAtes (9)

1. Certificate in Business Administration 52. Certificate in Finance Management 53. Certificate in Human Resources Management 54. Certificate in Marketing Management 55. Certificate in Business Information systems 56. Certificate in tourism, Hospitality and events Management 5 7. Certificate in HIV-AIDs Management 58. Certificate in Health and Wellness studies 59. Certificate in Pharmacist Assistant 5

DIPLoMAs (9)1. Diploma in Business Administration 62. Diploma in Finance Management 63. Diploma in Human Resources Management 6 4.Diploma in Marketing Management 65. Diploma in Business Information systems 66. Diploma in tourism, Hospitality and events Management 67. Diploma in HIV-AIDs Management 68. Diploma in Health and Wellness studies 69. Diploma in education (Pre and Junior Primary) 7

PostGRADUAte DIPLoMAs (5)1. Postgraduate Diploma in Finance Management 82. Postgraduate Diploma in events Management 83. Postgraduate Diploma in education 84. Postgraduate Diploma in Higher education 85. Postgraduate Diploma in Paediatric nursing 8

BACHeLoR DeGRees (9)1. Bachelor of Business Administration 72. Bachelor of Finance Management 73. Bachelor in Human Resource Management 7 4. Bachelor in Marketing Management 75. Bachelor of science in software Development 7 6. Bachelor of science in Business Information systems 77. Bachelor in tourism, Hospitality and events Management 7

12

8. Bachelor of HIV-AIDs Management 79. Bachelor of Health and Wellness studies 7

BACHeLoR HonoURs DeGRees (17)1. Bachelor of Business Administration Honours 82. Bachelor of Finance Management Honours 83. Bachelor of Accounting Honours 84. Bachelor in Human Resource Management Honours 8 5. Bachelors in Marketing Management Honours 8 6. Bachelor Degree in Public Policy and Management Honours 87. Bachelor of science in software Development Honours 8 8. Bachelor of science in Business Information systems Honours 89. Bachelor of science in electronics Honours 810. Bachelor in tourism, Hospitality and events Management Honours 811. Bachelor of nursing Honours 812. Bachelor of HIV-AIDs Management Honours 813. Bachelor of Health and Wellness studies Honours 814. Bachelor of education Honours (Pre and Junior Primary) 815. Bachelor of education Honours (senior Primary) 816. Bachelor of education Honours (secondary education) 817. Bachelor in education Honours : educational Leadership, Managementand Policy 8

MAsteRs DeGRees (10)1. Master of Business Administration (Marketing) 92. Master of Business Administration (Finance) 93. Master of Business Administration (Management) 94. Master of Business Administration (Human Resources) 95. Master in HIV/AIDs Management 96. Master of education – educational Leadership, Management and Policy education 97. Master of science in Information technology 98. Master of science in tourism and Hospitality Management 99. Master in International Relations Diplomacy and Management 910. Master in Public Policy and Management 9

DoCtoRAL (PhD) DeGRees (4)1. PhD in Business Administration 102. PhD in Information and Communication technology 103. PhD in education 104. PhD in tourism and Hospitality 10

13

MESSAGE FROM THE ACTING VICE-CHANCELLOR

It is my great pleasure to welcome all the International University of Management (IUM) students to the new academic year, 2019. We believe a lot of work has been done by the staff of the University to ensure that your stay at this young and vibrant institution will bring you success at the end of your studies. The university has its main campus at Dorado Park in Windhoek with additional teaching facilities located at the business centre of Windhoek. The University has other campuses at strategic locations throughout namibia, including the Coastal campus at Walvis Bay, ongwediva Campus at the north of namibia and nkurenkuru Campus in the Kavango region, near the border with the Republic of Angola and Zambia. You are welcome to study in anyone of these Campuses. The broad purpose of IUM is to educate and train professionals of the future who will go out into the world and create wealth and jobs for themselves and for others. The University is driven by a burning desire to foster innovation and entrepreneurship and to create new knowledge through research, publishing and community engagement. It is our prime goal to build the critical and creative thinking capacity of our students, academics and other stakeholders. A unique feature of the curricula at IUM is the infusion of innovation and entrepreneurship as a compulsory course for all students in order to build capacity to create jobs. Approach the Dean of Business Administration if you are interested in entrepreneurship and would like to enrol in the courses offered. The university offers a wide range of academic and professional courses, through various modes of delivery that include face to face learning, Video Conferencing, and Distance and e-Learning. The IUM comprises of the following Faculties and Centres: - Business Administration - strategic Management and Leadership - education Management - Health and social sciences - Information and Communication technology - tourism, Hospitality and events Management - Centre for Improved Institutional Performance (CIIP) - Distance and e-Learning CentreThe IUM is a member of several international organisations including: southern African Research & Innovation Management Association (sARIMA), Association of African Business schools (AABs), Association of African Universities (AAU), and the Distance education Association of southern Africa (DeAsA). The university has entered into cooperation agreements with many organisations in namibia and beyond; including: The Bank of namibia (Bon): CRAn; UnDP; nCRst; nAMPoRt; University of namibia (UnAM); and various hotels in namibia for student internship purposes.Internationally, IUM has cooperating partners among renowned universities both in

14

Africa and beyond, including universities in Finland, Russia, China, Kenya and the Mediterranean countries. our aim is to benchmark our programmes against established international standards. The University has also entered into a memorandum of cooperation with the renowned Wadhwani Foundation for the delivery of international standard entrepreneurship and innovation courses. Locally, IUM is accredited by the namibia Qualifications Authority (nQA) and registered as a recognised private training provider with the national Council for Higher education (nCHe).The efforts of IUM to contribute to the national Human Resources plan have led to the creation of a new executive Development Programme department called the Centre for Improved Institutional Performance (CIIP) which offers career development programmes for those in management positions. other programmes offered target sales and Insurance, Information technology, and office Administration. More programmes will be added in future and communicated via the media. The 2019 Prospectus gives you an overview of our programmes and the rules and regulations of the University which govern student registration and academic progress. Familiarise yourself with the content of the Prospectus because of its importance to managing your studies. When you are in doubt, the Deans of different Faculties and their teams are on standby to provide any additional information you may require.I wish you all blessings in your academic life at the International University of Management.

Prof. Kingo Mchombu Acting Vice-Chancellor

15

BRIEF HISTORICAL BACKGROUND

The Roots and Focus

The International University of Management (IUM) has its roots in the Institute of Higher education which was founded in 1994 by Honourable Dr. David Richard namwandi. He went on to serve a stint as Member of Parliament of the Republic of namibia (2010 – 2015) during which period he also served as Deputy Minister of education (2010 – 2013) and Minister of education (2013 – 2015). since its inception, H.e. Dr. Hage G. Geingob, President of the Republic of namibia, has been the patron of the University.

IUM is a sole namibian initiative which started with one lecturer and one student, has now grown into an institution whose student population is currently slightly more than 10000. The intellectual and vocational bases of the University are firmly rooted and focused in the areas of Management and ICt.

since its humble beginnings, the university has gained recognition as a centre of excellence for the teaching of Management science and ICt disciplines at all levels. While these disciplines remain the anchor, the University has since diversified its offerings at both undergraduate and postgraduate levels in order to address different economic and management needs in namibia. In addition, the University has carried out numerous consultancies and research on behalf of both the private and public sectors in namibia. IUM was officially launched as the first private University in namibia on 26 october 2002 by the then state President, H.e. Dr. shafiishuna nujoma and its own Hi-tech campus at Dorado Park in Windhoek was inaugurated on 26 April 2011 by the then state President, H.e. Dr. Hifikepunye Pohamba.

Purpose of IUM

The purpose of the university is to educate and train young managers and entrepreneurs of the future; who will go out into the world and help to generate work and wealth in those sectors of society where there is most need, demand or opportunity.

IUM’s Uniqueness

This University and the students who pass through it are different in a number of ways:• our students are products of a social and an economic conscience inherent in the

heart of the university’s operations which focus, amongst others, on the choice and design of programmes.

• The University follows a path that respects the needs of the country and dedicates its efforts to the enhancement of the socio-economic wealth of its people.

16

• We are primarily aimed at the development of managers of the future and wealth creators in society.

• The University embraces the best theory not as an intellectual end in itself, but as the raw material of sound practice since the best principles and practice of management are based upon well tested theories.

• The University is significantly organized and resourced to make positive contributions to the development of our country and thus directs its efforts at today’s national needs and anticipates the challenges that have to be inevitably faced in the future.

• We are the first of the kind in Africa to establish a Faculty of HIV/AIDs. Given the magnitude of the HIV and AIDs pandemic in Africa, the importance of such a faculty cannot be overemphasized.

Research

The International University of Management has established itself as a teaching and research-oriented institution where both teaching and research excellence are valued and promoted in order to engender contributions to the advancement of knowledge to our professionals, students, and researchers and to the well-being of our stakeholders in a credible manner. to actively promote research and establish a research culture at IUM, a comprehensive research agenda is formulated each academic year. every faculty has a Research Committee and develops its research agenda based on submissions by all academic staff members. It is on this basis that IUM develops a comprehensive research agenda by integrating research interests indicated in each Faculty Research Agenda.In order to achieve IUM’s research objectives, the following strategies are being implemented:• Pursuing excellence in the conduct of research through the application of scientific

research methods applicable to the broad field of the social sciences;• Conducting the whole range of research types (descriptive, analytical, basic and

applied) and employing suitable approaches (qualitative, quantitative, or mixed methods) relevant to the interests of the researcher(s);

• Reviewing topic-specific literature as a basis for expanding the knowledge base on substantive as well as methodological issues; and exploring the theoretical terrain for research design;

• Developing and implementing an overall IUM Research Agenda based on inputs from all the individual faculty research agendas;

• Adopting the best approach in addressing specific research issues, including the choice of methods of data collection, verification and consolidation; analytical and statistical techniques for data management and, application of It, including computer packages;

• Collaborating with researchers outside IUM, both national and international, to enhance quality research and promote the image of the university; and

17

• encouraging both staff and students to participate in research and knowledge sharing throughout all the phases of research – from problem conceptualization and research design to data collection, management and processing, and analysis using computer programmes and

• report preparation.

18

REGULATIONSGENERAL REGULATIONS (GR)

GR 1 : GENERAL

GR 1.1: subject to Faculty, Programme, Departmental, and Centre special Regulations, the following regulations shall apply.

GR 1.2: General Regulations shall take precedence over all special Regulations unless senate provides otherwise.

GR 1.3: The senate shall be the final authority for the interpretation of these regulations.

GR 1.4 : The senate has the right to amend, alter, cancel or replace any of these regulations.

GR 1.5 : The senate has the authority to exempt any student from any of the regulations.

GR 1.6 : A student who has started a programme of study following one set of regulations shall not be affected by regulations subsequently adopted unless agreed to in writing by the student.

GR 1.7 : There might, however, be cases which might warrant the non-application of the above regulation. In such cases, the Registrar shall immediately circulate a notice to that effect.

GR 2 : THE STRUCTURE OF DEGREE PROGRAMMES

students opting to register for the four (4) year IUM degree programmes will commence in year one (1) subject to being granted exemptions on application to the relevant faculty. The bulk of the first year subjects are aimed at ensuring that the student can understand and use the english Language effectively.

GR 3: THE CERTIFICATE AND DIPLOMA PROGRAMMES

The purpose of the above programmes is to:

GR 3.1 : enable students wishing to register for degree programmes to attain relevant and required credits.

GR 3.2: Provide useful, relevant, and comprehensive stand alone qualification(s) for students who wish to gain employment.

19

GR 4 : ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS

GR 4.1 : students shall be selected and admitted on merit without regard to religion or cultural identity and regardless of ethnic origin, colour, race, political opinion, or sex.GR 4.2: Undergraduate ProgrammesGR 4.2.1: The normal entry requirement to undergraduate degree programmes shall be a namibia senior secondary Certificate (ordinary or Higher or a combination of both) or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including english at Grade D) normally in not more than three examination sittings with a minimum of 25 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale.GR 4.2.2: Certificate in Health and Wellness GR 4.2.2.1 : The normal entry requirement shall be a namibia senior secondary Certificate Higher (nssCH) or Higher International General Certificate for secondary education (HIGCse) in four subjects with grades 1- 4; with a minimum of 20 points or more.

oRA Grade 12 namibia senior secondary Certificate ordinary (nssCo) level or International General Certificate for secondary education (IGCse) with a minimum of e symbol in english Language totalling 20 points or more.

oRA minimum of 20 points from a combination of nssCH/HIGCse and nssCo/IGCse.

oRenter through a flexible learning path – mature age/prior learning with 3 years relevant experience in various fields in the world of work.

oRThe equivalent of any of the above as determined by the IUM senate.

GR 4.2.3 : Certificate in Pharmacist AssistantAdmission/ entry requirements

A Grade 12 certificate with a minimum of 20 points; employed by a registered pharmacist in a pharmacy for a period of 2-3 years.

orMature aged entry: 25 years of age, a Grade 10 certificate with a minimum of 18 points, and 4 years work experience in a pharmacy.

GR 4.2.4: Diploma in Health and Wellness The normal requirement for entry into this programme shall be possession of a Certificate in Health and Wellness studies (Level 5) or other equivalent qualification.

GR 4.2.5: Bachelor in Health and Wellness GR4.2.5.1: The normal entry requirement to this programme shall be a namibia senior secondary Certificate ( ordinary or Higher or a combination of both ) or equivalent qualifications, provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including english at

20

Grade D) normally in not more than three examination sittings with a 25 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale.GR4.2.5.2 : Applicants should also meet the following requirements: Hold HIGCse senior certificate in four subjects with 1- 4 symbols.

oRHold a Grade 12 senior certificate (IGCse) with a minimum of D symbol in english Language totalling twenty five points or more.

oRenter through a flexible learning path – mature age/prior learning with five years relevant experience in various fields in the world of work.

oRHold a Diploma in Health and Wellness (Level 6) or equivalent.GR4.2.5.3 : In addition to these requirements, admission to the degree programme shall also be subject to a successful interview/aptitude test (as required) and availability of places.

GR 4.2.6: Bachelor in Health and Wellness Honours

to be admitted to this programme, applicants must hold a Bachelor in Health and Wellness studies degree at (national Qualifications Framework) nQF Level 7 or equivalent.

GR 4.2.7: Bachelor in Nursing Honours GR 4.2.7.1: For the Bachelor in nursing Honours programme, the entry requirement shall be a namibia senior secondary Certificate (ordinary or Higher or a combination of both) or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects including Mathematics, Biology, and Physical science and a minimum of a grade D in english normally in not more than three examination sittings with a minimum of 25 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale.GR 4.2.7.2: Mature applicants shall be considered if they are 25 years old and above and have at least 18-20 points at namibia senior secondary Certificate (ordinary or Higher or a combination of both) examination or equivalent examination(s) and 3-4 years experience in the health services industry.GR 4.2.7.3: shortlisted applicants may be interviewed.GR 4.2.7.4: successful applicants must register as nursing students with the nursing Council of namibia.

GR 4.2.8: Bachelor in Education – Educational Leadership, Management and Policy Honours to be admitted to this programme, candidates must already have level 7 or 6 (nQA or equivalent) qualification with experience of at least three years in education or in a related organization as determined by senate.

21

GR 4.2.9: Bachelor in Public Policy and Management Honours to be admitted to this programme, candidates must hold a namibia senior secondary Certificate Higher (nssCH) or equivalent in four subjects or hold a namibia senior secondary Certificate ordinary (nssCo) with a minimum of C symbol in english and passes in other subjects as determined by senate, totalling at least twenty five points in not more than three sittings. Candidates may also be admitted through the Mature Age entry scheme.

GR 4.2.10: Bachelor of Education Honours (Pre and Junior Primary)GR 4.2.10.1: The normal entry requirements to this programme shall be:Grade 12 or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including english minimum D and a namibian language with a minimum D grade) normally in not more than three examination sittings with a minimum of 25 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale.

oRA recognised qualification at nQF level 6 or equivalent.

oRMature age entry, provided that they: a) Are 25 years old or over in the year in which admission is soughtb) Have at least 2 years experiencec) Have at least a pass at grade 10d) Provide a suitable reference from a recognised public official

GR 4.2.10.2: In addition, admission to this programme will be subject to a successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate.GR 4.2.10.3 : other requirementsEnglish Language competenciesAll students should demonstrate english competency by passing english at nssCo level or equivalent with a minimum of a D symbol. Namibian language competenciesAll students should demonstrate competency in a namibian language by passing it at nssCo level or equivalent with a minimum of D symbol. GR 4.2.11: Bachelor of Education Honours (Senior Primary) GR 4.2.11.1: The normal entry requirement to this qualification shall be a namibian senior secondary Certificate (ordinary or Higher or combination of both) or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including english at D) normally in not more than three examination sittings with a minimum of 25 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale. ORMature age entry, provided that they:o Are 25 years old or over in the year in which admission is sought

22

o Have at least 3 years relevant experienceo Have at least a pass at grade 10o Provide a suitable reference relating to work experience

GR 4.2.11.2 : In addition, admission to this programme will be subject to a successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate.GR 4.2.11.3 : other requirementsEnglish Language competencies All students should demonstrate english competency by passing english at nssCo level with a minimum of a D symbol. However, students who intend to specialise in:english as a First Language – must have english as a First Language with a minimum a D symbol at nssCo level or equivalent.english as a second Language – must have english as second Language with a minimum of a D symbol at nssCo level or equivalent.Namibian language competencies namibian language specialisation - a student must have obtained a minimum of D symbol at nssCo in the specified namibian language to be admitted. Science and Mathematics competencies science and Mathematics – a student must have obtained a minimum D symbol in both science and Mathematics at nssCo to be admitted. Practical Teaching All students should acquire field experience in the second, third, and fourth years of study and submit a report. For the: • second year - this field experience amounts to 2 weeks of class observation a year; • third year - this period of teaching practice amounts to 4 weeks a year; and • fourth year - this period of teaching practice amounts to 12 weeks a year.

each and every one of these field experiences are examinable and are a requirement for graduation. Assessment is by means of observation of the student, student assessment by learners and staff, and by submission of a teaching portfolio. Furthermore, students will be encouraged to practise teaching in at least one (1) school in the rural setting during the 3 years of teaching practice and submit a report – which will be assessed.

GR 4.2.12: Bachelor of Education Honours (Secondary Education)GR 4.2.12.1 : The normal entry requirement to this qualification shall be a namibian senior secondary Certificate (ordinary or Higher or combination of both) or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including english at D) normally in not more than three examination sittings with a minimum of 25 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale. GR 4.2.12.2: students may also enter through Mature age entry, provided that they: a) Are 25 years old or over in the year in which admission is soughtb) Have at least 3 years relevant experiencec) Have at least a pass at grade 10

23

d) Provide a suitable reference relating to work experience GR 4.2.12.3 : In addition, admission to this programme will be subject to a successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate. GR 4.2.12.4: other requirements:Language competencies (namibian, english /foreign)All students who intend to specialise in namibian, english, or any Foreign language:• As their first language – must have the language as first language with a minimum of a D symbol at nssCo or equivalent.• As their second language – must have language as second language with a minimum of a C symbol at nssCo or equivalent.All other competenciesA student must have obtained a minimum of a D symbol in the subject the student intends to specialise in.GR 4.2.13: Diploma in Education (Pre and Junior Primary) GR 4.2.13.1: The entry requirements to this qualification shall be:Grade 12 or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including english minimum D and a namibian language minimum D) normally in not more than three examination sittings with a minimum of 23 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale. ORA recognised qualification at nQF level 6 or equivalent.ORMature age entry, provided that they: e) Are 25 years old or over in the year in which admission is soughtf) Have at least 2 years experienceg) Have at least a pass at grade 10h) Provide a suitable reference from a recognised public official

GR 4.2.13.2: In addition, admission to this programme will be subject to a successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate.

GR 4.2.13.3 : Other requirements:

English Language competenciesAll students should demonstrate english competency by passing english at nssCo or equivalent with a minimum of a D symbol in english. Namibian language competenciesAll students should demonstrate a namibian language competency by passing it with a minimum of a D symbol at nssCo or equivalent.

GR 4.3: Postgraduate ProgrammesGR 4.3.1: Postgraduate Diploma in Education to be admitted to the Postgraduate Diploma in education programme , a candidate

24

must hold a Bachelors degree at nQF Level 7 in any field of studies.

GR 4.3.2: Postgraduate Diploma in Higher Education to be admitted to this programme, a candidate must have a recognised education Qualification on nQF Level 8 or equivalent.GR 4. 3.3 : Postgraduate Diploma in Paediatric Nursing

Admission/entry requirements

The entry requirements to this qualification shall be:•Applicant must be in possession of a Bachelor Degree in Nursing (Level 7 or 8) or a Diploma in Comprehensive nursing and Midwifery science (4 years) (Level 7.)• Registered as a nurse and midwife with the Nursing Council of Namibia• Minimum of 2 years experience as a registered nurse and midwife• Recognition of prior learning (where applicable)

GR 4.3.4: Masters and Doctoral (PhD) programmesAdmission requirements for these programmes and related regulations are under each programme and under each set of programmes in the School for Postgraduate Studies section in this Prospectus.

GR 4.4: Stand Alone (Certificate and Diploma) ProgrammesThe normal entry requirement to stand Alone (Certificate and Diploma) programmes shall be a namibia senior secondary Certificate (ordinary or Higher or a combination of both) or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including English at Grade D) normally in not more than three examination sittings with a minimum of 20 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale.

GR 4.5: Preparatory ProgrammeThe normal entry requirement to the university’s Preparatory programme shall be a namibia senior secondary Certificate (ordinary or Higher or a combination of both) or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including English at Grade D) normally in not more than three examination sittings with a minimum of 18 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale.GR 4.6 : Special Regulation : BIS and Electronics ProgrammesGR 4.6.1: For Business Information systems (BIs), stand Alone, and Honours degree programmes, a D grade in Mathematics is required. GR 4.6.2: For the electronics Honours degree programme, applicants must have a C grade in Mathematics and C grade in English. Admission is also subject to passing an aptitude test or an interview.GR 4.7 : Use of Previous Programmes/Qualifications for Entry PurposesGR 4.7.1 : For it to be considered as a basis for entering the university to further undergraduate studies, any undergraduate programme of study or qualification gained

25

at the university or at another institution/university must have been gained in the previous three years.GR 4.7.2: Where there is evidence of practical experience directly linked to the past or proposed programme of study, older or previous studies can be considered for entry to the university. GR 4.8 : English in Practice Upgrade Course A (6 Months)GR 4.8.1 : Candidates who obtain a Grade e in english shall be admitted provisionally until they pass the university’s six-months Upgrade course in English in Practice.GR 4.8.2 : to pass this course, a candidate must obtain a mark of 50%.GR 4.8.3 : There shall be no supplementary examination for students who fail this course. such students shall, however, have the opportunity to repeat the course once only.

GR 4.9 : English in Practice Upgrade Course B (One Year)GR 4.9.1 : Candidates who achieve good grades in the other nssC subjects or equivalent and fail english shall be admitted provisionally until they pass the university’s two-semester/one year course in English in Practice Upgrade Course B.GR 4.9.2 : to pass this course, a candidate must obtain a mark of 50%.GR 4.9.3 : There shall be no supplementary examination for students who fail this course. such students shall, however, have the opportunity to repeat the course once only.

GR 4.10 : Recognition of Prior Learning (RPL)

The University will recognise prior formal learning or learning gained from work experience as representing part or the full equivalent of academic entry requirements to the University as follows:

GR 4.10.1 : Previous Formal Academic Study –formal learning, the results of which are evidenced by formal documentation from a recognised learning institution which was formally assessed and which may be registered under the nQF or its equivalent.

GR 4.10.1.1 : In the past five years the applicant must have completed the equivalent of full time study for one year (or its equivalent) and in doing that

Have completed and successfully gained a qualification at the same nQF level (or its equivalent) in a field related to the programme applied for

oR- Have successfully completed at least 70% of components of the last, full year of formal, full time study at the same nQF level or its equivalent in a field related to the programme applied for and where the applicant will no longer be pursing that qualification

oR- Is returning to study for the same qualification, at the same nQF level or equivalent

26

as studies which were previously terminated, prior to completion of that year of study oR

- The value of formal prior learning can be approved by the University via an assessment processGR 4.10.2. : Mature Age EntryGR 4.10.2.1: Candidates who wish to enter IUM for any stand Alone or Degree programme but do not have normal entry requirements shall be considered for admission under the university’s Mature Age entry scheme provided that they:(a) Are 25 years old or over in the year in which admission is sought;(b) Have at least 3 years relevant experience;(c) Have at least a pass at Grade 10;(d) Provide a suitable reference relating to work experience.

GR 4.10.2.2: Candidates who meet the above conditions will be required to write a Mature Age entry examination in november in the following papers :(a) english(b) numeracyGR 4.10.2.3: no mature age applicant can be admitted to the university if he/she does write and pass the Mature Age entry examination.GR 4.10.3 : Previous Uncertified Study and Experience (recognition of learning from knowledge, skills, personal qualities acquired through life, work experience, studies which are not formally tested and other areas identified) which is not recognised by the results of formal academic study.

GR 4.10.3.1 : Assessment must be based upon acceptable documentary evidence of one or a combination of - Personal portfolios of experience, including evidence of employment and responsibilities, references and/or records of non-academic study- oral or written tests or examinations which are not linked to academic qualifications - simulated practical demonstrations to enable assessment of skills- InterviewsGR 4.10.3.2 : The assessment must justify and provide evidence to confirm that the education, skills and experience gained result in the applicant being at an equal level to an applicant admitted based on specific minimum academic entry conditions set by the University. GR 4.10.4 : Formal or uncertified study or experience : the standard of which is confirmed by a formal assessment process carried out by the University when justified and subject to approval as decided by the University senate.

27

ACADEMIC REGULATIONS (AR)

AR 1 : Class AttendanceAR 1.1: A student registered for a subject/course/module must attend all classes prescribed for that subject/course/module.AR 1.2: students who enter or return to the university late shall not be entitled to special tuition.AR 1.3 : students should attend at least 80% of the classes to qualify for examinations.AR 1.4 : students who do not attend at least 80% of the classes shall be disqualified from writing examinations.AR 2: Duration of Various ProgrammesAny student beginning studies in the university in the first year of a programme must from the date of first registration complete(a) An Honours Degree within 8 years of first registering for a stand-alone or honours degree programme(b) A stand Alone level within 2 years(c) A Masters degree : 2 years full-time; 4 years part-time(d) A Doctor of Philosophy degree : 3 years full-time; 6 years part-time

AR 3: Annual RegistrationAR3.1: All students (stand Alone, Undergraduate, Postgraduate) must register each year in January/February.AR3.2: no research student, whether undergraduate or postgraduate, shall be supervised unless s/he is registered as stated in AR 3.1.AR 4: Provisional RegistrationAR 4.1: Provisional Registration shall apply to :(a) non-namibian students whose qualifications used to enter the university have not yet been evaluated by the namibia Qualifications Authority (nQA).(b) Any continuing student who, by registration time, will not have known that he/she has passed 70% of the modules for their last year until after the announcement of supplementary examinations results.(c) Any student or applicant seeking exemptions but who does not yet have an exemptions letter.AR 4.2: Provisional registration shall remain valid until 30 April only.

AR 5: Registration – Students awaiting the results of Supplementary ExaminationsAR 5.1: supplementary examinations students (awaiting results) who study year-long modules/courses must register to repeat the failed modules/courses, pay the relevant fees, attend classes, and submit CA work.AR 5.2: If they pass, they can drop the subjects being repeated and the payment(s) made for those modules/courses will reduce any outstanding balances.AR 5.3: If they fail, they must continue to repeat the modules/courses.AR 5.4: students taking semester long modules/courses must register for the second

28

semester modules/courses that they are to repeat in July.AR 5.5: Where a student will only know if he/she can progress after the results of the supplementary examinations, he/she can only be provisionally registered at the next level of study. If after the supplementary examinations the student has not passed enough modules/courses to progress, he/she must repeat the last year/level and complete the outstanding modules/courses for that year/level.

AR 6: Postponement/Cancellation of StudiesAR 6.1: Any student registered on a programme of study who postpones his/her studies must resume studies within three years of last registration. AR 6.2: Anyone resuming studies after a longer break than three years must have his/her application, including past marks, assessed by the Registrar’s office before being registered.AR 6.3: Any student who does not notify the university in writing of the postponement or cancellation of his/her studies is liable to pay a re-registration fee if he/she returns to resume studies.AR 6.4 : Any student who wishes to cancel an individual module which they have registered to study must do so within 90 days of first registering for it. This will include any module registered for as an entry or progression requirement. The only exceptions will be where there has been an administrative error.

AR 7: PlagiarismAR 7.1 : Plagiarism is intellectual dishonesty or intellectual theft and is therefore criminal.AR 7.2 : Plagiarism is committed when a scholar or student appropriates or steals another person’s or student’s work, essay, assignment, or paper without permission or acknowledgement of the original source.AR 7.3 : Plagiarism is also committed when a student shares his/her work with a fellow student and knowingly allows a fellow student to submit such work as his/her own.In this case, both the student sharing his/her work and the student submitting the work as his/her own shall be guilty of plagiarism.AR 7.4 : students at IUM sign an undertaking in an appropriate section of their Application Form/Contract that they will not engage in plagiarism.AR 7.5: IUM considers plagiarism very seriously and students who plagiarise shall be disciplined in accordance with the university’s policy on plagiarism.

AR 8 : Progression from Year to YearAR 8.1 : Passing a course or module means obtaining a minimum final mark of 50% in a course or module.AR 8.2 : normally, a student shall not proceed to a higher or subsequent year of study or level or course or module unless s/he has passed or has been exempted from the lower or previous year of study or course or module.AR 8.3 : A student must pass a minimum of 70% of the modules/courses of his/her last level of study before progressing to the next level.

29

AR 9 Advanced Entry/ExemptionsAR 9.1 : Holders of academic qualifications or evidence of completed elements of formal academic studies obtained from other bona fide educational institutions may be granted exemptions on subjects sat for and passed.AR 9.2 : to qualify for exemptions, students shall complete IUM exemption forms and submit their applications to the office of the Registrar by the due date.AR 9.3 : The application for exemption must be supported by acceptable documentary evidence of the qualification(s) held or formal studies undertaken. such evidence shall be in the form of certified copies of academic certificates and certified copies of academic transcripts showing qualifications held and grades obtained.Alternatively, as evidence of formal studies undertaken, certified academic records showing qualifications held, studies completed and grades or marks obtained shall be required.

AR 9.4 : Copies of the syllabi for the qualifications or subjects submitted as the basis for exemption and documentary evidence of their nQF level(s) involved or their equivalents shall also be required.AR 9.5 : The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been sat for and passed in one sitting and the qualification must have been obtained within a period of five years.AR 9.6 : no exemption shall be obtained at Higher Diploma and at Degree final year levels.AR 9.7 : no exemption shall be granted for any subject previously failed.AR 9.8 : The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been studied and the qualification obtained at an nQA accredited institution or equivalent.AR 9.9 : Credits from other universities and/or institutions and IUM (when, for example, moving from one qualification to another) may be awarded up to fifty per cent of total credits for any qualification at IUM.

AR 9.10 : subject to meeting all requirements, any student/applicant with an exemption letter can be fully registered. The letter must indicate subjects from which the student/applicant is exempted and does not thus have to study and must, in addition, show additional subjects that the student/applicant has to study.AR 9.11 : Any student/applicant seeking exemptions without an exemption letter must be provisionally registered and issued with a provisional registration letter only.AR 9.12 : exemptions are awarded only at the time of application for a programme of study. They cannot be awarded retrospectively after joining the new programme of study.

AR 9.13 : Where the applicant has practical experience or has taken informal study, this can supplement prior academic achievements and may also be considered in assessment of the basis for exemption.

30

AR 10 : ASSESSMENT AR 10.1 : evaluation/Assessment of candidates shall be based on Continuous Assessment (CA) and Formal examinations (Fe).AR 10.2 : For each module or course, there shall be three pieces of CA work during each semester. AR 10.3 : normally, CA work consists of either 2 Assignments and 1 test or vice versa per semester.AR 10.4 : There shall be no changing or rounding up of CA marks.AR 10.5: A Continuous Assessment (CA) mark shall normally remain valid for one semester only.AR 10.6: Unless individual subject/discipline distinctions or requirements are approved by senate, CA shall be 40% of the overall assessment of a course and Fe shall account for 60% of the overall assessment of the course.AR 10.7 : Any student who does not furnish the relevant authority with sufficient proof for not completing required coursework (CA) by the stipulated date shall be awarded a zero for that piece of work.AR 10.8 : A student shall have a period of six months after a final mark is released to raise a query regarding that mark. After six months, no query or amendment to marks will be considered.

AR 10.9 : students shall also be informed of these regulations by means of a Course outline normally at the beginning of each course at the beginning of each semester.AR 10.10: Any academic queries or decisions concerning continuous assessment (CA) shall be referred to the Pro Vice-Chancellor : Academic & Research.AR 10.11: Any queries or decisions about the implementation of university policies and procedures involving continuous assessment (CA) work shall be referred to the Registrar.

AR 11 : MAKE-UP ASSIGNMENTS AND/OR TESTSAR 11.1 : to ensure sound academic standards, no make-up assignments and/or tests shall be administered.AR 11.2 : IUM considers the administration of make-up assignments and/or tests very seriously and anyone who contravenes this regulation shall be disciplined in accordance with the university’s policy on assignments and tests.

AR 12 : RESEARCH PROJECTSAR 12.1 : The submission of Research Projects is mandatory for all students in the 4th or final year of their undergraduate honours degree programmes.AR 12.2 : The management of Research Projects shall rest with the Dean of Faculty who shall be assisted in this regard by Heads of Department in his/her faculty.AR 12.3 : All Research Projects shall be supervised by academic staff in the programme in which the student is registered.AR 12.4 : students shall not change supervisors in the course of the period in which they are registered for their programme.

31

AR 12.5 : However, if obtaining conditions merit it, the change of supervisors shall be considered, provided students take up the matter with their Heads of Department and/or Deans, as the case may be.AR 13 : EXAMINATIONS AR 13.1 : There shall be Formal/Final examinations (Fe) at the end of each semester in May and november each year.AR 13.2 : examinations for the 6-month programmes in the Centre for Improvement of Institutional Performance (CIIP) shall be held in the third week of June and the third week of november each year.AR 13.3 : examinations for the english Language Upgrade Course shall be held within the last two weeks of June each year.AR 13.4 : examinations for other courses/programmes offered by the Centre for Improvement of Institutional Performance (CIIP) shall be held as and when it is deemed fit to do so or as soon as the courses/programmes are completed.AR 13.5: A candidate may sit final examinations for a module/course for a maximum of two times. second attempts must be completed within two years of first registering for that module/course.AR 13.6 : to pass a module, a candidate must obtain a composite mark of at least 50% in that module. This must include a minimum average continuous assessment mark of 50% and a minimum examination mark (subminimum) of 36% in that module.AR 13.7 : In addition, this must include a minimum continuous assessment mark of at least 50% and a minimum examination (subminimum ) of at least 36% in that module.AR 14 : Practical Examinations in the Faculty of Information and Communication Technology (ICT)AR 14.1 : From the academic year 2019 until further notice, the ICt Faculty shall administer Practical examinations.AR 14.2 : IUM assessments and examination regulations as stipulated in the Prospectus and other documents shall apply to all practical examinations in ICt.AR 14. 3 : Additional guidelines to practical examinations in ICt can be got from the office of the Registrar or from the office of the Dean : Faculty of ICt.

AR 15 : Eligibility for ExaminationsAR 15.1 : to be eligible to write examinations in a course or module, a candidate must obtain an average Continuous Assessment (CA) mark of at least 50% in that course or module.AR 15.2; A candidate who fails to achieve this mark shall repeat the course or module, shall meet the 80% class attendance requirement, and shall complete all required CA marks and requirements to pass a module.AR 15.3 : A candidate shall also be required to produce a university Clearance Card confirming that s/he has cleared all funds due to the university.AR 15.4 : A candidate shall be required to show a university examination admission slip confirming that s/he is academically eligible to sit the examination for which s/he is a candidate.

32

AR 16 : SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATIONSAR 16.1: For candidates who obtain a composite mark of 40 – 49%, a supplementary examination shall be administered.AR 16.2: supplementary examinations shall normally be held within the first two weeks prior to the beginning of each semester.AR 16.3:to pass a supplementary examination, a candidate must obtain a mark of at least 50% in the examination and a composite mark of 50%.AR 16.4: A candidate may sit supplementary examinations for a module/course for a maximum of two times. second attempts must be completed within two years of first registering for that module/course.AR 16.5 : A candidate qualifying for a supplementary examination will be automatically registered to take this examination at the first opportunity after qualifying. If the candidate fails to take this first opportunity, the student will have failed the module and will have to repeat it.

AR 17 :POSTPONEMENT OF EXAMINATIONS

AR 17.1: A student may apply to postpone an examination in writing to the University’s Chief examination officer, along with evidence of unavoidable reasons outside his/her control for missing the initial examination. Any student who misses the first opportunity to sit an examination will be automatically registered to sit the examination at the next opportunity immediately after it, subject to the approval of the Chief examinations officer.

AR 17.2 : Failure to request postponement of an examination and to sit it at next opportunity immediately after it shall mean that the module has been failed and must be repeated in full.

AR 18: CLASSIFICATION OF AWARDSAR 18.1 : Bachelor Honours degrees shall be classified as follows:

80 and above First Class Division 70 – 79 Upper second Class Division 60 – 69 Lower second Class Division

AR 18.2 : Bachelor degrees (without honours) shall be classified as follows

50 – 59 Pass

AR 18.3 : Performance below 50% in Bachelor degree progammes shall be treated as follows: 40 – 49 supplementary Fail 0 – 39 Fail

33

AR 18.4: All other undergraduate and postgraduate qualifications issued by the University shall not be classified and shall be only Pass or Fail.

AR 19 : DETERMINATION AND ANNOUNCEMENT OF RESULTSAR 19.1 : All results shall, on the recommendation of the relevant faculties, be determined by senate and shall be announced by the office of the Registrar.

AR 20 : TRANSITION ARRANGEMENTS – 2019 GUIDELINES

AR 20.1 : IntroductionA number of IUM qualifications were reviewed in 2017 and were replaced by new qualifications/programmes in 2018. The following transition arrangements are to enable students who have not yet completed the old qualifications to complete their studies in 2019.These arrangements are for continuing or returning students who have not completed the phased out qualifications.These arrangements are the final opportunity for students to complete old curriculum qualifications and, where appropriate, to use them to gain exemption from the new curriculum.

AR 20.2 : ScopeThe scope of these guidelines is limited to enabling continuing students to complete old IUM qualifications in 2019 only. The measures outlined in these guidelines shall be applicable to the following categories of students:

(a) students who were previously enrolled in the stand alone qualifications (Certificates (nQF Level 5), Higher Certificates (nQF Level 6), and Higher Diplomas (nQF Level 7)) at all IUM campuses, but have only partially completed a qualification in the following fields: (i) Business Administration - (Certificate, Higher Certificate, & Higher Diploma) (ii) Human Resources Management - (Certificate, Higher Certificate, & Higher Diploma) (iii) Business Information systems - (Certificate, Higher Certificate, & Higher Diploma) (iv) Marketing Management - (Certificate, Higher Certificate, & Higher Diploma) (v) Finance Management - (Certificate, Higher Certificate, & Higher Diploma) (vi) travel, tourism and Hospitality - (Certificate, Higher Certificate, & Higher Diploma) (vii) HIV/AIDs Management - (Certificate, Higher Certificate, & Higher Diploma)

(b) students who may have taken a break of 3 years or less in their studies and wish to return in 2019 to continue or complete their studies;

(c) students who were previously enrolled in integrated Bachelor Honours degrees in one of the fields listed above but only partially completed a level of study.

34

AR 20.3: Passing a course/module: Students on the transition programmesIUM students on the transition programme(s) will, in relation to progression from year to year, be treated in accordance with existing IUM regulations as indicated below:

3.1 Passing a course/module means obtaining a minimum final mark of 50% in a course/module (see AR8.1: IUM Prospectus 2017.34.)

3.2 normally, a student shall not proceed to a higher or subsequent year of study or level or course/module unless s/he has passed or has been exempted from the lower or previous year of study or course/module (see AR8.1: IUM Prospectus 2017.34.)

3.3 A student must pass a minimum of 70% of the modules/courses of his/her last level of study before progressing to the next level (see AR8.1: IUM Prospectus 2017.34.)

AR 20.4 Equivalent Subjects/Courses - In 2019 students in these categories who have incomplete, discontinued qualifications at Certificate, Higher Certificate, Higher Diploma or levels of study Years 1, 2 or 3 of discontinued, integrated Honours Degrees, will have the opportunity to study and be examined in an equivalent subject, or subjects, from the new curriculum in place of a subject(s) failed. Details of the equivalent subjects will be available in each campus.

AR 20.5 Transitional Revision and Examinations students who have outstanding subjects from the fourth year of any discontinued integrated Honours Degree will be given opportunity for transition revision classes from 14-25 January 2019.

Year 4 transition examinations - The transition examinations will be held from 28 January-08 February 2019 to cater for the above students.

AR 20.6 : Recognition of Prior Learning – Any discontinued Certificate, or Higher Certificate qualification or Years 1 or 2 of a discontinued integrated Honours Degree completed by the end of 2019 will take the place of an equivalent qualification, or level of study in the new curriculum.

Any discontinued Higher Diploma qualification or, Year 3 of a discontinued integrated Honours Degree completed by the end of 2019 will be considered in terms of Recognition of Prior Learning on a case by case basis in terms of equivalents in the new curriculum.

The same will be applied where a student is returning to studies at IUM with completed levels of study, or qualifications which have been discontinued; their prior studies will be taken into account when considering their transition to the new curriculum and any exemptions to be awarded.

AR 20.7: IUM Regulations – Unless specified otherwise existing IUM regulations will apply to all transition arrangements.

35

FINANCE REGULATIONS

FR 1 : Tuition Fees1.1 : All foreign students shall pay a 50% deposit of the total annual tuition fees upon registration.1.2 : tuition fees paid instalmentally shall be paid on or before the 3rd of every month irrespective of the date of enrolment/commencement of classes.1.3 : There are two (2) semesters in an academic year. A semester’s tuition fees must be paid in eight (8) equal instalments beginning one month after enrolment/commencement of classes.1.4 : students in arrears of up to one(1) month instalment will be suspended from classes until such fees owed have been paid in full.1.5 : tuition fees shall be paid fully per course and not per duration of the course irrespective of the date of the start of classes.1.6 : no tuition fees shall be transferred from one student to another.1.7 : A penalty of 12.5% will be charged on late payments.1.8 : no transcripts shall be released to any student before clearing all outstanding fees.FR 2 : Examination Fees2.1 : Where applicable, examination fees shall be paid separately from tuition fees.2.2 : In the case of external examinations administered by IUM, the following fees, determined from time to time, will be paid in advance :. fees payable to the examination body (if applicable). invigilation . processing . postage/telephone/faxFR 3 : Other FeesThe following fees are payable separately from tuition fees : . registration. annual subscriptions. exemption

FR 4 : Refund Policy4.1 : The application/evaluation fee is not refundable.4.2 : A student may cancel enrolment within three (3) working days following enrolment and receive a refund of all transfer credit fees and all tuition fees for independent studies courses.4.3 : Cancellation of studies is normally made by registered mail or by e-mail and the date of the postmark or e-mail will determine the effective date of cancellation.4:4 : Thereafter, the student may receive a 50% refund within thirty (30) days; 30% within sixty (60) days; and 10% within ninety (90) days of the cancellation of studies, provided that the programme/qualification registered for has not been completed. 4.5 : Refunds will normally be made within thirty (30) days of the receipt of the written request for cancellation.

36

4.6 : Any disagreement in this regard may be filed with the Chairperson of the University’s Governing Council within thirty (30) days.

LIBRARY RULES AND REGULATIONS

For the library to provide the most conducive learning environment, the following rules and regulations shall apply:LR 1 : silence must be observed in the library at all times.LR 2 : University identification cards must be shown at the entrance to the library. no person shall enter or leave the library except via authorized entrance and exit points.LR 3: Library users are expected to be responsible for their valuables. The library shall not be held liable for any loss. LR 4: every student should use his/her own student card to borrow books and/or book a computer. Library computers must be used for academic purposes only. LR 5: Users are expected to check the condition of the book they intend to borrow to ensure that it is in a good condition before borrowing it. only those books that are in good condition will be loaned out.LR 6: stealing or attempting to steal library property is a punishable offence. LR 7: RestrictionsLR 7.1 : Mobile phones shall not be used in the library and briefcases and bags shall not be allowed in the library. Mobile phones must be switched off before entering the library and bags and briefcases must be left in the baggage area outside the library.LR 7.2: iPods, MP3 players, Walkman’s and other music players shall not be allowed in the library.LR 7.3: order and good conduct must be observed in the library. Placing feet on desks/chairs and sleeping in the library shall not be allowed.LR 7.4: eating and drinking in the library is forbidden. no food or drink should be brought into the library. LR 7.5: Reserving sitting space or leaving personal books/ files on tables for long shall not allowed.LR 7.6: Writing, marking, defacing or damaging library materials/facilities is prohibited. Users who engage in any of these activities shall replace the damaged library property. LR 7.7 : Library books used in the library must be left on the tables and not re-shelved by users. LR 7.8: Use the provided bins to dispose litter.LR 8 : Any user who wilfully damages library property will face disciplinary action by the University disciplinary committee.LR 9 : Fines for delayed books will be n$ 1.00 per day while the use of mobiles (LR7.1 and LR7.2) and indiscipline shall attract a fine of n$ 35.00. LR 10 : The Librarian has the discretion to suspend any student who accumulates overdue fines /loans until all payments have been settled in full.LR 11: Clearance: All students must clear with the library upon completion of their

37

courses or when required by the university to do so.

Operating Hours

Semester opening hoursLibrary Mon-Thur Fridays SaturdayDorado 08:00-21:30 08:00 – 21:30 09:00 – 16:00Windhoek City

08:00 – 19:00 08:00 – 17:00 09:00 – 16:00

ongwediva

08:00 – 19:00 08:00- 17:00 09:00 – 16:00

Coastal 08:00 – 19:00 08:00 – 17:00 09:00 – 16:00nkurenkuru

08:00 – 17:00 08:00 – 17:00 CLoseD

Recess hoursAll libraries

08:00 –17:00 (closed between 13:00 – 14:00)

CLoseD

ALL LIBRARIES ARE CLOSED ON SUNDAYS AND PUBLIC HOLIDAYS

39

FACULTY oF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

40

Certificate in Business Administration (Level 5)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 30 -Level 5 credits: 90 -Minimum total credits required: 120 -

Rationalenamibia’s Fifth national Development Plan (nDP 5) underlines that there is need to achieve industrial development through Local Procurement. This will result in namibia moving from a reactive, input-based economy to a proactive, high performing econo-my. The survival of such infant enterprises needs highly skilled entrepreneurs, hence the demand for qualified business administrators who have fundamental understand-ing of business concepts and practices and who can initiate and improve the efficiency and effectiveness of business enterprise.

PurposeThe certificate in business administration is designed to provide students with the skills and attitudes needed to start conceptualising ideas that contribute to existing organi-zations and which will enhance the pursuit of their own ventures. students will gain an effective working knowledge of the analytical tools and management concepts used in modern business and a firm grounding in the practical management skills required in contemporary business activities.

Who is this Qualification for? This qualification is designed for students willing to take up business administration and management assignments in private and public organisations. It is structured to stretch and challenge the students to fulfil their true potential and to become defining players in the management field. This programme targets those individuals willing to be transformed into professional business administrators.

Admission /Entry RequirementsThe entry requirements to this qualification are:Grade 12 or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five sub-jects (including english minimum D) normally in not more than three examination sittings with a minimum of 20 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale. A recognised qualification at nQF level 4 or equivalent mature age entry, provided that they: • Are 25 years old or over in the year in which admission is sought• Have at least 3 years’ experience

41

• Have at least a pass at grade 10• Provide a suitable reference from a recognised public official

Qualification DurationThe Certificate is conferred after one year of full-time or part-time study in one or more areas of business concentrations. The year of study will be divided into two semesters and students are expected to take six courses in each semester. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to: • Explain how decision making and the management of organisations is aided by knowl-edge of theory and practice in four business sub-disciplines• Analyse organisations and apply contemporary management practices compatible with organisational sustainability• Present theoretical concepts and complex ideas in both written and verbal formats appropriate for management audiences

Articulation Vertically, the Certificate of Administration in Business Administration grants admis-sion to a Diploma in Business Administration. Interfaculty students can be considered for admission to any Diploma programme. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related business and management qualifications.

Credit Transfer Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit trans-fer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.to be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses.The awarded credits are governed by the IUM Certificate programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the courses were equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the mate-rial is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equiv-alent to courses offered in Certificate qualification.Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.

42

Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits re-quired for an IUM qualification. no more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is for any reason deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.The IUM reserves the right to disallow transfer credit for courses if the student’s subse-quent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examina-tions. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Final Examinations The final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally.

Supplementary Examinations A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a sup-plementary examination. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying a deficit of more than 30% of the courses or credits.

Award of the qualification Candidates will be eligible to be awarded the Certificate in Business Administration when they pass all the required courses as specified in the relevant qualification reg-ulations and when they fulfil any other additional requirements stipulated in the IUM student policies.

Teaching Methods/ Strategy Lectures, tutorial activities and discussions, collaborative group tasks, practical projects, tests and written assignments.

43

SEMESTER 1 (60 credits)

Course Title

Course Code Hours NQF Level Credits

Compulsory CoursesMicroeconomics MIe50Us 100 5 10Mathematics MtH51Us 100 5 10Basic It skills BIt41Us 100 4 10Applied english Language skills AeL40Us 100 4 10Introduction to entrepreneurship Ien40Us 100 4 10Principles of Management PoM50Us 100 5 10


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesPrinciples of Marketing PMK50Us 100 5 10Quantitative Methods 1 QM151Us 100 5 10Management organization MoR51Us 100 5 10Business ethics Bne50Us 100 5 10Financial Accounting 1 FAC51Us 100 5 10Human Capital Management HCD50Us 100 5 10

44

Certificate in Finance Management (Level 5)


RationaleThis qualification was designed in response to the national need for professional financial practitioners in the Human Resource strategic Plan 2025 (which highlights critical skills shortage.)PurposeThe purpose of certificate in finance management qualification is to provide students with an academic and professional experience in general administration and finance to enhance competency and skills. This provides the entry level to career opportunities in accounting and finance. The qualification will greatly contribute to the finance and general sectors of the economy.

Admission Requirementsstudents will be admitted to this qualification if they hold a namibian secondary school Certificate (nssCo/H) with a minimum of 20 points and passed five subjects with a minimum of D in english. • Students may also enter through mature age entry /prior learning with three years relevant work experience.• Must be at least 25 years of age and have passed Junior School Certificate (Grade 10).• Must have a minimum of 3 years relevant work experience supported by a letter/letters from employers.• Must sit an entrance examination.

Qualification DurationMinimum: 1 YearMaximum: 2 Years

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to:• Explain the different branches of accounting and recording process• Describe the communication process in an organisation• Recall the information technology applications used in business• Calculate and use basic mathematical models to solve business questions• Apply mathematics in business and finance transactions• Prepare management report and statements, including trial balance, bank reconciliation, VAt returns and other statutory financial remittances

45

ArticulationHolders of certificate in Finance Management (Level 5) will be able to articulate to IUM’s Diploma in Finance Management or any other qualification at Level 6.

Credit TransferHolders of academic qualifications obtained from other bona fide educational institutions may be granted exemptions on the subjects sat for and passed. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been sat for and passed in one sitting and the qualification must have been obtained within a period of five years. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been studied and the qualification obtained at an nQA accredited institution or equivalent. Credits from other universities and/or institutions may be awarded up to 50% of total credits for the qualification at IUM.

AssessmentBoth Formative and summative assessment techniques are used. The assessment system comprises two components:• Continuous Assessment (CA) 40% of the final grade.• Formal Exams (FE) 60% of final mark.

Teaching Methods/StrategiesA wide range of teaching methods will be employed by lecturers from traditional lectures through to small decision-making groups, as well as the use of training films and videos and advanced business simulations. The teaching methods adapted for this programme are student-centred learning methods. emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read extensively in each of the subjects. each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning.

YEAR 1 (100 credits)


Course Title


Basic Information technology skills BIt41Us 100 4 10Applied english Language skills AeL40Us 100 4 10Mathematics MtH51Us 100 4 10 Microeconomics MIe50Us 100 5 10Principles of Marketing PMK50Us 100 5 10

46


Course Title


Financial Accounting I FAC51Us 100 5 10Cost Accounting CAC50Us 100 5 10Quantitative Methods I QM151Us 100 5 10Human Capital Management HCD50Us 100 5 10Introduction to entrepreneurship Ien40Us 100 4 10

Diploma in Business Administration (Level 6)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 5 credits: 30 -Level 6 credits: 160 -Level 7 credits: 10 -Minimum total credits required: 200 -

RationaleReducing poverty and inequalities is always the namibian government’s priority as summarized in the comprehensive Cabinet approved Vision 2030 and Harambee Prosperity Plan. one of the key outcomes for the successful implementation of Vision 2030 includes, a spirit of entrepreneurship resulting in increased youth enterprise development. The survival of such infant enterprises needs highly skilled entrepreneurs, hence the demand for qualified business administrators who have fundamental understanding of business concepts and practices and who can initiate, improve efficiency and effectiveness of business enterprise.

PurposeThe purpose of the Diploma in Business Administration is to enable students to gain a clear understanding of various business disciplines (Accounting, Finance, Marketing, Human Resource Management and Management science). The students studying the International University of Management Diploma in Business Administration are expected to acquire the critical entrepreneurial, leadership, team, and communications skills and explore their ability to work with and through other people.

47

Who is this Qualification for? This qualification is designed for students willing to take up business administration and management assignments in both private and public organisations. It is structured to stretch and challenge the students to fulfill their true potential and to become defining players in the management field. The qualification targets those individuals willing to be transformed into professional business administrators. Furthermore, a key concern of the qualification is to impart contemporary management skills required for successful business.

Admission /Entry RequirementsThe entry requirements to this qualification are:• A Certificate of Administration in Business Administration • A recognised qualification at NQF level 5 or equivalent• Mature age entry, provided that they: - Are 25 years old or over in the year in which admission is sought - Have at least 2 years experience - Have at least a pass at grade 10 - Provide a suitable reference from a recognised public official Meeting these requirements will not automatically guarantee admission into the qualification. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate.

Qualification DurationThe Diploma is conferred after two years of full-time or part-time study in one or more areas of business concentrations. each year of study will be divided into two semesters and students are expected to take five courses in each semester. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the QualificationThis qualification is able to: • Equip graduates with proper managerial skills for effective management of various organizations.• Enable graduates to effectively manage resources at their disposal according to contemporary economic business management and technological trends.• Enable graduates to carry out research with a view finding solutions to contemporary problems affecting business management.• Equip students with skills for careers in the public and private sector.• Prepare students for further studies in the business field.

Articulation Vertically, the Diploma in Business Administration grants admission to a degree in Business Administration. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans

48

of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any degree. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related business and management qualifications.

Credit Transfer Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.to be awarded these credits, IUM will assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses.The awarded credits are governed by the IUM Diploma programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.

Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the courses were equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibian Qualification Authority requirements.Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credits earned are equivalent to courses offered in the Diploma qualification.Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. no more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Final Examinations The final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination

49

comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. examiners may, in addition to written examinations, test any candidate orally.

Supplementary Examinations A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying a deficit of more than 30% of the courses or credits. Awarding of the qualification Candidates will be eligible to be awarded the Diploma in Business Administration when they have passed all the required courses as specified in the relevant qualification regulations and have fulfilled any other additional requirements stipulated in the IUM student policies.

Teaching Methods/ Strategies The teaching and learning processes will take place through face to face, lecturing, tutorial activities and discussions, collaborative group tasks, practical projects, tests and written assignments.



Course Title


Intermediate entrepreneurship And Innovation

IeI60Us 100 6 10

Financial Accounting II FA260Us 100 6 10Marketing Management MMA51Us 100 6 10organizational Behaviour oBe61Us 100 6 10Macroeconomics MRC60Us 100 6 10Total Credits 50

50

SEMESTER 2 (50 credits)Course Title


Quantitative Methods II QM261Us 100 6 10Management Accounting MAC61Us 100 6 10operations Management oPM60Us 100 6 10Business Law BLA61Us 100 6 10Professional Communication PRC60Us 100 6 10Total Credits 50



Course Title Compulsory Courses


Change Management CHM60Us 100 6 10Management Control system MCs60Us 100 6 10Critical Thinking skills Cts51Us 100 5 10services Marketing sVM70Us 100 7 10Product Management PMA60Us 100 6 10Total Credits 50




Project Management PRM61Us 100 6 10Communication skills GCs41Us 100 5 10Cost Accounting CAC50Us 100 6 10Human Asset Management HAM60Us 100 6 10Management Information system MIs60Us 100 6 10Total Credits 50

51

Diploma in Finance Management (Level 6)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 20 -Level 6 credits: 150 20Minimum total credits required: 170 10

RationaleThis qualification was designed to bridge aspiring finance personnel intending to articulate with other accounting and finance professional qualifications in response to the national need for professional financial practitioners in line with the Human Resource strategic Plan 2025.The plan highlights the critical skills shortage of qualified accountants and Chartered Accountants due to the number of emerging small Medium enterprises (sMes) businesses.

PurposeThe primary purpose of the Diploma in Finance Management Level 6 qualification is to develop knowledge and skills in administration and finance management. It provides in-depth knowledge and practical approach for aspiring finance technicians.

ArticulationHolders of other qualifications can also register for this qualification. The qualification leads to a degree and any other higher degree qualifications in Finance.

Admission RequirementsAdmission to this qualification is restricted to IUM certificate in Finance management nQF level 5 holder and/or any equivalent qualifications from other accredited institutions.

Qualification Duration• Minimum: 2 Years.• Maximum: 4 Years.

Outcomes of the QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to:• Analyse systems in business organisations and make necessary improvements to meet the desired outputs• Compare and contrast costing methods and investment appraisal techniques• Demonstrate critical thinking skills in the context of finance, business and decision making.• Calculate and formulate mathematical models to solve business problems and financial models

52

• Describe and communicate various business reports including financial and non financial reports • Prepare books of accounts up to trial balance and key financial reports• Discuss communication process in business

Credit transferHolders of academic qualifications obtained from other bona fide educational institutions may be granted exemptions on the subjects sat for and passed. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been sat for and passed in one sitting and the qualification must have been obtained within a period of five years. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been studied and the qualification obtained at an nQA accredited institution or equivalent. Credits from other universities and/or institutions may be awarded up to 50% of total credits for the qualification at IUM.


Teaching methods/strategiesA wide range of teaching methods will be employed by lecturers from traditional lectures through to small decision-making groups, as well as the use of training films and videos and advanced business simulations. The teaching methods adapted for this programme are student-centred learning methods. emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read extensively in each of the subjects. each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning. The role of the lecturer, therefore, is to stimulate learning and to support and guide that process. Programmed reading and reading guides will support these endeavours.

53



Course Title


Business Accounting BAC60Us 100 6 10essentials of Management 100 5 10Communication skills GCs41Us 100 4 10Macroeconomics MRC60Us 100 6 10organisational Behaviour oBe61Us 100 6 10


Course Title


Financial Reporting FnR60Us 100 6 10Finance Management FMA70Us 100 6 10Quantitative Methods II QM261Us 100 6 10Business law BLA61Us 100 6 10Project Management PRM61Us 100 6 10

YEAR 2 (80 credits)


Course Title


Performance Management PFM60Us 100 6 10Financial Accounting II FA260Us 100 6 10Marketing Management MMA51Us 100 6 10Intermediate entrepreneurship and innovation

IeI60Us 100 6 10

54


Course Title


Management Accounting MAC61Us 100 6 10Professional communication PRC60Us 100 6 10operations Management oPM60Us 100 6 10Management Information system MIs60Us 100 6 10

55

Postgraduate Diploma in Finance Management (Level 8)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 7 credits: 100 40Minimum total credits required: 100 20

RationaleThis qualification was designed in response to the national need for professional financial practitioners in the Human Resource strategic Plan 2025 which highlights the critical skills shortage of qualified Accountants and Chartered Accountants due to emerging small Medium enterprises (sMes) businesses. Holders of other qualifications can also register for this qualification. The course contains a range of new courses which are requisite for accounting and finance students. Courses include Auditing, taxation, Project Management and Contemporary Finance Management. These courses lay a foundation for further studies at Masters degree level

PurposeThe purpose of the qualification is to develop knowledge and skills in accounting and finance. successful completion of this qualification will equip students with requisite tools and expertise to meet the ever-growing demand for quality financial services, as well as cope with the dynamic business environment. The graduates will possess both academic and soft skills that will enable them to contribute immensely to the economy of namibia.

Admission RequirementsAdmission to this qualification is restricted to categories 1 and 2 criteria for the Post Graduate Diploma in Finance Management (PGDFM).

Category 1: IUM applicantsMust have completed higher diploma plus two years relevant work experience and/or bachelor honours degree in Finance Management and Business Administration.

Category 2: Non IUM applicantsRelevant undergraduate degree and/or equivalent at nQF level 7 or 8 and/or determined by the IUM senate.

Target GroupsThis qualification targets students who want to become:• Finance Managers, Officers and Chief Financial Officers,• Financial analysts, controllers and/or directors• Financial Advisors,

56

• Chartered Accountants,• Finance educators.

Qualification Duration• Minimum: 1 Year.• Maximum:2 Years. Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to: • Prepare and analyse financial statements and reports• Develop turnaround financial strategies, sound financial models and sustainable projects• Demonstrate and apply skills and knowledge acquired to advise organisations in taxation, internal control, and project execution matters• Prepare Board papers and strategic business plans

ArticulationHolders of Bachelor in Finance Management will be able to articulate to Master in Finance Management or any other qualification at level 9.Credit transferHolders of academic qualifications obtained from other bona fide educational institutions may be granted exemptions on the subjects sat for and passed. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been sat for and passed in one sitting and the qualification must have been obtained within a period of five years. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been studied and the qualification obtained at an nQA accredited institution or equivalent. Credits from other universities and/or institutions may be awarded up to 50% of total credits for the qualification at IUM.


Teaching methods/strategiesA wide range of teaching methods will be employed by lecturers from traditional lectures through to small decision-making groups, as well as the use of training films and videos and advanced business simulations. The teaching methods adapted for this programme are student-centred learning methods. emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read extensively in each of the subjects. each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning.

57

Courses NQF Level CreditsYear I (120 Credits)Core1. Auditing and Assurance I 8 102. Auditing and Assurance II 8 103. taxation and tax Planning I 8 104. taxation and tax Planning II 8 105. Contemporary Finance Management I 8 106. Contemporary Finance Management II 8 107. Financial Reporting 8 108. Research Methodology and Project 8 30

Electives (Choose 2 of I and II same course )1. Corporate Governance I 8 102. Corporate Governance II 8 103. strategic Project Management I 8 104. strategic Project Management II 8 10

58

Bachelor of Business Administration (Level 7)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 30Level 5 credits: 100Level 6 credits: 120Level 7 credits: 100 20Minimum total credits required: 360 10

RationaleReducing poverty and inequalities is the namibian government’s priority as summarized in the comprehensive Cabinet approved Vision 2030 and Harambee Prosperity Plan. The survival of such infant enterprises needs highly skilled entrepreneurs, hence the demand for qualified business administrators who have fundamental understanding of business concepts and practices and who can initiate, improve efficiency and effectiveness of business enterprise. PurposeThe Bachelor Degree in Business Administration is designed to make a positive and practical contribution to the industry and commerce in namibia and beyond as it equips students with an understanding of the business and management environments. The students studying at the International University of Management Degree in Business Administration are expected to acquire the critical entrepreneurial, leadership, team, and communications skills and explore their ability to work with and through other people. Admission /Entry Requirementsone has to satisfy the minimum admission requirements for entry to degree studies at this University as prescribed under the entry requirements in the IUM General Academic Regulations.1) Grade 12 or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including english with minimum of a D normally in not more than three examination sittings with a minimum of 25 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale. 2) A recognised qualification at nQF level 6 or equivalent3) Mature age entry, provided that they: • Are 25 years old or over in the year in which admission is sought • Have at least 2 years’ experience • Have at least a pass at grade 10 • Provide a suitable reference from a recognised public official Meeting these requirements will not automatically guarantee admission into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate.

59

Qualification DurationThe Bachelor Degree in Business Administration is conferred after three years of full-time or part-time study in one or more areas of business concentrations. each year of study will be divided into two semesters and students are expected to take six courses in each semester. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December. Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to: • Demonstrate a critical awareness and understanding of the main functional

areas of business administration and the management process within a variety of institutional and organisational contexts

• Demonstrate competence at applying principles, practices and methods of modern management in business enterprises.

• Analyse and evaluate management/marketing/human resources/banking/finance scenarios and develop meaningful suggestions and advice to strategic management.

• organise and co-ordinate resources and opportunities by applying the relevant theoretical aspects and reflect on their application.

Articulation Vertically, the Degree in Business Administration grants admission to the Bachelor Honours Degree in Business Administration. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Honours Degree qualification. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related business and management qualifications.

Who is this Qualification for? This qualification is designed for students willing to take up business administration and management assignments in both private and public organisations. It is structured to stretch and challenge the students to fulfill their true potential and to become defining players in the management field. This qualification targets those individuals willing to be transformed into professional business administrators. Furthermore, a key concern of the qualification is to impart contemporary management skills required for successful business.

Credit Transfer Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.to be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses.The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.

60

Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the courses were equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in a degree qualification.Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. no more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.



Supplementary Examinations A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying a deficit of more than 30% of the courses or credits. Awarding of the Qualification Candidates will be eligible to be awarded the Bachelor Degree in Business Administration when they have passed all the required courses and have fulfilled any other additional requirements stipulated in the IUM student policies.

61

Teaching Methods/Strategy The teaching and learning processes will take place through lectures, tutorial activities and discussions, collaborative group tasks, practical projects, tests and written assignments.



Course Title


Applied english Language skills AeL40Us 100 4 10Basic It skills BIt41Us 100 4 10Mathematics MtH51Us 100 5 10Introduction to entrepreneurship Ien40Us 100 4 10Microeconomics MIe50Us 100 5 10Principles of Management PoM50Us 100 5 10total Credits 60




Communication skills GCs41Us 100 5 10Cost Accounting CAC50Us 100 5 10Quantitative Methods 1 QM151Us 100 5 10Financial Accounting 1 FAC51Us 100 5 10Human Capital Management HCD50Us 100 5 10Principles of Marketing PMK50Us 100 5 10Total Credits 60Total Year 1 Hours & Credits 1200 120

62





Intermediate entrepreneurship and Innovation

IeI60Us 100 6 10

organizational Behavior oBe61Us 100 6 10Critical Thinking skills Cts51Us 100 5 10Marketing Management MMA51Us 100 6 10Macroeconomics MRC60Us 100 6 10Financial Accounting II FA260Us 100 6 10Total Credits 60


Course Title


Quantitative Methods II QM261Us 100 6 10Professional Communication PRC60Us 100 6 10operations Management oPM60Us 100 6 10Management Accounting MAC61Us 100 6 10Management Information systems MIs61Us 100 6 10Business Law BLA61Us 100 6Total Credits 60Total Year 2 Hours & Credits 1200 120

63





strategic Human Resource sHU70Us 100 7 10Corporate Finance CFn71Us 100 7 10strategic Management sMn70Us 100 7 10total Quality Management tQM70Us 100 7 10Managerial economics MAe70Us 100 7 10Research Methodology RMe71Us 100 7 10Total Credits 60


Course Title


Business Logistics & supplies Chain Management

BLs70Us 100 7 10

Business Leadership Dynamics BLD70Us 100 7 10International Business Management IBM70Us 100 7 10Internship / Case Analysis InC70Us 100 7 10Financial Management FMA70Us 100 6 10

Electives Courses (Choose 1)Labour and International Relations LIR71Us 100 7 10strategic entrepreneurship sen70Us 100 7 10Total Year 3 Hours & Credits 1200 120Total Hours & Credits 370

64

Bachelor of Finance Management (Level 7)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 40 -Level 5 credits: 80 -Level 6 credits: 110 20Level 7 credits: 110 40Minimum total credits required: 330 40

RationaleThis qualification was designed in response to the national need for professional financial practitioners in Human Resource Strategic Plan 2025 which highlights the critical skills shortage of qualified Accountants and Chartered Accountants due to emerging small Medium enterprises (sMes) businesses. Holders of other qualifications can also register for this qualification.

PurposeThe primary purpose of the built on Bachelor of Finance Management honours qualification is to develop knowledge and skills and provide a technically focused education in finance management that inculcates graduates with requisite knowledge, a-practical hands on approach, competency and proficiency that will contribute immensely to the economy of namibia.

Admission Requirementsto be registered for this qualification, candidates must at least have 25 points in five subjects; attained at grade 12 or equivalent.D in english is required and other conditions may apply. Admission can also be gained through the Mature entry examination scheme. This requires that the candidate meet the following requirements:• Must be at least 25 years of age and have passed Junior school Certificate (Grade

10).• Must have a minimum of 3 years relevant work experience supported by a letter/

letters from employers.• Must sit an entrance examination.

Qualification Duration

• Minimum: 3 Years• Maximum: 4 Years

65

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to:• explain and apply the theory and practice of finance management in the world of

business.• Apply knowledge relevant to the Accounting and finance profession to address

business transactions and financial strategies.• Prepare and analyse financial statements of businesses, non-profit and government

entities, including small medium enterprises.• Demonstrate good understanding of current trends in accounting and finance

management, information systems and development, auditing, taxation and financial strategies.

• Develop and apply skills and knowledge acquired to address financing, investment and dividend decisions.

ArticulationHolders of Bachelor in Finance Management will be able to articulate to Bachelor in Finance Management honours qualification.

Credit transferHolders of academic qualifications obtained from other bona fide educational institutions may be granted exemptions on the subjects sat for and passed. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been sat for and passed in one sitting and the qualification must have been obtained within a period of five years. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been studied and the qualification obtained at an nQA accredited institution or equivalent. Credits from other universities and/or institutions may be awarded up to 50% of total credits for the qualification at IUM.


Teaching methods/strategiesA wide range of teaching methods will be employed by lecturers from traditional lectures through to small decision-making groups, as well as the use of training films and videos and advanced business simulations. The teaching methods adapted for this programme are student-centred learning methods. emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read extensively in each of the subjects. each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning. Programmed reading and reading guides will support these endeavours.

66



Course Title


Basic Information technology skills BIt41Us 100 4 10Applied english Language skills AeL40Us 100 4 10Mathematics MtH51Us 100 4 10Microeconomics MIe50Us 100 5 10Principles of Marketing PMK50Us 100 5 10Introduction to entrepreneurship Ien40Us 100 4 10


Course Title


Financial Accounting I FAC51Us 100 5 10Cost Accounting CAC50Us 100 5 10Quantitative Methods 1 QM151Us 100 5 10essentials of Management 100 5 10Human Capital Management HCD50Us 100 5 10Communication skills GCs41Us 100 5 10

67



Course Title


Performance Management PFM60Us 100 6 10Financial Accounting II FA260Us 100 6 10Macroeconomics MRC60Us 100 6 10organisation Behaviour oBe61Us 100 6 10Marketing Management MMA51Us 100 6 10Intermediate entrepreneurship and innovation

IeI60Us 100 6 10


Course Title


Business Law BLA61Us 100 6 10Professional Communication PRC60Us 100 6 10Management Accounting MAC61Us 100 6 10Quantitative Methods II QM261Us 100 6 10Finance Management FMA70Us 100 6 10

Electives Courses(Choose 1)Management Information systems MIs60Us 100 6 10operations Management oPM60Us 100 6 10

68



Course Title


strategic entrepreneurship sen70Us 100 7 10Corporate Finance CFn71Us 100 7 10Auditing I AU170Us 100 7 10taxation I tX170Us 100 7 10Research Methodology RMe71Us 100 7 10Internship In170Us 100 7 10

Electives Coursessales Management sMA60Us 100 7 10Managerial economics MAe70Us 100 7 10


Course Title


Auditing II AU270Us 100 7 10taxation II tX270Us 100 7 10Business Logistics & supplies Chain Management

BLs70Us 100 7 10

Electives Coursesstrategic Management sMn70Us 100 7 10strategic Human Resources sHU70Us 100 7 10

69

Bachelor of Business Administration Honours (Level 8)


RationaleReducing poverty and inequalities is the namibian government’s priority as summarized in the comprehensive Cabinet approved Vision 2030 and Harambee Prosperity Plan. one of the key outcomes for the successful implementation of Vision 2030 includes a spirit of entrepreneurship resulting in increased youth enterprise development.

PurposeThe Bachelor Honours Degree in Business Administration is a one-year qualification designed to equip students with knowledge, skills and competencies needed to manage and supervise businesses industries and organisation in namibia and beyond. The aim of this qualification is to train and equip graduates with management, supervisory and leadership skills on how to manage small and large enterprises. It is intended for students who graduate with a first degree (under graduate degree) and intend to further their knowledge and studies in the field of Business Administration as well as people in employment who aspire to increase their relevance and marketability in areas of business and management.The qualifications is designed to provide graduate students with exceptional diverse skills (advance communication, higher critical thinking, in-depth numeracy, creativity and innovativeness, entrepreneurial, leadership, administrative and management, accounting, human resource management, marketing and advance professional presentation skills). These skills are needed in uncertain and volatile business economic environments.This qualification will grant a suitable bridge for entry into the Masters Degree in Business Administration and further training.

Who is this Qualification for? This qualification is designed for students willing to take up business administration and management assignments in both private and public organisations at advanced level. It is structured to stretch and challenge the students to fulfill their true potential and to become defining players in the management field. This qualification targets individuals willing to be transformed into professional business administrators/ managers. Furthermore, a key concern of the qualification is to impart the contemporary management skills required for successful business.

Admission /Entry RequirementsThe minimum entry requirement is an appropriate Bachelors Degree in Business

70

Administration or equivalent qualification at nQF level 7. IUM bachelor students in the final year can also apply for admission to Bachelor Honours degree provided that they pass 80%/90%/100% of their modules/courses in their final year of the Bachelor degree.

Qualification DurationThe Bachelors Honours Degree in Business Administration is conferred after one year of full-time or part-time study in one or more areas of business concentrations. each year of study will be divided into two semesters and students are expected to take six courses in the first semester and five in the second semester. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

outcomes of the whole Qualification Holders of this qualification are able to: • Apply conceptual skills and knowledge of management, marketing, human

resources management, banking and finance in solving business-related problems. • Demonstrate awareness of the main functional areas of business administration and

global issues in business. • Demonstrate the ability to apply conceptual and analytical frameworks within

different organisational management conditions.• organise and co-ordinate resources and opportunities by applying the relevant

theoretical aspects and reflect on the application.• Demonstrate critical appreciation, comprehension and understanding of the roles

business managers undertake in the modern business world.

Articulation Possibilities Vertically, the Bachelor Honours Degree in Business Administration grants admission to the Masters Degree in Business Administration. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Masters Degree qualification. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new Honours in the related business and management qualifications. Credit Transfer Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.to be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses.The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with

71

namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification.Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. no more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.



Business Administration Research Project Research Project taken in the last year of study, the Business Administration research project is meant to engage students in research with a faculty member designated to a student by the faculty in order to generate knowledge necessary to complete all the requirements for the award of the qualification. each student must independently complete a 10 000 – 15 000 words research project. The research should be original on a topic related to Business Administration. The research should have a clear defined problem statement, a review of the existing literature on the chosen topic, original evidence offered to support research project, consideration of alternative rival hypothesis, and a conclusion with recommendations. Upon completion of writing the research project, the student will be required to present their research findings before a faculty selected project panel.

72

Supplementary Examinations A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination. A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project within three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying a deficit of more than 30% of the courses or credits.

Award of the Qualification Candidates will be eligible to be awarded the Bachelor Honours Degree in Business Administration when they have passed all the required courses and successfully completed the Business Research project as specified in the relevant qualification regulations and have fulfilled any other additional requirements stipulated in the IUM student policies.

Teaching Methods/ Strategy The teaching and learning processes will take place through lectures, tutorial activities and discussions, collaborative group tasks, practical projects, tests and written assignments.

73



Course Title

Course Code Hours NQF Level

Credits

Investment Analysis and Portfolio Management

100 8 10

Research Proposal 100 8 10Corporate Governance and Management 100 8 10Game Theories for Managers 100 8 10strategic Marketing I 100 8 10

Elective Courses (Choose One)Auditing and Assurance new 100 8 10Applied entrepreneurship Management 100 8 10


Course Title


Research Project 100 8 30International trade (new) 100 8 10negotiation and Conflict Management (new)

100 8 10

strategic Marketing II 100 8 10Elective Courses (Choose One)

strategic Management Accounting 100 8 10organizational Development & Change Management (new)

100 8 10

74

Bachelor of Finance Management Honours (Level 8)


RationaleThis qualification was designed in response to the national need professional financial practitioners in Human Resource strategic Plan 2025 which highlights the critical skills shortage of qualified personnel in accounting and finance who may want to pursue further academic and professional qualifications as Accountants and Chartered Accountants. Holders of other related qualifications can also register for this qualification.

PurposeThe primary purpose of the Bachelor of Finance Management Honours qualification is to develop knowledge and skills, and provide a technically focused education in accounting and finance management that develops graduates with key knowledge and skills. The research component ensures that graduates will not only have practical hands on approach, competency and proficiency, but also discover new trends and developments in the accounting profession.

Admission Requirementsto be registered for this qualification, candidates must at least have a Bachelor degree in finance Management at nQF Level 7 or equivalent.Qualification DurationMinimum: 1 Years.Maximum: 2 Years.

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to:explain and apply the theory and practice of finance management in the world of business.Apply knowledge relevant to the Accounting and finance profession to address business transactions and financial strategies.Prepare and analyse financial statements of businesses, non-profit and government entities, including small medium enterprises.Demonstrate good understanding of current trends in accounting and finance management, information systems and development, auditing, taxation and financial strategies.Develop and apply skills and knowledge acquired to address financing, investment and dividend decisions.

75

ArticulationIUM courses articulate from qualification to qualification. The IUM will decide if and how course work from qualifications from other institutions will articulate with IUM courses. Appeals may be submitted to senate. The holders of this qualification will articulate to a Masters degree in Finance or any qualification at nQF Level 9.Credit transferHolders of academic qualifications obtained from other bona fide educational institutions may be granted exemptions on the subjects sat for and passed. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been sat for and passed in one sitting and the qualification must have been obtained within a period of five years. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been studied and the qualification obtained at an nQA accredited institution or equivalent. Credits from other universities and/or institutions may be awarded up to 50% of total credits for the qualification at IUM.

AssessmentBoth Formative and summative assessment techniques are used.The assessment system comprises two components:• Continuous Assessment (CA) 40% of the final grade.• Formal Exams (FE) 60% of final mark.

Teaching methods/strategiesA wide range of teaching methods will be employed by lecturers from traditional lectures through to small decision-making groups, as well as the use of training films and videos and advanced business simulations. The teaching methods adapted for this programme are student-centred learning methods. emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read extensively in each of the subjects. each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning.. Programmed reading and reading guides will support these endeavours.

76

YEAR 1

SEMESTER 1

Course Title

Course Code Hours NQF Level

Credits

Financial strategies 100 8 10Public Finance 100 8 10Accounting Information systems 100 8 10Auditing & Assurance I 100 8 10Corporate governance and management 100 8 10

Electives Courses (Choose 1)Investment analysis and portfolio management

100 8 10

strategic project management 100 8 10strategic innovation management 100 8 10


Course Title


Research Project 100 8 30Accounting Theory and Practice 100 8 10Contemporary Financial Management

100 8 10

Elective Courses (Choose One)International Finance Management 100 8 10strategic Management Accounting 100 8 10taxation and tax Planning I 100 8 10

77

Bachelor of Accounting Honours (Level 8)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 40 -Level 5 credits: 60 -Level 6 credits: 100 30Level 7 credits: 110 20Level 8 credits: 120 60Minimum total credits required: 430 50

RationaleThis qualification was designed and developed in response to the national need for professional financial practitioners as indicated in the Human Resource strategic Plan 2025 which highlights the critical skills shortage of qualified Accountants and Chartered Accountants due to the number of emerging small Medium enterprises (sMes) businesses. Holders of other related qualifications can also register for this qualification.

PurposeThe primary purpose of the integrated Bachelor of Accounting Honours Level 8 qualification is to develop knowledge and skills and provide a technically focused education in accounting that inculcates graduates with requisite knowledge, a-practical hands on approach, competency and proficiency that will enable to contribute immensely to the economy of namibia.

Admission Requirementsto be registered for this qualification, candidates must at least have 25 points in five subjects; attained at grade 12 or equivalent. D in english is required and other conditions may apply. Admission can also be gained through the Mature entry scheme. to follow this route, an applicant must meet the following requirements:• Must be at least 25 years of age in the year in which admission is sought and have

passed Junior school Certificate (Grade 10).• Must have a minimum of 3 years relevant work experience supported by a letter/

letters from employers.• Must sit an entrance examination.

Qualification DurationMinimum: 4 Years.Maximum: 6 Years.

78

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to:• explain and apply the theory and practice of Accounting;• Apply knowledge of relevant professional standards (to include but not limited to

Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) and International Financial Reporting standards (IFRs);

• Prepare and interpret financial statements for business, non-profit and government entities;

• Demonstrate an understanding of current technologies related to accounting information development, audit, and analysis and financial strategies;

• Demonstrate and apply skills and knowledge acquired to advise organisations in taxation, internal control, and project execution matters;

• Review and carry out audit work.

ArticulationHolders of Bachelor in Accounting Honours Level 8 will be able to articulate to Postgraduate studies qualifications at nQF level 9.

Credit TransferHolders of academic qualifications obtained from other bona fide educational institutions may be granted exemptions on the subjects sat for and passed. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been sat for and passed in one sitting and the qualification must have been obtained within a period of five years. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been studied and the qualification obtained at an nQA accredited institution or equivalent. Credits from other universities and/or institutions may be awarded up to 50% of total credits for the qualification at IUM.

AssessmentBoth Formative and summative assessment techniques are used.The assessment system comprises two components:• Continuous Assessment (CA) 40% of the final grade.• Formal exams (Fe) 60% of final mark.

Teaching Methods/StrategiesA wide range of teaching methods will be employed by lecturers from traditional lectures through to small decision-making groups, as well as the use of training films and videos and advanced business simulations. The teaching methods adapted for this programme are student-centred learning methods. emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read extensively in each of the subjects. each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning. Programmed reading and reading guides will support these endeavours.

79



Course Title


Basic Information technology skills BIt41Us 100 4 10Applied english Language skills AeL40Us 100 4 10Mathematics for finance MFF40Us 100 4 10economics I eC151Us 100 5 10Marketing Management MMA51Us 100 5 10


Course Title


Financial Accounting I FAC51Us 100 5 30Cost Accounting CAC50Us 100 5 10Quantitative Methods I QM151Us 100 5 10Introduction to entrepreneurship Ien40Us 100 4 10Human Capital Management HCD50Us 100 5 10



Course Title


Management Accounting I MAC61Us 100 6 10Financial Accounting II FA260Us 100 6 10economics II 100 6 10organisation Behaviour oBe61Us 100 6 10Intermediate entrepreneurship and innovation

IeI60Us 100 6 10

80


Course Title


Business Law BLA61Us 100 6 10Professional Communication PRC60Us 100 6 10Management Accounting II MAC61Us 100 6 10

Quantitative Methods II QM261Us 100 6 10Finance Reporting 100 6 10

Electives Courses(Choose 2)Management Information systems MIs61Us 100 6 10operations Management oPM60Us 100 6 10Project Management PRM61Us 100 6 10



Course Title


strategic entrepreneurship sen70Us 100 7 10Corporate Finance CFn71Us 100 7 10Auditing I AU170Us 100 7 10taxation I tX170Us 100 7 10Research Methodology RMe71Us 100 7 10sales Management sMA60Us 100 7 10

81


Course Title


Internship In170Us 100 7 10Auditing II AU270Us 100 7 10taxation II tX270Us 100 7 10

Managerial economics MAe70Us 100 7 10strategic Management sMn70Us 100 7 10

Electives CoursesBusiness Logistics & supplies Chain Management

BLs70Us 100 7 10

strategic Human Resource Management

sHU70Us 100 7 10

YEAR 4 (140 credits)SEMESTER 1 (70 credits)

Course Title


Investment analysis and portfolio management

100 8 10

Corporate Governance I 100 8 10Auditing and Assurance I 100 8 10taxation and tax Planning I 100 8 10Contemporary Finance Management I 100 8 10Financial Reporting & Analysis 100 8 10

Electives Courses (Choose 2)Accounting Information systems 100 8 10Public Finance 100 8 10Applied entrepreneurship studies 100 8 10

82


Course Title


Auditing and Assurance II 100 8 10Corporate Governance II 100 8 10Accounting Theory and Practice 100 8 10

Research Project 300 8 30Electives Courses (Choose 1)

International Finance Management 100 8 10strategic Management Accounting 100 8 10Financial strategies 100 8 10

83

FACULTY OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT AND LEADERSHIP

84

Certificate in Human Resource Management (Level 5)


Rationale

The Government of the Republic of namibia (GRn) adopted a long-term plan, namely, Vision 2030. This national economic blue print serves as a basis for planning namibia’s future. Vision 2030 envisages namibia transitioning into an industrialised and globally competitive country of equal opportunity, realising its maximum growth potential in a sustainable manner, with improved quality of life for everyone. In order to achieve this goal, namibia needs to develop human capital as well as institutional capacity to train people needed to meet the envisaged demand of the namibian human capital development. Developing human capital especially in human resource is not a sole responsibility of government. The corporate world, both private and public, has a social responsibility of complementing government efforts in the development of the requisite human resource skills toward a knowledge driven society.

The Certificate in Human Resource Management is designed to teach the students the real life human resource tools required for employment and wealth creation in namibia. This certificate is designed to meet the challenges namibia faces with regard to the lack of qualified human resource practitioners in the public and private sectors especially in the small and medium sectors.

Purpose

Certificate in Human Resource Management (Level 5) is designed for people who are currently working and also those who are unemployed with interest in developing their human resource expertise.

Admission /Entry RequirementsThe entry requirements to this certificate in Human Resource shall be a namibian senior secondary Certificate (ordinary or Higher or combination of both) or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including english at D) normally in not more than three examination sittings with a minimum of 20-24 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale. students may enter through a Mature age entry, provided that they:

85

• Are 25 years old or over in the year in which admission is sought • Have at least 2 years working experience • Have at least a pass at grade 10 • Provide a suitable reference from a recognised public official

Meeting of these requirements will not automatically guarantee admission into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate

Qualification Duration Fulltime/part-time mode- Minimum: 1 year; Maximum 2 yearsThe qualification comprises of two semesters per academic year: semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcome for the whole Qualification Upon the completion of this qualification student will be able to:• Apply the skills, knowledge, and understanding of human resource functions in

private and public sector organisational environments• synthesize human resource planning, competency-based training, recruitment,

selection, placement, and orientation of employees in the organisational setups. • Demonstrate the importance of training and career development; labour relations;

management of performance appraisal, total rewards programmes; and the development of personnel policies and procedures.

• explore and analyse management and organisation theory, organisational behaviour and

• Development approaches, labour relations theory and practice, and interpersonal skill development and how these could be blended in the vision and mission statements of the organisations in order for them to be able to compete in certain and uncertain environments.

Articulation Certificate in Human resource management grants admission to Diploma in Human Resource Management. Furthermore, students may also, where applicable, endeavour to take up challenges in existing human resource professional qualifications offered by the University.Vertically, the certificate in Human Resource Management grants admission to a Diploma in Human Resource Management. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission in Marketing and Business Administration programmes.

86

Credit Transfer Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. to be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses. The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years. Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the courses were equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements. Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in the certificate qualification.Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning. Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. no more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit. The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is for any reason deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final. The IUM reserves the right to disallow transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

Assessment Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.


87

Supplementary Examinations A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination. A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying a deficit of more than 30% of the courses or credits.

Teaching Methods/StrategiesThe teaching and learning processes will take place through lectures, tutorial activities and discussions, collaborative group tasks, practical projects, tests and written assignments.



Course Title


Compulsory CoursesMathematics MtH51Us 100 5 10Applied english Language skills AeL40Us 100 4 10

Basis It skills BIt41Us 100 4 10Foundation of Human Resource Management

FHR50Us 100 5 10

Introduction to entrepreneurship Ien40Us 100 4 10Micro economics MIe50Us 100 5 10Total NQF Level 5 Credits 60

88


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesPrinciples of Marketing PMK50Us 100 5 10Principles of Management PoM50Us 100 5 10

Human Capital Development HCD50Us 100 5 10Labour Relations I LR151Us 100 5 10Business ethics Bne50Us 100 5 10Relationship Marketing RMK50Us 100 5 10Total NQF Level 5 Credits 500 60Total Year 1 Hours & Credits 1200 120

89

Certificate in Marketing Management (Level 5)


Rationale Certificate in Marketing Management (Level 5) is designed for people who are currently working and unemployed who are interested in developing their marketing expertise. students will gain significant level of knowledge and/or expertise of marketing goods or services in various industries.This qualification is designed to impart marketing skills which are useful for successful marketing careers, creation of thriving business relationship in the interactive task of market research, analysis of consumer behaviour, and selling and promotion of services. The qualification is designed to teach the students the real life marketing tools required for employment and wealth creation in namibia.

PurposeThe purpose of this qualification is to provide graduate marketing managers with a forum (both written and oral) for presenting and defending their own marketing decisions and for critically examining and discussing the recommendations of others.

Admission/Entry Requirements to be admitted to study for this qualification, one shall have satisfied the minimum conditions for entry to degree studies at this University as prescribed under the entry requirements in the IUM General Academic Regulations. This includes a minimum of 20 points from a namibia senior secondary Certificate (ordinary or Higher or a combination of both) or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including english at Grade D minimum) normally in not more than three examination sittings.

Mature age entry, provided that a candidate meets the following: • Are 25 years old or over in the year in which admission is sought • Have at least 2 years experience • Have at least a pass at grade 10 • Provide a suitable reference from a recognised public official

Meeting of these requirements will not automatically guarantee admission into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate

90

Qualification Duration Any student beginning studies in the university in the first year of a programme must from the date of the first registration complete this qualification within 1 year.

Outcome for the whole qualification Holders of this qualification are able to: • state key marketing concepts, theories and techniques for analyzing a variety of

marketing organizations.• outline the dynamic nature of the environment in which marketing decisions are

taken and appreciate the implications for marketing strategy determination and implementation.

• Identify the relevance of marketing concepts, and theories in evaluating the impacts of environmental changes on marketing planning, strategies and practices.

• outline and identify the marketing research process.

Articulation Possibilities Certificate in Marketing Management (Level 5) grants admissions to Diploma in Marketing Management (Level 6) or any other related qualification at nQF Level 6. students may also where applicable, move into other existing marketing professional qualifications.

Credit Transfer Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. to be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses. The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.

Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements. Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification. Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.

Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. no more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit. The IUM reserves the right to

91

reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final. The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.




Candidates will be eligible to be awarded the Certificate in Marketing Management (Level 5) when they have passed all the required courses and successfully completed the education research project as specified in the relevant qualification regulations and have fulfilled any other additional requirements stipulated in the IUM student policies.

Modes of Teaching and Learning The teaching and learning processes will take place through lectures, tutorial activities and discussions, collaborative group tasks, practical projects, tests and written assignments.

92



Course Title


Compulsory CoursesPrinciples of Marketing 100 5 10Applied english Language skills 100 4 10

Basis It skills 100 5 10Mathematics 100 5 10essential of Management 100 4 10Introduction to entrepreneurship 100 4 10Micro economics 5Total NQF Level 5 Credits 700 70


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesQuantitative Method I 100 5 10Financial Accounting I 100 5 10

Relationship Marketing 100 5 10Critical Thinking skills 100 5 10Human Capital Management 100 5 10Total NQF Level 5 Credits 600 50Total Year 1 Hours & Credits 120 120

93

Diploma in Human Resource Management ( Level 6)


Rationale The Government of the Republic of namibia (GRn) adopted a long-term plan, namely, Vision 2030. This national economic blue print serves as a basis for planning namibia’s future. Vision 2030 envisages namibia transitioning into an industrialised and globally competitive country of equal opportunity realising its maximum growth potential in a sustainable manner, with improved quality of life for everyone. In order to achieve this goal, namibia needs to develop human capital as well as institutional capacity to train people needed to meet the envisaged demand of the namibian human capital development. Developing human capital especially in human resource is not a sole responsibility of government. The corporate world, both private and public, has a social responsibility of complementing government efforts in the development of the requisite human resource skills toward a knowledge driven society.

Purpose The Diploma in Human Resource Management is designed to teach the students the real life human resource tools required for employment and wealth creation in namibia. The programme exposes students to the twenty-first century skills, knowledge, and understanding of human resource functions in private and public-sector organizational environments.

Admission RequirementsThe entry requirements to this undergraduate diploma in Human Resource shall beI. A Certificate in Human Resources Management at nQF level 5II. A recognised qualification at nQF level 5 or equivalent qualification III. students may enter through Mature age entry, provided that they: a. Are 25 years old or over in the year in which admission is sought b. Have at least 2 years’ experience c. Have at least a pass at grade 10 d. Provide a suitable reference from a recognised public official e. Meeting of these requirements will not automatically guarantee an acceptance into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate

94

Qualification Duration Fulltime/Part-time mode - Minimum: 2 Years; Maximum: 4 Years. The qualification comprises of semesters, per academic year. There are two (2) semesters. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes for the whole qualification The holders of this qualification are able to:• Apply the skills, knowledge, and understanding of human resource functions in

private and public-sector organizational environments• Prepare students to synthesize human resource planning; competency-based

training, recruitment, selection, placement, and orientation of employees in the organizational setups

• Demonstrate the importance of training and career development; labour relations; management of performance appraisal, total rewards programs; and the development of personnel policies and procedures.

• explore and analyze management and organization theory, organizational behaviour and development approaches, labour relations theory and practice, and interpersonal skill development and how these could be blended in the vision and mission statements of the organizations in order for them to be able to compete in certain and uncertain environments.

Articulation PossibilitiesVertically, the Diploma in Human Resource Management grants admission to Bachelor Degree in Human Resource Management. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission in marketing and Business Administration qualification programmes.Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related business and management qualifications.

Credit TransferCredit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. to be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses. The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years. Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.

95

Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification. Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning. Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. no more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit. The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final. The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.




Teaching Methods/Strategies The teaching and learning processes will take place through lectures, tutorial activities and discussions, collaborative group tasks, practical projects, tests and written assignments.

96

YEAR 1


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesHuman Resource Development HRD60Us 100 6 10Macroeconomics MRC60Us 100 6 10


IeI60Us 100 6 10

organizational Behaviour oBe61Us 100 6 10Managing People MAP61Us 100 6 10


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesBusiness Law BLA61Us 100 5 10Critical Thinking skills Cts51Us 100 6 10

Labour Relations II LR261Us 100 6 10Management Information systems MIs60Us 100 6 10Labour and International Relations LIR71Us 100 5 10

97

YEAR 2


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesHuman Asset Management HAM60Us 100 6 10Labour Relations and Acts LRA60Us 100 6 10

Marketing Management MMA51Us 100 6 10Personnel Management I Ps160Us 100 5 10


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesProfessional Communication PRC60Us 100 6 10

Competency-based training and Development

CtD60Us 100 6 10

Management organisation MoR51Us 100 5 10Personnel Management II Ps260Us 100 6 10Total 1000 180

98

Diploma in Marketing Management (Level 6)


Rationale The Diploma in Marketing Management (Level 6) qualification is designed to produce aspiring marketing cadres for namibia and beyond. The namibian nation requires well trained people to market brand namibia and its tourist attractions. The course is to contribute towards effective marketing in both private and public organisations and at the personal level.

Purpose The Diploma in Marketing Management (Level 6) qualification is designed to produce aspiring marketing cadres for namibia and beyond.

Admission/Entry Requirements to be admitted to study for this qualification, one shall have a Certificate in Marketing Management (Level 5) from IUM or any equivalent qualification at nQF level 5 from recognised Institution.

Qualification Duration Any student beginning studies in the university in the first year of a programme must from the date of the first registration complete this qualification within 2 yearsThe qualification comprises of semesters, per academic year. There are two (2) semesters. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes for the whole qualification Holders of this qualification are able to: • state key marketing concepts, theories and techniques for analyzing a variety of

marketing organizations.• outline the dynamic nature of the environment in which marketing decisions are


• Identify the relevance of marketing concepts, and theories in evaluating the impacts of environmental changes on marketing planning, strategies and practices.

• outline and identify the marketing research process.

Articulation Diploma in Marketing Management (Level 6) grants admissions to Bachelor Degree in

99

Marketing Management Level 7. students may also, where applicable, move into other existing marketing professional qualifications.


Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements. Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification.

Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning. Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. no more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit. The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final. The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average. Assessment Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. students must score at least 50% in each course/coursework to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Final Examinations The final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations

100

will be of three hours duration. examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally.





Course Title


organizational Behavior oBe61Us 100 6 10Macro economics MRC60Us 100 6 10

Business Accounting 100 6 10Marketing Management MMA51Us 100 6 10Intermediate entrepreneurship and Innovation

IeI60Us 100 6 10


Course Title


sales Management sMA60Us 100 6 10Financial Accounting II FA260Us 100 6 10

Quantitative Methods II QM261Us 100 6 10e-Marketing eMK60Us 100 6 10Business Law BLA61Us 100 6 10total nQF Level 8 Creditstotal Year 2 Hours & Credits 120 100

101



Course Title


services Marketing sVM70Us 100 7 10Personnel Management I Ps160Us 100 6 10events Planning eVP60Us 100 6 10

Advertising and Promotional services

APs70Us 100 7 10

Management Control system 100 7 10Marketing Research MRe70Us 100 7 10


Course Title


Project Management PRM61UsManagement Information systems ( MIs)

MIs60Us 100 6 10

Personnel Management II Ps260Us 100 6 10

Change Management CHM60Us 100 6 10small Business Management sBM60Us 100 6 10Total NQF Level 8 Credits 50Total Year 2 Hours & Credits 1200 110

102

Bachelor in Human Resource Management Level 7

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 30 -Level 5 90 -Level 6 credits: 140 -Level 7 credits: 110 -Minimum total credits required: 370 -

Rationale The Bachelor Degree in Human Resource Management is designed to teach real life human resource tools required for employment and wealth creation in namibia. This is in response to the challenges for a national Human Resource Plan in namibia.

Purpose This qualification is designed to instill skills which are useful for successful human resource careers, creation of vibrant organisational relationships and serving industries in providing the necessary skills. The programme exposes students to the twenty-first century skills, knowledge, and understanding of human resource functions in private and public-sector organizational environments.

Admission RequirementsThe entry requirements to the Bachelor degree in Human Resource shall be I. A namibian senior secondary Certificate (ordinary or Higher or combination of both) or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including english at D) normally in not more than three examination settings with a minimum of 25 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale. II. A student will also be admitted if s/he possesses recognised diploma at nQF level 6 or equivalent qualification.III. Mature age entry, provided that they: a. Are 25 years old or over in the year in which admission is sought b. Have at least 2 years experience c. Have at least a pass at grade 10 d. Provide a suitable reference from a recognised public official

Meeting of these requirements will not automatically guarantee admission into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate.

Qualification Duration Fulltime/Part-time mode - Minimum: 3 Years; Maximum: 6 Years. The qualification comprises of semesters. There are two semesters per academic year.

103

semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes for the whole qualification Upon the completion of this qualification students will be able to:• Apply the skills, knowledge, and understanding of human resource functions in

private and public-sector organizational environments• synthesize human resource planning; competency-based training, recruitment,

selection, placement, and orientation of employees in the organizational setups• Demonstrate mastery of the principles, concepts and role and theories underlying

the management of human resources.• Plan for the current and future human resource needs of the organisation and

organise gap analysis exercise.• evaluate necessary tools that foster rational, strategic decision-making in the

organizational environment.• Demonstrate understanding of employee termination and disciplinary procedures.• Redesign job processes for purpose of job enrichment and efficient execution Articulation Bachelor Degree in Human Resource Management gives students admission to a Bachelor Honours Degree in Human Resource Management level 8. Furthermore, students may also, where applicable, endeavour to take up challenges in existing human resource professional qualifications offered by the University (e.g., Honours Degree in Human Resource Management).Vertically, the Bachelor Degree in Human Resource Management grants admission to Bachelor Honours Degree in Human Resource Management. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission in marketing and Business Administration programmes.

Credit TransferCredit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.to be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses. The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years. Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements. Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting.

104

Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification.Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. no more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit. The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final. The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.




Human Resource Management Research Project taken in the last year of study, the human resource management research project is meant to engage students in research with a faculty member designated to a student by the faculty in order to generate knowledge necessary to complete all the requirements for the award of the qualification. each student must independently complete a 10 000 – 15 000 words research project. The research should be original on a topic related to teaching and learning. The research should have a clear defined problem statement, a review of the existing literature on

105

the chosen topic, original evidence offered to support research project, consideration of alternative rival hypothesis, and a conclusion with recommendations.




Course Title


Mathematics MtH51Us 100 5 10Basic It skills BIt41Us 100 4 10

Microeconomics MIe50Us 100 5 10Applied english Language skills AeL40Us 100 4 10Introduction to entrepreneurship Ien40Us 100 4 10Foundation of Human Resource Management

FHR50Us 100 5 10

Principles of Management PoM50Us 100 5 10


Course Title


Principles of Marketing PMK50Us 100 5 10Human Capital Development HCD50Us 100 5 10

Management Information systems MIs60Us 100 6 10Business ethics Bne50Us 100 5 10Labour Relations LR151Us 100 5 10Relationship Marketing RMK50Us 100 5 10Management organisation MoR51Us 100 5 10Total 140

106

YEAR 2(110 credits)


Course Title


Human Resource Development HRD60Us 100 6 10Macroeconomics MRC60Us 100 6 10


nAP61Us 100 6 10

Marketing Management MMA51Us 100 6 10Managing People MAP61Us 100 6 10organizational Behaviour oBe61Us 100 6 10


Course Title


Business Law BLA61Us 100 6 10Human Asset Management HAM60Us 100 6 10

Competency- based training Development

CtD60Us 100 6 10

Labour Relations II LR261Us 100 6 10Professional Communication PRC60Us 100 6 10Total

107

YEAR 3(120 credits)


Course Title


talent Management and Workforce Development

tMW70Us 100 7 10

strategic Human Resource sHU70Us 100 7 10

Project Management PRM61Us 100 6 10Labour Relations III LR360Us 100 7 10Research Methodology RMe71Us 100 7 20strategic entrepreneurship sen70Us 100 7 10


Course Title


employee Health and safety eHs70Us 100 7 10Labour economics LAe70Us 100 7 10

Internship In170Us 100 7 30Total 370

108

Bachelor of Marketing Management (Level 7)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 30 -Level 5 credits 90 -Level 6 credits: 120 -Level 7 credits: 140 -Minimum total credits required: 380 -

Rationale

Bachelor of Marketing Management Level 7 is designed to make a positive contribution to Marketing management in namibia and the world. It aims to produce effective marketing cadres for the namibia nation and beyond.

Purpose

Bachelor of Marketing Management Level 7 will produce people who will make practical contributions to the industry and commerce in namibia and beyond. Admission /entry Requirementsto be admitted to study for this qualification, one shall have satisfied the minimum conditions for entry to degree studies at this University as prescribed under the entry requirements in the IUM General Academic Regulations. This includes a minimum of 25 points from a namibia senior secondary Certificate (ordinary or Higher or a combination of both) or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including english at Grade D minimum) normally in not more than three examination sittings. i. A recognised qualification at nQF level 6 or equivalent ii. Mature age entry, provided that they: a) Are 25 years old or over in the year in which admission is sought b) Have at least 2 years’ experience c) Have at least a pass at grade 10 d) Provide a suitable reference from a recognised public official

Meeting of these requirements will not automatically guarantee admission into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests.

Qualification Duration Any student beginning studies in the university in the first year of a programme must from the date of the first registration complete this qualification within a minimum of

109

3 years and maximum 5 years after which failure to obtain this qualification the studies will be discontinued.

The qualification comprises of semesters, per academic year. There are six (6) semesters. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes for the whole qualification

Holders of this qualification are able to: • Apply key marketing concepts, theories and techniques for analyzing a variety of

marketing organizations.• Report the dynamic nature of the environment in which marketing decisions are


• Construct and use marketing concepts, and theories in evaluating the impacts of environmental changes on marketing planning, strategies and practices.

• Produce international marketing strategies for various organizations.

Credit SystemReference is made to the internationally acceptable formula: one (1) credit equates ten (10) notional hours (learning).The general guideline for teaching and learning time per course.

Articulation Bachelor of Marketing Management at nQF Level 7 grants admissions to the Bachelor of Marketing Management Honours or any other related qualification at nQF Level 8 to students who are to be gainfully employed or become consultants. students may also, where applicable, move into other existing marketing professional qualifications.


Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements. Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years

110

since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification. Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning. Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. no more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit. The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is for any reason deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final. The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

Assessment Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course. Final examinations The final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally. Marketing Research Project taken in the last year of study, the marketing research project is meant to engage students in research with a faculty member designated to a student by the faculty in order to generate knowledge necessary to complete all the requirements for the award of the qualification. each student must independently complete a 10 000 – 15 000 word research project. The research should be original on a topic related to teaching and learning. The research should have a clearly defined problem statement, a review of the existing literature on the chosen topic, original evidence offered to support research project, consideration of alternative rival hypothesis, and a conclusion with recommendations. Upon completion of writing the research project, the students will be required to present their research findings before a faculty selected project panel. supplementary examinations A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination. A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student

111

may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying a deficit of more than 30% of the courses or credits.

Practical Assessment All students should acquire field experience in the Third year of study and submit a report - this field experience amounts to 30 credits.

Award of the qualification Candidates will be eligible to be awarded the Bachelor in Marketing Management when they have passed all the required courses and successfully completed the education research project as specified in the relevant qualification regulations and have fulfilled any other additional requirements stipulated in the IUM student policies.


112



Course Title


Applied english Language skills AeL40Us 100 4 10Basic It skills BIt41Us 100 4 10

Mathematics MtH51Us 100 5 10Introduction to entrepreneurship Ien40Us 100 4 10Micro economics MIe50Us 100 5 10Financial Accounting I FAC51Us 100 5 10Total NQF Level 4 Credits 60




Communication skills GCs41Us 100 5 10Cost Accounting CAC60Us 100 5 10

Quantitative Methods I QM51Us 100 5 10Principles of Marketing PMK50Us 100 5 10Human Capital Management HCM50Us 100 5 10Principles of Management PMK50Us 100 5 10Total NQF Level 5 Credits 60Total Year 1 Hours & Credits 1200 120

113

YEAR 2(120 credits)





IeI60Us 100 6 10

organizational Behavior oBe61Us 100 6 10

Critical Thinking skills Cts51Us 100 6 10Marketing Management MMA51Us 100 6 10Macroeconomics MRC60Us 100 6 10Financial Accounting II FA260Us 100 6 10Total NQF Level 6 Credits 60




Quantitative Methods II QM261Us 100 6 10Professional Communication PRC60Us 100 6 10

operations Management oPM60Us 100 6 10Management Accounting MAC61Us 100 6 10Management Information system MIs60Us 100 6 10Business Law BLA61Us 100 6 10Total NQF Level 6 Credits 60Total Year 2 Hours & Credits 1200 120

114

YEAR 3(140 credits)


Course Title


strategic entrepreneurship sen70Us 100 7 10Managerial economics MAe70Us 100 7 10

strategic Management sMn70Us 100 7 10Competency-based training and Development

CtD60Us 100 7 10

International Marketing InM70Us 100 7 10Research Methodology RMe71Us 100 7 20Total NQF Level 7 Credits 60


Course Title


Business Logistics and supplies Chain Management

BLs70Us 100 7 10

Business Leadership Dynamics BLD70Us 100 7 10

total Quality Management tQM70Us 100 7 10Marketing Research Project MRP70Us 100 7 10Internship In370Us 100 7 30Total Credits 1200 120

115

Bachelor in Human Resource Management (Honours) Level 8


Rationale The Bachelor Honours Degree in Human Resource Management is designed to equip students with real life human resource tools required for employment and wealth creation in namibia.

Purpose The programme exposes students to the twenty-first century skills, knowledge, and understanding of human resource functions in private and public-sector organizational environments.

Admission RequirementsThe entry requirements for the Bachelor in Human Resource management Honours shall be a recognized Bachelor qualification at nQF level 7 or equivalent.

Qualification Duration Fulltime/Part-time mode - Minimum: 1 Year; Maximum: 2 Years. The qualification comprises of two semester per academic year. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes for the whole qualification Upon the completion of this course students are able to:• Demonstrate knowledge, skills, and understanding of human resource principles

and concepts.• Apply human resource management knowledge and skills learnt in class and

practical in human resource functional area both in private and public- sector organisational environments.

• Project human resource needs in the organisation.• engage in human resource recruitment and selection processes.• Display skills to induct and orient new employees into the organisation.• Apply the skills to carry out gap analysis in the work place.• Plan, organise and coordinate staff development and competency training

programmes.• Demonstrate the understanding of employee termination and disciplinary

procedures.• organise and coordinate performance appraisals. • Redesign job processes for purpose of job enrichment and efficient execution. • Develop reward and personnel policies, systems and procedures.

116

• explore and analyse management and organisation theory, organisational behaviour and development approaches, labour relations theory and practice, and interpersonal skill development and how these could be blended in the vision and mission statements of the organisations in order for them to be able to compete in certain and uncertain environments.

Articulation Bachelor Honours Degree in Human Resource Management gives students admission to a Masters Degree in Human Resource Management level 9. Furthermore, students may also, where applicable, endeavour to take up challenges in existing human resource professional qualifications offered by the University (e.g., Master’s Degree in Human Resource Management).

Vertically, the Bachelor Honours Degree in Human Resource Management grants admission to Masters Degree in Human Resource Management. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission in marketing and Business Administration programmes.

Credit TransferCredit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.

to be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses.

The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.

Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.

Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting.

Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification.

Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.

117

Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. no more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.

The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is for any reason deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.

The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.




Human Resource Management Research Project

taken in the last year of study, the human resource management research project is meant to engage students in research with a faculty member designated to a student by the faculty in order to generate knowledge necessary to complete all the requirements for the award of the qualification. each student must independently complete a 10 000 – 15 000 word research project. The research should be original on a topic related to Human Resources Mangement. The research should have a clearly defined problem statement, a review of the existing literature on the chosen topic, original evidence offered to support research project,

118

consideration of alternative rival hypothesis, and a conclusion with recommendations.




Course Title


Compulsory CoursesCorporate Governance and Management

100 8 10

Labour Relations IV 100 8 10ethics in Business environment 100 8 10Information systems in Human Resource and Policies

100 8 10

Elective (Select one)Leadership Dynamics 100 8 10Applied entrepreneurship Management

100 8 10


Course Title


Compulsory Coursesstrategic Human Resources: Case Analysis

100 8 10

employee Performance Management

100 8 10

Workers’ Rights and Democracy 100 8 10Research Project 100 8 10

Elective (Select one)negotiation and Conflict Management

100 8 10

Comparative employment systems 100 8 10Total 140

119

Bachelor of Marketing Management Honours (Level 8)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 8 credits: 130 -Minimum total credits required: 130 -

Rationale

Bachelor of Marketing Management Honours Level 8 contributes towards developing of candidates into marketing human resources experts that meet the needs and challenges of our fast growing local and global markets. This qualification is designed to impart marketing skills which are useful for successful marketing careers, creation of thriving business relationships in the interactive task of market research, analysis of consumer behaviour, selling and promotion of services.

Purpose

The Bachelor of Marketing Management Honours Level 8 is designed to provide the graduate marketing manager with a forum (both written and oral) for presenting and defending their own marketing decisions and for critically examining and discussing the recommendations of others.

Admission /Entry Requirements

to be admitted to study for this qualification, one shall have satisfied the minimum conditions for entry to Bachelor Honours degree studies at this University as prescribed under the entry requirements in the IUM General Academic Regulations. This requires a Bachelor in Marketing Management at nQF Level 7 or any related qualification at nQF level 7 or equivalent from a recognized institution.

Qualification Duration The study period for the qualification is: • Fulltime/Part-time mode - Minimum: 1 Year; Maximum: 2 Years. • Distance Mode - Minimum: 2 Years; Maximum: 3 Years.

The qualification comprises of semesters per academic year. There are two (2) semesters. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

120


Holders of this qualification are able to:

• outline the essentials of customer service including an analysis of the many publics.• explain the process involved in recruiting, selecting, training, motivating,

compensating sales people.• Discuss sales territory and force management.• Discuss the various integrated communication tools and apply them to real business

environments.• Identify and interpret key concepts and terms related to e-marketing.• Illustrate the benefits and limitations of e-marketing tools in business. • List the advantages and disadvantages of the use of social media and tools in

e-marketing tools.• evaluate the relationship between market research and decision making.• Identify and construct the processes used in formulating and conducting market

research projects.• Discuss and analyse the key concepts of customer service and accounts management.• explain the role of customer relationship management systems.• Apply and demonstrate knowledge of the key the elements of strategic marketing.• Produce a strategic marketing plan.• Illustrate the new product development process.• Apply the theory diffusion of innovation.• Analyse the determinants of consumer buying behaviour and examine the consumer

buying process.• examine the purpose of retail marketing and compare various forms of retail

marketing.

Articulation Bachelor of Marketing Management Honours Level 8 grants admissions to Masters in Business Administration (Marketing specialisation) or any related qualification at nQF Level 9. students may also where applicable, move into other existing marketing professional qualifications.


121

Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the courses were equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements. Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification. Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.

Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. no more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit. The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is for any reason deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final. The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.


Final examinations: The final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally.

Marketing Research Project: taken in the last year of study, the marketing research project is meant to engage students in research with a faculty member designated to a student by the faculty in order to generate knowledge necessary to complete all the requirements for the award of the qualification.

each student must independently complete a 10 000 – 15 000 word research project. The research should be original on a topic related to Marketing Management. The research should have a clearly defined problem statement, a review of the existing literature on the chosen topic, original evidence offered to support research project, consideration of alternative rival hypothesis, and a conclusion with recommendations. Upon completion of writing the research project, the student would be required to present their research

122

findings before a faculty selected project panel.

Supplementary Examinations

student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination. A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying a deficit of more than 30% of the courses or credits. Practical teaching: All students should acquire field experience in the Third year of study and submit a report - this field experience amounts to 40 credits.

10. Modes of Teaching and Learning The teaching and learning processes will take place through lectures, tutorial activities and discussions, collaborative group tasks, practical projects, tests and written assignments.



Course Title


Compulsory CoursesMarketing Communication 100 8 10

Applied entrepreneurship Management

100 8 10

Product Development 100 8 10strategic Marketing I 100 8 10Game Theory for Managers 100 8 10Corporate Governance and Management

100 8 10

Total NQF Level 8 Credits 60

123


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesConsumer Behaviour 100 8 10

Retail Marketing 100 8 10strategic Marketing II 100 8 10Research Project 100 8 10negotiation and Conflict Management

100 8 10

Total NQF Level 8 Credits 70Total Year 1 Hours & Credits 1100 130

124

Bachelor in Public Policy and Management Honours Degree -Level 8

PurposeThe purpose of the Bachelor in Public Policy and Management Honours degree programme is to expose students to the concepts and tools used in management and the evaluation of public policy options and outcomes in a variety of contexts. The programme particularly offers skills necessary to assess the performance of alternative approaches to policy making and implementation, evaluation of management effectiveness, and understanding of the political constraints faced by policy makers and managers. The programme will also equip students with the tools to tackle challenging problems such as expanding services to meet the needs of changing populations, implementing information technologies that better connect citizens to their governments, and improving responses to man-made and natural disasters.

Programme ObjectivesHolders of this qualification are able to:. Recognise, analyse, and synthesize the concepts, principles, and theories of public policy and management and their application.. Identify, share, and practise the essentials needed for public policy and management in the new era.. Create a personal paradigm of leadership and management that is responsive and transformative to the needs of contemporary times.. Initiate and participate in programmes that contribute to the improvement of public policy and management.

YeAR I (100 CReDIts)• BPP0D1 / BPM-1117 - Bureaucracy, Politics & Policy• LMP0D1 / BPM-1127 - Leadership and Management Theories and Practices in Public Management• ECN0D1 / BPM-1137 - Economics• QMB0D1 / BPM-1147 - Quantitative Methods for Business• LET0D1 / BPM-1187 - Leadership and Ethics• BCS0D1 / BPM-1167 - Business Communication Skills• IT10D1 / BPM-1177 - IT Skills• CTH0D1 / BPM-1157 - Critical Thinking• BRE0D1 / BPM-1217 - Institutions and Policy in Business Regulation• SDY0D1 / BPM-1237 - Systems DynamicsChoose one from the following:• SPS0D1 / BPM-1227 - Social Psychology• PP00D1 / BPM-1247 - Social Problems and Policy

\

125

YeAR II (120 CReDIts)• TPM0D2 / BPM-2218 - Methodological Tools for Public Policy and Management• PTA0D2 / BPM-2228 - Planning Theory and Analysis• ED10D2 / BPM-2238 - Economic Development Policy and Planning• URE0D2 / BPM-2248 - Urban and Regional Economic Development• LPP0D2 / BPM-2258 - Law & Public Policy• OBH0D2 / BPM-2268 - Organisational Behaviour• PUA0D2 / BPM-2278 - Public Administration and Politics• ECL0D2 / BPM-2288 - Economics and Labour

Choose two from the following:• SLF0D2 / BPM-2318 - State and Local Public Finance• SCE0D2 / BPM-2338 - Social Morality & Citizenship Education in a Pluralistic society• GMM0D2 / BPM-2348 - Government and the Mass Media

YeAR III (120 CReDIts)• STS0D3 / BPM-3318 - Systems Thinking and Strategic Management• PPA0D3 / BPM-3328 - Policy Analysis in Public Administration• IND0D3 / BPM-3338 - International Trade and Development• MDS0D3 / BPM-3348 - Computer Modelling for Decision Support• EED0D3 / BPM-3358 - Entrepreneurship and Economic Development• INT0D3 / BPM-3999 - Internship – PracticumChoose one from the following:• IPE0D3 / BPM-3418 - International Political Economy• PLM0D3 / BPM-3428 - Public Leadership and Management YeAR IV (140 CReDIts)• PAP0D4 / BPM-4418 - Professional Application for Public Policy and Management• GVC0D4 / BPM-4428 - Governance and Compliance• XPP0D4 / BPM-4999 - Field Project: ResearchChoose one from the following:• ED20D4 / BPM-4518 - Economic Development Policy and Planning• PNM0D4 / BPM-4528 - Public and Non-profit Management• GVP0D4 / BPM-4538 - Governance and Public Policy

127

FACULTY OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY

128

DePARtMent oF InFoRMAtIon teCHnoLoGY (It)Certificate in Business Information Systems (Level 5)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 30 -Level 5 Credits 80 -Minimum total credits required: 110 -

RationaleThe Certificate in Business Information systems Qualification is designed in response to the information technology challenges affecting namibia and the region. namibia suffers a shortage of well-trained computer specialists and as the Information technology (It) industry continues with its rapid growth, so does that shortage become greater. The growth requires certain skills and competences in information technology. The qualification is motivated by the increasingly critical role of information systems within organizations which has created a demand for graduates who are knowledgeable about both information systems and business.

Purpose Information is the currency of the future. our community desperately needs people who understand the business world, and who at the same time excel in applying information technology to produce desirable outcomes. This qualification will equip the students with the essential tools and proven techniques – including business as well as It skills specialising in the development of software that can help solve specific problems technically to spearhead major developmental initiatives and create cultures of innovation and engagement. The course is designed to give students a competitive advantage in pursuing a career in business or It based on the blending of technological and business competencies. This course will helps students to understand development concepts and professional issues relevant to business information systems. The main purpose of this course is to bring an integration of Information systems in the Business environment with management issues.

Admission Requirements The entry requirements to Business Information systems shall be:i) Hold a Higher International General Certificate of secondary education (HIGCse) senior certificate in five subjects with 1 – 4 symbolsii) Hold a grade 12 senior certificate International General Certificate of secondary education (IGCse) with a minimum of e grade in english, a D grade in Mathematics,

129

(A candidate with an e grade in Mathematics may be admitted with approval from the faculty Dean/HoDs), and a D grade in any three other subjects. All should total twenty points or more.iii) Mature age entry, provided that they: a) Are 25 years old or over in the year in which admission is soughtb) Have at least 2 years’ experiencec) Have at least a pass at grade 10d) Provide a suitable reference from a recognised public official e) Meeting of these requirements will not automatically guarantee admission into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate. iv) The equivalent of any of the above as determined by University senate.

Qualification DurationThe study period for the programme is:Minimum: 1Year and a Maximum: 2 Years.The programme comprises a minimum of two (2) semesters, i.e. two (2) semesters per academic year. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to: a) Demonstrate an understanding of information systems and computer technologies;b) Analyse Information technology systems in terms of architecture, Function, operation, and business value;c) Demonstrate responsible, resourceful, and ethical behaviour as demanded by industry.

Award of the qualificationThis qualification will be awarded to people credited with 110 credits. All 110 credits are from compulsory subjects. Candidates will be eligible for the appropriate qualification when they have passed all the required courses specified in the relevant programme regulations and have fulfilled any additional requirements stipulated in the IUM student policies.

ArticulationIUM courses articulate from qualification to qualification as per the statement in course contents.Vertical articulation, certificate in Business information systems grants admission a Diploma in Business Information systems. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Diploma in related field. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing new related diploma with approval by DeAns and HoDs

130

With other institutions, the IUM will decide if and how course work from qualifications from other institutions will articulate with IUM courses. Appeals may be submitted to senate

Credit transferCredit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.


The awarded credits are governed by the IUM Certificate program rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.

Generally, credits will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the courses were equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.

Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is out-dated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting.






131

Assessmentspecial assessment arrangements are based on the following:tests, assignments, group work and practical and written examinations will be used to assess the students. Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Both Formative and summative assessment techniques are used.Formative assessment techniques are used to monitor student learning during the learning process. The feedback gathered is used to identify areas where students are struggling so that instructors can adjust their teaching and students can adjust their studying. summative assessment techniques are used to evaluate student learning. These assessments are appreciated at the end of a course to measure the extent to which students have achieved the desired learning outcomes. The major components of this technique are:• Exams. This includes final exams, and tests at the end of course units. • Papers, projects, and presentations. These give students the chance to go deeper with the material to put the knowledge they have acquired to use or create something new from it. • Portfolios. These give students a chance to spell out the concepts or techniques used with each course, the themes addressed, and hurdles faced so as to bring a sense of completion to the learning process.

Coursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Final ExaminationsThe final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally.

Supplementary ExaminationsA student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination.

132

A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying more than 50% of the courses or credits.

Teaching methods/strategiesThe delivery methods for this qualification comprises of the full and part time learning mode. Contact hours for the full and part time learning mode are face-to- face encounters on weekly basis.The following are the methods of delivery:• Flipped Classroom• Design Thinking (Case Method) • Self-learning• Social Media• Online Learning Tools

Certificate (110credits)


Course Title


Applied english Language skills AeL40Us 4 4 10

Computer systems and Architecture CAR50Us 4 5 10Principles of Computer Programming

CPR50Us 4 5 10

Basic It skills BIt41Us 4 4 10Mathematics MtH51Us 4 5 10


Course Title


Communication skills GCs41Us 4 5 10

systems Analysis sYA51Us 4 5 10PC Maintenance PCM50Us 4 5 10Programming with C++ PCP50Us 4 4 10Introduction to entrepreneurship Ien40Us 4 5 10Financial Accounting FAC51Us 4 5 10

133

Diploma in Business Information Systems (Level 6)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 5credits: 30Level 6 credits: 184 -Level 7 Credits 10 -Level 8 credits: 10Minimum total credits required: 234 -

RationaleWith a global and regional shortage of skilled people in information and communications technology, this qualification was designed in response to strong industry demand. The course aims to give a thorough understanding of information technology tools and specialist knowledge in management, marketing or accounting. It offers the opportunity to develop a mixture of skills in the two complementary areas of information systems and business.

Purpose Information is the currency of the future. our community desperately needs people who understand the business world, and who at the same time excel in applying information technology to produce desirable outcomes. This qualification will equip students with the essential tools and proven techniques – including business as well as It skills specialising in the development of software that can help solve specific problems technically to spearhead major developmental initiatives and create cultures of innovation and engagement. The course will provide students with broad business-oriented knowledge and indispensable It-oriented skills.

Admission Requirements

The entry requirements to the Diploma in Business Information systems shall be:I) Hold an IUM Certificate in Business Information systems; or, related certificate qualification at level 5 from other recognised institution II) The equivalent of the above as determined by University senate.

Qualification DurationThe study period for the programme is:Minimum: 2 Year Maximum: 4 Years.The programme comprises a minimum of two (2) semesters in the academic year. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

134

Outcomes of the whole Qualification


• Pursue careers in areas such as computer support systems, internet-related technology, and business systems; and use information systems to support key business functions;

• Demonstrate an understanding of theory and methods of object-oriented modelling and the fundamentals of object-oriented development process models;

• Apply business intelligence techniques to analyses data in order to understand and improve business performance and Design and create usable and attractive dynamic websites;

• Apply presentations, writing, speaking and organizational skills in Information technology (It) business professional environment;

• Demonstrate understanding, entrepreneurship and innovation skills by applying models and theories of entrepreneurship in real life It business environment;

• Demonstrate an understanding of information systems in relations to financial accounting theories within the prescribed international and local legal framework;

• explain basic concepts and ethical dimensions of research method and theories associated with project management.

• Understand and explain human resources concepts and expertise used in organization today;

• Demonstrate an understanding of mathematical and statistical theories and terminologies and their application in real life situations

Award of the qualificationThis qualification will be awarded to people credited with 240 credits. All 240 credits are from compulsory subjects.

ArticulationIUM courses articulate from qualification to qualification as per the statement in course contents. Vertical articulation: Diploma in Business information systems grants admission to Bachelors in Business Information systems. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Bachelors in related field. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing new related Bachelors with approval by Deans and HoDs With other institutions, the IUM will decide if and how course work from qualifications from other institutions will articulate with IUM courses. Appeals may be submitted to senate

Credit transferCredit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit

135

transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.


The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.

Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the courses were equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.





The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.

The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average. Assessmentspecial assessment arrangements are based on the following:tests, assignments, group works and practical and written examinations will be used to assess the students. Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

136




Supplementary ExaminationsA student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination. A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying more than 50% of the courses or credits.

Teaching methods/strategiesThe delivery methods for this qualification comprises of the part time and full time learning mode. Contact hours for learning mode are face-to- face encounters on weekly basis The following are the methods of delivery:

137

a) Flipped Classroomb) Design Thinking (Case Method) c) self-learningd) social Mediae) online Learning tools



Course Title


Compulsory CoursesIntermediate entrepreneurship and Innovation

IeI60Us 4 6 10

Critical Thinking skills Cts51Us 4 5 10object oriented Programming with Java

JAV61Us 4 6 10

systems Design sDe60Us 4 6 10Fundamentals of Databases FDA60Us 4 6 10

Financial Accounting II FA260Us 4 6 10

SEMESTER 2 (60 credits)Course Title


Compulsory CoursesData Communication and Computer networking

DnW60Us 4 6 10

Advanced Databases Design ADD70Us 4 7 10Web Development WDe60Us 4 6 10operating systems oPs51Us 4 5 10Quantitative Methods I 4 5 10

138



Course Title


Compulsory CoursesManagement Information systems MIs60Us 4 6 10

Introductory engineering Calculus ICC70Us 4 6 10Data structures Dst60U 4 6 15Research Methodology RMe71Us 4 7 20


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesProfessional Communication PRC60Us 4 6 10

Project Management for ICt PMI80Us 4 6 10Digital Marketing DMK60U 4 6 10Quantitative Methods II QM261Us 4 6 10Mini Project BIP70Us 6 6 20

139

Bachelor of Science in Business Information Systems NQF Level 7

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 40 -Level 5 80 -Level 6 124 -Level 7 110 -Level 8 10Minimum total credits required: 364 -

Rationale

The Government of the Republic of namibia (GRn) adopted a long-term perspective plan namely Vision 2030. This national economic blue print serves as a basis for planning namibia’s future. Vision 2030 envisages namibia transitioning into an industrialised and globally competitive country of equal opportunity, realising its maximum growth potential in a sustainable manner, with improved quality of life for everyone. In order to achieve this goal, namibia needs to develop human capital as well as institutional capacity to train people needed to meet the envisaged demand of the namibian technological-based economy. Developing human capital especially in information technology is not a sole responsibility of government. The corporate world, both private and public, has a social responsibility of complementing government efforts in the development of the requisite information technology skills toward a knowledge driven society. The IUM Vision (to encourage and develop an African cadre of men and women who can operate at international standards in business) dovetails perfectly into Vision 2030 on the development of It skilled human capital.

Purposenamibia suffers a shortage of well-trained computer specialists and as the It industry continues with its rapid growth so does that shortage become greater. The IUM Business Information systems Bachelor degree was designed in response to strong industry demand. This course aims to give students a thorough understanding of information technology tool and specialist knowledge in management, marketing or accounting. It offers the opportunity to develop a mixture of skills in the two complementary areas of information systems and business/management.This degree is designed to make a positive and practical contribution to hardware and software design and to improve the management of performance and problem solving. It is concerned with the education and training of young information systems managers who can help to improve the efficiency and effectiveness of management in the private and public sectors.

140

Admission RequirementsThe entry requirements to the Bachelor in Business Information systems shall be:i. Higher International General Certificate of secondary education (HIGCse) senior certificate in five subjects with 1 - 4 symbolsii. Grade 12 senior certificates or International General Certificate of secondary education (IGCse) with a minimum of D grade in english, a D grade in Mathematics, (A candidate with an e grade in Mathematics may be admitted with approval from the faculty Dean/HoDs), and a C grade in any three other subjects. All should total twenty five points or moreiii. Mature age entry, provided that they: a) Are 25 years old or over in the year in which admission is soughtb) Have at least 2 years’ experiencec) Have at least a pass at grade 10d) Provide a suitable reference from a recognised public official e) Meeting of these requirements will not automatically guarantee admission into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate. iv. The equivalent of any of the above as determined by University senate.


The study period for the qualification is:Fulltime/Part-time mode - Minimum: 3 Years; Maximum: 5 Years.The qualification comprises of semesters. There are two (2) semesters per academic year. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to:• Demonstrate a critical awareness and understanding of the main functional areas in

Information technology and the Business environment as a whole.• Identify and troubleshoot problems related to computer software and hardware.• Analyse existing systems in business, identify problems in the current systems

and be in a position to solve such problems by developing new systems or adding functionalities to the existing ones.

• efficiently and effectively manage businesses in the private and public sectors.• Demonstrate how to deal with the challenges of developing, implementing, maintaining and managing information systems.• Recognize and understand, from a local and global standpoint the problems associated with business information systems management• Identify problems and develop a range of short term mid-term and long term solutions.

Award of the qualificationThis qualification will be awarded to people credited with 364 credits. All 364 credits are from compulsory subjects. Candidates will be eligible for the appropriate qualification when they have passed all

141

the required courses specified in the relevant programme regulations and have fulfilled any additional requirements stipulated in the IUM student policies.

ArticulationIUM courses articulate from qualification to qualification as per the statement in course contents. The IUM will decide if and how course work from qualifications from other institutions will articulate with IUM courses. Appeals may be submitted to senateVertically, Bachelor of Business Information systems grants admissions to Honours in Business Information systems. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to a Bachelors Degree. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related Information technology field with approval of the faculty Deans and HoD to any related Bachelor Degree.

Credit transfer

Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.


The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree program rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.

Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.

Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting.




142



Assessment

special assessment arrangements are based on the following:tests, assignments, group work and practical and written examinations will be used to assess the students. Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.


Coursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. students must score at least 50% in each course /course coursework to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

143




Teaching methods/strategiesThe delivery methods for this qualification comprises of the part time and full time learning mode. Contact hours for learning mode are face-to- face encounters on weekly basis The following are the methods of delivery:• Flipped Classroom• Design Thinking (Case Method) • Self-learning• Social Media• Online Learning Tools• Qualification Structure



Course Title


Compulsory CoursesApplied english Language skills AeL40Us 100 4 10

Basic It skills BIt41Us 100 4 10Introduction to entrepreneurship Ien40Us 100 4 10Financial Accounting for ICt FAC51Us 100 5 10Computer systems and Architecture CAR50Us 100 5 10Principles of Computer Programming

CPR50Us 100 5 10

144


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesCommunication skills DnW60Us 100 5 10

systems Analysis sYA51Us 100 5 10Programming with C++ PCP50Us 100 5 10Discrete Mathematics DMt50Us 100 5 10operating systems oPs51Us 100 5 10Data Communication and Computer networking

DnW60Us 100 5 20

YEAR 2 (120 credits)SEMESTER 1 (64 credits)

Course Title


Compulsory CoursesBusiness statistics BUs50Us 100 5 10

Introductory engineering Calculus IeI60Us 100 6 10systems Design sDe60Us 100 6 14object oriented Programming with Java

JAV61Us 100 6 10

Fundamentals of Databases FDt60Us 100 6 10Introductory engineering Calculus ICC70Us 100 6 10


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesProject Management for ICt PMI80Us 100 8 10

Web Development WDe60Us 100 6 10Advanced database Design ADD60Us 100 7 10Management Information systems MIs60Us 100 6 10Professional Communication PRC60Us 100 6 10Research Methodology RMe71Us 100 7 20

145



Course Title


Compulsory Coursesstrategic entrepreneurship sen70Us 100 7 10

Visual Programming with VB.net VBn70Us 100 7 14Advanced web Development AWD70Us 100 7 14Business Process Reengineering BPR70Us 100 7 14Business and It Law BIL70Us 100 7 14Business Intelligence BIn70Us 100 7 14

SEMESTER 2 (30credits)

Course Title


Compulsory CoursesInternship In370Us 7 30

Mini Project BIP70Us 7 30

146

Bachelor of Science in Business Information Systems Honours NQF Level 8


Rationale

The Government of the Republic of namibia (GRn) adopted a long-term perspective plan namely Vision 2030. This national economic blue print serves as a basis for planning namibia’s future. Vision 2030 envisages namibia transitioning into an industrialised and globally competitive country of equal opportunity, realising its maximum growth potential in a sustainable manner, with improved quality of life for everyone. In order to achieve this goal, namibia needs to develop human capital as well as institutional capacity to train people needed to meet the envisaged demand of the namibian technological-based economy. Developing human capital especially in information technology is not a sole responsibility of government. The corporate world, both private and public, has a social responsibility of complementing government efforts in the development of the requisite information technology skills toward a knowledge driven society. Purposenamibia suffers a shortage of well-trained computer specialists and as the It industry continues with its rapid growth so does that shortage become greater. The IUM Business Information systems Bachelor Honours degree was designed in response to the information technology challenges affecting namibia and the region. namibia is a fast growing technologically-based economy. The growth requires certain skills and competences in information technology. By the time the graduates have successfully completed this degree qualification, their acquired knowledge of computer systems and management will enable them to analyse, design and implement information systems solutions in a wide range of real world managerial problems. They will be able to recognize the multidisciplinary nature of information systems, be familiar with information system architecture and be able to evaluate information system effectiveness in a business enterprise.


The entry requirements to the Bachelor of science in Business Information systems shall be:i. Bachelor Degree in Business Information systems or its equivalentii. Higher International General Certificate of secondary education (HIGCse) senior certificate in five subjects with 1 - 4 symbolsiii. Grade 12 senior certificates or International General Certificate of secondary education (IGCse) with a minimum of D grade in english, a D grade in Mathematics,

147

(A candidate with an e grade in Mathematics may be admitted with approval from the faculty Dean/HoDs), and a C grade in any three other subjects. All should total twenty five points or more.iv. The equivalent of any of the above as determined by University senate.v. Mature age entry, provided that they: a. Are 25 years old or over in the year in which admission is soughtb. Have at least 2 years’ experiencec. Have at least a pass at grade 10d. Provide a suitable reference from a recognised public official e. Meeting of these requirements will not automatically guarantee admission into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate.vi. The equivalent of any of the above as determined by University senate


The study period for the qualification is:Fulltime/Part-time mode - Minimum: 1 Year; Maximum: 2 Years.The qualification comprises of semesters, per academic year. There are two (2) semesters. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to:• Demonstrate a critical awareness and understanding of the main functional areas in Information technology and the Business environment as a whole.• Identify and troubleshoot problems related to computer software and hardware.• Analyse existing systems in business, identify problems in the current systems and be in a position to solve such problems by developing new systems or adding functionalities to the existing ones.• Efficiently and effectively manage businesses in the private and public sectors.

Award of the qualification

This qualification will be awarded to people credited with 120 credits. 96 credits are from compulsory subjects and 24 from elective subjects. Candidates will be eligible for the appropriate qualification when they have passed all the required courses specified in the relevant programme regulations and have fulfilled any additional requirements stipulated in the IUM student policies.

ArticulationIUM courses articulate from qualification to qualification as per the statement in course contents. The IUM will decide if and how course work from qualifications from other institutions will articulate with IUM courses. Appeals may be submitted to senate.

148

Vertically, Bachelor Honours of Business Information systems grants admissions to a related Honours degree. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to Bachelor Honours Degree. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related Information technology field with approval of the faculty Deans and HoD to any related Bachelor Honours Degree

Credit transfer



The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree program rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.

Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the courses were equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.






149


Assessment

special assessment arrangements are based on the following:tests, assignments, group works and practical and written examinations will be used to assess the students. Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.




150


A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination.


Teaching methods/strategies

The delivery methods for this qualification comprises of the part time and full time learning mode. Contact hours for learning mode are face-to- face encounters on a weekly basis. The following are the methods of delivery:• Flipped Classroom• Design Thinking (Case Method) • Self-learning• Social Media• Online Learning Tools

151



Course Title


Compulsory CoursesApplied entrepreneurship management

100 8 10

Mobile Applications development 100 8 14Advanced Computer systems and Architecture

100 8 14

expert systems 100 8 14


Course Title


Compulsory Coursesenterprise Resource Planning systems

100 8 14

e-commerce 100 8 14Computer Auditing 100 8 14Research Project 100 8 30Year total credits 1 124

152

•Master of Science in Information Technology (Level 9) * and •PhD in Information Communication Technology* (Level 10)*Information on these programmes is in the appropriate sections in the postgraduate studies part of this prospectus.

153

DEPARTMENT OF SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT (SD)

Bachelor of Science in Software Development NQF Level: 7

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 30 -Level 5 credits: 90 -Level 6 credits: 104 -Level 7 credits: 130 -Level 8 credits: 10 -Minimum total credits required: 364 -

RationaleThe Bachelor of science in software Development is being introduced to eradicate the shortage of software developers in namibia and the whole of Africa. The qualification is developed in line with the nQF requirements and addresses the need for programming expertise in the It industry.

PurposeThe software development programme was designed in response to the information technology challenges affecting namibia and the region. namibia is a fast growing technologically-based economy. The growth requires certain skills and competences in information technology. This qualification will equip the students with the essential tools and proven techniques – including business as well as It skills specialising in the development of software that can help solve specific problems technically – to spearhead major developmental initiatives and create cultures of innovation and engagement.

The software Development Qualification addresses the shortage of software developers nationally and regionally. With the availability of such expertise in namibia, outsourcing of computer software from other countries will be eliminated. stakeholders confirmed the need and relevance of this qualification.

Admission Requirements to be admitted for this qualification, one shall have satisfied the minimum conditions for entry to degree studies at this University as prescribed under the entry requirements in the IUM General Academic Regulations. This includes a minimum of 25 points from a namibia senior secondary Certificate (ordinary or Higher or a combination of both) or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including english at Grade D minimum) normally in not more than three examination sittings.

154

Qualification DurationThe study period for the programme is:Minimum: 3 Years.Maximum: 5 Years.The programme comprises a minimum of eight (8) semesters, i.e. two (2) semesters per academic year. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December. Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to: d) Demonstrate a broad understanding of software development, information systems and computer technologies.e) Analyse complex Information technology systems in terms of architecture, function, operation, and business value.f) Design and implement enterprise scale projects.g) Utilize analytic skills to solve complex problems, developing and presenting solutions, in an ever-changing environment.h) Demonstrate responsible, resourceful, and ethical behaviour as in the workplace.

ArticulationIUM courses articulate from qualification to qualification as per the statement in Course outlines. The IUM will decide if and how course work from qualifications from other institutions will articulate with IUM courses. Appeals may be submitted to senate.


to be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses.The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification.

155

Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. no more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

AssessmentCoursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the tests, assignments, projects, group work, activity presentations and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.



Teaching methods/strategiesThe delivery methods for this qualification comprises of the part time and distance learning mode. Contact hours for distance learning mode are face-to- face encounters on monthly basis and block periods during IUM academic breaks and other public holidays such as easter break.The following are the methods of delivery:• Face-to-face• Flipped Classroom• Design Thinking (Case Method)

156

• Self-learning• Social Media• Online Learning Tools

YEAR 1 ( 120 credits)

SEMESTER 1 ( 60 credits)

Course Title


Compulsory CoursesApplied english Language skills AeL40Us 4 4 10

Financial Accounting for ICt FAC51Us 4 5 10Computer systems and Architecture CAR50Us 4 5 10Principles of Computer Program-ming

CPR50Us 4 5 10

Basic It skills BIt41Us 4 4 10Introduction to entrepreneurship Ien40Us 4 4 10


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesCommunication skills GCs41Us 100 5 10

Data Communication and Comput-er networking

DnW60Us 100 6 10

systems Analysis sYA51Us 4 5 10Programming with C++ PCP50Us 4 5 10Discrete Mathematics DMt50Us 4 5 10operating systems oPs51Us 4 5 10

157



Course Title


Compulsory CoursesData structures Dst70U 4 7 14

Introductory engineering Calculus ICC70Us 4 6 10systems Design sDe60Us 4 6 14object oriented Programming with Java

JAV61Us 4 6 10

Fundamentals of Databases FDA60Us 4 6 10Business statistics BUs50Us 4 6 10

YEAR 2


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesProject Management for ICt PMI80Us 4 8 10

Web Development WDe60Us 4 6 10Advanced database Design ADD60Us 4 7 10Management Information systems MIs60Us 4 6 10Research Methodology RMe71Us 4 7 20Professional Communication PRC60Us 4 6 10

158



Course Title


Compulsory CoursesAdvanced Web Development AWD70Us 4 7 14

Human Computer Interaction HCI70Us 4 7 14Mobile Application Development MAD70Us 4 7 14Visual Programming with VB.net VBn70Us 4 7 14Intermediate entrepreneurship and Innovation

IeI60Us 4 6 10

Critical thinking skills Cts51Us 4 5 10


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesInternship In370Us 7 30

Mini Project BIP70Us 7 30

159

Bachelor of Science in Software Development Honours NQF Level: 8


RationaleThe Bachelor of science in software Development Honours is designed to eradicate the shortage of software developers in namibia and the whole of Africa. The qualification is developed in line with the nQF requirements while addressing the need for programming expertise in the It industry.

PurposeThe software development programme was designed in response to the information technology challenges affecting namibia and the region. namibia is a fast growing technologically-based economy. The growth requires certain skills and competences in information technology.

This qualification equips the students with the essential tools and proven techniques – including business as well as It skills specialising in the development of software that can help solve specific problems technically – to spearhead major developmental initiatives and create cultures of innovation and engagement.

Admission Requirements to be registered for this qualification – Bachelor in software Development Honours, candidates must hold a Bachelor in software Development at nQF Level 7 or any equivalent qualification from a recognized institution.

Qualification DurationThe study period for the programme is:Minimum: 1 YearMaximum: 2 Years.Contact hours will be given during and after normal working hours i.e. after 17h00 Monday-Friday or during weekends and public holidays. Faculty of It will advise.The programme comprises a minimum of eight (8) semesters, i.e. two (2) semesters per academic year. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to: • Demonstrate a broad understanding of software engineering, i n f o r m a t i o n systems and computer technologies.

160

• Analyse complex Information Technology systems in terms of architecture, function, operation, and business value.• Design and implement enterprise scale projects.• Utilize analytic skills to solve complex problems, developing and presenting solutions, in an ever-changing environment.• Demonstrate responsible, resourceful, and ethical behaviour in the workplace.

ArticulationIUM courses articulate from qualification to qualification as per the statement in course contents. once accomplished, the Bachelor in software Development Honours allows students to do their Master of Information technology or any other qualification at nQF Level 9.

Credit transferCredit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.to be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses.The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree program rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification.

Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. no more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.


161

AssessmentCoursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities, assignments, tests, projects, group works and presentations and other evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.



Teaching methods/strategiesThe delivery methods for this qualification comprises of the part time and distance learning mode. Contact hours for distance learning mode are face-to- face encounters on a monthly basis and block periods during IUM academic breaks and other public holidays such as easter break.The following are the methods of delivery:• Face-to-face• Flipped Classroom• Design Thinking (Case Method) • Self-learning• Social Media• Online Learning Tools

162



Course Title


Compulsory Coursesembedded systems and software 4 8 14

software Quality Assurance 4 8 14Programming with Python 4 8 14


Course Title


Compulsory Coursesoperations Research 4 8 14

Electives Courses (Select 2)Game Development 4 8 14Cryptography and network security 4 8 14Cyber security and Law 4 8 14Year CoursesResearch Project 4 8 40

163

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION (E & C)

Bachelor of Science in Electronics Honours (Level 8)

Compulsory Standards TotalCompulsory Elective

Level 4 credits: 20 - 20Level 5 credits: 40 - 40Level 6 credits: 80 20 100Level 7 credits: 110 50 160Level 8 credits: 90 130 20 240Total available credits: 340 200 20 560Total minimum credits required: 340 200 10 550

RationaleThe Bachelor of science in electronics Honours Level 8 forms a major part of a production or process industry setup instruments that are used to measure/monitor signals and then electronics, which, accordingly, form the foundation of electronics to understand electrical machinery/processes. In most modern systems / machines where automation is involved, electronics forms part of the system. Also, in research/academic, clinical and quality assurance/standards laboratories, electronics are used for measurements and testing. This makes electronics very important in engineering and science.The Bachelor of science in electronics Honours Level 8 has six specializations that are intended to produce highly trained manpower in electronics ready to take up the challenges in industrial research/design, and in management of industrial and commercial organizations. The programme is industry-oriented and is designed to produce graduate engineers capable of adapting to technological changes and in line with namibian Government Policy of industrialization as spelled out in Vision 2030 and in the national Human Resource Plan of the Republic of namibia.

PurposeThe Bachelor of science in electronics Honours Level 8 reflects the need for highly and appropriate qualified specialised electronics professionals in the namibian and sADC environment. It reflects further IUM’s mission statement of producing an African cadre of professionals who are capable of operating internationally in industry. By the time the graduates have successfully completed this degree qualification, their acquired knowledge of electronics in special areas in this field will enable them to analyse, design, and build an electronic equipment in a wide range of real world situations. They will be able to recognize the multidisciplinary nature of electronics, be familiar with electronics and be able to evaluate electronic systems effectiveness.

164

Admission RequirementsApplicants for the programme must have any one of the following qualifications:i. namibian secondary school Certificate (nssC) senior /higher certificate in five subjects with 1 - 4 symbolsii. Grade 12 senior certificates or International General Certificate of secondary education (IGCse) with a minimum of C grade in english, a D grade in Mathematics, and a D grade in any three other subjects (should include Physics, Chemistry and/or technical Drawing). All should total twenty-five points or more.iii. Mature age entry, provided that they: a. Are 25 years old or over in the year in which admission is soughtb. Have at least 2 years experiencec. Have at least a pass at grade 10d. Provide a suitable reference from a recognised public official e. Meeting of these requirements will not automatically guarantee admission into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined byiv. The equivalent of any of the above as determined by University senate.

Qualification DurationThe study period for the qualification is:Fulltime/Part-time mode - Minimum: 4 Years; Maximum: 6 Years.The qualification comprises of semesters, per academic year. There are two (2) semesters. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes for the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to:• Engage in the design of systems, tools and applications in electronics, communication and technology domains.• Apply the knowledge of electronics in specialised areas (Communication, Electrical, control, Instrumentation, computing systems, computer science, Control systems) to solve problems of social relevance, and pursue higher education and research.• Carry out core engineering and managerial tasks in multi-disciplinary and multi-cultural environments.• Communicate effectively, demonstrate leadership qualities, and exhibit professional conduct.• Apply the knowledge of generation, transmission and distribution of power in the nation development.• Engage in lifelong learning, career enhancement, and adapt to changing professional and societal needs and empower the graduates to state their own businesses.• Analyse and design embedded systems for Engineering problem solutions.• Apply Fourier Series, Vector Calculus, Complex Analytical Methods and Partial Differentials and Integrals to solve engineering problems.• Design and analyse Optical Fibre Communication systems and their application in communications.

165

ArticulationIUM courses articulate from qualification to qualification as per the statement in Course outlines. The IUM will decide if and how course work from qualifications from other institutions will articulate with IUM courses. Appeals may be submitted to senate

Vertically, Bachelor Honours in electronics grants admissions to Master of science in electronics or related fields. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to Bachelors Degrees. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related Information technology field with approval of the faculty Deans and HoDs to any related Bachelor Degree

Credit transferCredit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and outcomes of learning between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. to be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses. The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements. Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification. Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.

Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. no more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit. The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is for any reason deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final. The IUM reserves the right to disallow transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

Assessmentspecial assessment arrangements are based on the following:tests, assignments, group work and practical and written examinations will be used to

166

assess the students. Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period.students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.Both Formative and summative assessment techniques are used.Formative assessment techniques are used to monitor student learning during the learning process. The feedback gathered is used to identify areas where students are struggling so that instructors can adjust their teaching and students can adjust their studying. summative assessment techniques are used to evaluate student learning. These assessments are appreciated at the end of a course to measure the extent to which students have achieved the desired outcomes of Learning. The major components of this technique are:• Exams. This includes final exams, and tests at the end of course units. • Papers, projects, and presentations. These give students the chance to go deeper with the material to put the knowledge they have acquired to use or create something new from it. • Portfolios. These give students a chance to spell out the concepts or techniques used with each course, the themes addressed, and hurdles faced so as to bring a sense of completion to the learning process.

Coursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. students must score at least 50% in each course /course coursework to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.



167

Teaching methods/strategiesThe delivery methods for this qualification comprises of the part time and full time learning mode. Contact hours for learning mode are face-to- face encounters on weekly basis. The following are the methods of delivery:• Flipped Classroom• Design Thinking (Case Method) • Self-learning• Social Media• Online Learning Tools


SEMESTER 1 ( 70credits)

Course Title


Compulsory Courses (all specializations)Introductory engineering Calculus ICC70Us 6 10

engineering Physics ePH60Us 6 10Circuit Analysis I CA170Us 7 10Principles of Computer Programming

CPR50Us 5 10

engineering Drawing (CAD, AutoCAD)

CAD60Us 6 10

Applied english Language skills AeL40Us 4 10

Introduction to entrepreneurship Ien40Us 4 10


Course Title


Compulsory Courses (all specializations)Data Communication and Computer networks

DCn60Us 6 10

Computer Programming in C++ CPC50Us 5 10Fundamentals of electronics Foe61Us 6 10Intermediate engineering Calculus ICA70Us 7 10Circuit Analysis II CA270Us 7 10Communication skills GCs41Us 5 10Workshop Practice WKP50Us 5 10

168



Course Title


1. Compulsory Courses (all specializations)Cryptography and network security Cns70Us 7 10

Analogue electronics I Ane60Us 6 10Advanced engineering Calculus AeC80Us 8 10Digital electronics I De170Us 7 10Principles of Management PoM50Us 6 102. Elective Coursesa)Telecommunication, Control, Instrumentation and Electrical onlyAnalogue Communication systems ACs60Us 6 10b) Computing Systems & Computer ScienceFundamentals of Databases 6 10


Course Title


1. Compulsory Courses (all specializations)Digital Communication systems DCs710Us 7 10

Research Methodology RMe71Us 7 10Probability and statistics PRs70Us 7 10Digital electronics II De270Us 7 102. Elective Coursesa) Telecommunication, Control, Instrumentation, Electrical and Computing SystemMobile Communications MoC60Us 6 10b) Telecommunication, Control, Instrumentation and ElectricalAnalogue electronics II Ae270Us 7 10c) Computer ScienceWeb Development WDe60Us 6 10d) Computing System and Computer ScienceAdvanced Database Design ADD60Us 7 10

169



Course Title


1. Compulsory Courses (all specializations)embedded systems eBs70Us 7 10


IeI60Us 6 10

Elective Coursesa) Telecommunication, Control, Instrumentation, Electrical and Computing Systemelectromagnetics eMG70Us 7 10optical Fiber technology oPF70Us 7 10Power electronics PWe07Us 7 10electrical Measurements eMe70Us 7 10b) Computer ScienceMultimedia Application Development

MUA70Us 7 10

software engineering soe70Us 7 10Advanced Web Development AWD70Us 7 10operation Research oPR70Us 7 10


Course Title


Compulsory Courses (all specializations)Digital signal Processing DsP81Us 8 10

Internship In570Us 8 10Project Management PMI80Us 8 10Elective Coursesa) Telecommunication, Control, Instrumentation, Electrical and Computing SystemControl systems CsY80Us 8 10b) Telecommunication, Control, Instrumentation and ElectricalRadio and television RtV80Us 8 10c) Computing System and Computer Scienceoperating systems oPR70Us 8 10

170

Human Computer Interaction HCI70Us 8 10d) Computer Sciencesystem Analysis and Design CsC 324 8 10Computer Graphics CsC 322 8 10e) Electr icalPower systems I sAt80Us 8 10electrical Machines CGR80Us 8 10Power systems Protection 8 10f) Instrumentationsensors and transducers set08Us 8 10Industrial Instrumentation I II180Us 8 10g) TelecommunicationAntenna Theory & Propagation AtP08Us 8 10telecommunication switching systems

tss80Us 8 10

171



Course Title


1. Compulsory Courses (all specializations)Research Project (Phase I) XP180Us 8 10

strategic entreprenuership sen70Us 8 102. Elective Coursesa)Telecommunication, Computing System and Computer ScienceComputer Modeling and simulation CsC 412 8 10b)Computing System and Computer Scienceobject oriented Programming (Java)

ooP80Us 8 10

Compiler Design CLD80Us 8 10c) TelecommunicationMicrowave engineering MVe80Us 8 10Radar and navigational Aids RnA80Us 8 10d) Telecommunication and ElectricalDigital signal Processing Application

DsA80Us 8 10

e) Computing SystemDistributed Computing DCM80Us 8 10f) Computer Sciencesoftware testing and Quality Assurance

8 10

g) Electricalelectrical Machines and Drives 8 10Power systems II 8 10smart Grids 8 10h) Control SystemsAdvanced Control systems 8 10optimal Control 8 10Adaptive Control 8 10i) Instrumentation

172

Industrial Instrumentation II II280Us 8 10Virtual Instrumentation 8 10Analytical Instruments AnI80Us 8 10j) Control and InstrumentationProcess Control 8 10


Course Title


1. Compulsory Courses (all specializations)Research Project (Phase II) XP280Us 8 10

2. Elective Coursesa) Telecommunication*, Control*, Instrumentation* and Electrical*VLsI VVL80Us 8 10b) Telecommunication, Control*, Instrumentation*, Computing System and Computer ScienceArtificial Intelligence AFI80Us 8 10c) Computing System and Computer ScienceFault Diagnosis and Failure tolerance

FDF80Us 8 10

d) TelecommunicationMobile Computing* MCP80Us 8 10tele-traffic engineering stC80Us 8 10satellite Communication tee 421 8 10e) Computing SystemDesign for quality and reliability DQR80Us 8 10f) Computer ScienceVisual Basic Programming. net VBn70Us 8 10Mobile Computing MCP80Us 8 10Cyber security & Law CsC 424 8 10g) Instrumentation and Computing System*Biomedical Instrumentation BMI80Us 8 10Power Plant Instrumentation 8 10

173

Instrumentation in Petrochemical Industries

8 10

h) Control SystemsComputer Control of Processes 8 10Industrial Robotics 8 10Biomedical Control 8 10i) ElectricalPower systems Reliability 8 10High Voltage engineering 8 10Renewable energy 8 10

175

FACULTY OF TOURISM, TRAVEL, HOSPITALITY, AND EVENTS

MANAGEMENT

176

Certificate in Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management (Level 5)


RationaleThis qualification is designed to provide students with the necessary skills for the provision and delivery of quality service in the tourism and hospitality industry. It will sharpen such skills as: Customer service skillsCulinary skillsManagement and leadership skills

The Certificate in tourism, Hospitality and events Management targets students who want to become:• Front office Assistants• Customer Care Consultants• Housekeepers/ Supervisors• Hospitality Sales Representatives• Tourism Health and Safety Officers• Tourism Consultants and Service Agents• Tourism and Hospitality Marketing Agents

PurposeThe main purpose of the Certificate in tourism, Hospitality and events Management (Level 5) is to develop students’ basic professional knowledge in the dynamic and diverse tourism industry.

Admission Requirementsto be registered for this qualification, a prospective student must:1. Hold a namibia senior secondary Certificate (nssC) ordinary or Higher Level with passes in 5 subjects; or equivalent, with a minimum of D grade in english Language, and should total twenty points or more; oR2. enter through a flexible learning path – mature age/prior learning with five years relevant experience in various fields of tourism information technology or related fields. Achievement of these requirements will not automatically guarantee an acceptance into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests at the IUM.If in possession of a foreign qualification, submit an nQA evaluation report of their foreign qualifications to the IUM for consideration.

177

Qualification DurationThe study period for the qualification is:Minimum: 1 YearMaximum: 2 Years.The programme comprises two (2) semesters, i.e. two (2) semesters per academic year. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.outcomes of the whole QualificationUpon successful completion of this qualification, holders are able to:• Demonstrate basic understanding of Housekeeping in tourism and hospitality. • Record the necessary skills and knowledge in Customer Service that are of interest to the namibian/ or other visiting traveller. • Identify the roles of the Tourism System in the different segments of the industry and the inter-relationship of those systems. • Demonstrate the basics skills and competences in Food handling, Health, Safety and security in the tourism, Hospitality and events industry.• Demonstrate an understanding of international customer needs and expectations, including culture shock, through the study of marketing and business studies• Demonstrate Basic IT skills in Tourism and Hospitality

ArticulationA student who completes this certificate can proceed to the Diploma in tourism, Hospitality and event Management (Level 6) offered by the IUM, and/or any other related qualification at nQF Level 6.

Credit transferCredit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. to be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses. The awarded credits are governed by the IUM stand Alone programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements. Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended. Credits earned at an accredited institution may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in Certificate qualification. Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.

Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. no more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit. The IUM reserves the right to

178

reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final. The IUM reserves the right to disallow transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

AssessmentCoursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) for the theory-based course attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities such as tests, group activities, assignments (group/ individual), demonstrations and presentations (in a preparation room or laboratory or work station), practical assessments through score sheets, timed observations and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course. students must score at least 50% in their practical for those courses to qualify to sit for the final examinations.

Final ExaminationsThe final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally.Whereas for practical courses; namely Housekeeping operations, Food Handling, Health, safety and security in tourism and Hospitality as well as Front office operations, Continuous Assessment (CA) will attract 70% of the CA mark from practical work. 30% of CA marks will be attained from the theory. Practical examinations will be set up for the above three courses and examined. 100% of the final mark will be divided as 70% practical and 30 % written examination.

Supplementary ExaminationsA student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying more than 50% of the courses or credits.

Teaching methods/strategiesCourses will be delivered using blended learning modalities, including lectures. The teaching methods adapted for this programme are student-centred learning methods. Lecturer will demonstrate the skills and competences to the students first, and allow the students to carry out the set tasks for the day. Assessments may be done during these sessions and recorded.

179

emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read and research extensively in advance for each of the courses.



Course Title


Compulsory Courses tourism systems 100 5 10

Customer service skills 100 5 10Micro economics 100 5 10Mathematics 100 5 10Basic It skills 100 4 10Applied english Language skills 100 4 10Introduction to entrepreneurship 100 4 10


Course Title


Compulsory Courses Food Handling, Health & safety in tourism and Hospitality

100 5 10

Front office operations 100 5 10Housekeeping operations 100 5 10Financial Accounting I 100 5 10Principles of Marketing for tourism and Hospitality

100 5 10

180

Diploma in Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management (Level 6)Compulsory Elective

Level 5 credits: - 20Level 6 credits: 190 -Minimum total credits required: 190 10

PurposeThe Diploma in tourism, Hospitality and events Management will provide students with the necessary skills for the provision and delivery of quality service in the tourism and hospitality industry.The purpose of this qualification is to train and equip the human factor to deliver quality service of a standard that meets the requirements of present day national, regional and international tourism.

Rationale The Diploma level 6 in tourism and hospitality management qualification is developed to equip the students with the requisite knowledge and skills in the tourism industry. The qualification provides graduates with a wide range of employment opportunities in the tourism Industry such as wholesale, travel/ transportation, hotels and attractions and ultimately contributes to the national economy and beyond. This qualification will offer training that will help students to develop strong business management and broaden their job prospect. The diploma targets those who want to become:o tourism officers,o Customer service consultantso House Keepers,o tourism and Hospitality Health and safety officerso Front office supervisorso service supervisorso Hospitality Bookkeeperso tourism sales and marketing representativeso Front office Assistant

Admission Requirements to be admitted to study for this qualification, one shall have a Certificate in tourism, hospitality and events management (level 5) from IUM or any other equivalent qualification at nQF level 5 from a recognized institution.

Qualification DurationThe study period for the qualification is:Minimum: 2 YearsMaximum: 3 Years.The programme comprises two (2) semesters, per academic year. semester 1 runs from

181

January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes for the whole qualification Holders of this qualification are able to: • Describe the different stakeholders – their roles and their effects on tourism policy

and planning.• explain the importance of appropriate e-marketing in the tourism and hospitality

industry.• Discuss the concepts of tourism geography.• Describe and be able to express knowledge of tour planning, and sales other tourism

products and services.• Identify and repeat basic French grammar structures and vocabulary in speaking,

reading and writing.• Review a range of techniques and operations practices appropriate to the travel and

tourism industry.• Interpret the practice of business law in the tourism and hospitality establishments.• Demonstrate appropriate etiquette in the tourism and hospitality industry.• Describe and be able to express knowledge of basic food handling..• Demonstrate basic skills of food and beverage services.• Respond to customer queries, complaints and needs as part of ensuring superior

customer service delivery.• explain basic concepts for management information systems• Interpret the value of the operations and quality management concepts and models

in the travel, tourism, hospitality and events management establishments• Describe the major components of events planning

ArticulationThis qualification will allow students to proceed to a Bachelor qualification in tourism, Hospitality & events Management (Level 7) offered by IUM or any other related qualification at nQF Level 7.

Credit TransferCredit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.to be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses.

The awarded credits are governed by the IUM qualifications’ rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years. Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements. Coursework will be evaluated for its

182

current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting.

Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification. Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning. Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. no more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.

The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final. The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average. AssessmentCoursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. Assessment methods used include: tests, assignments, case studies, projects, group work, cafes, quizzes and reports. students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Final Examinations

The final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally.

Teaching Methods/ StrategiesThe students will be expected to be responsible for their own learning, nobody can learn for somebody else. emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read extensively in each of the subjects. The role of the lecturer is to stimulate learning and to support and guide that process. Programmed reading will support these endeavours. A wide range of teaching methods will be employed by lecturers from traditional lectures through to small decision-making groups, as well as the use of training films and videos, and advanced business simulations will employ a wide range of teaching methods.

183

Courses will be delivered using blended learning modalities, including lectures, online tutorials, advanced simulations, video and audio conferencing technologies. Learners must have access to a computer and the Internet. The teaching methods adapted for this programme are student-centred learning methods. emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read and research extensively in each of the courses. each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning. The role of the lecturer, therefore, is to stimulate learning and to support and guide that process. Guided reading materials and research will support these endeavours.



Course Title


Beverage services 100 6 10

tourism operations Management 100 6 10Critical Thinking skills for tourism and Hospitality

100 6 10

tourism Geography 100 6 10e- Marketing for the tourismand Hospitality Industry

100 6 10

Intermediate entrepreneurshipand Innovation

100 6 10


Course Title


small Business Management 100 6 10

Human Resources Management 100 6 10Managing Information systems 100 6 10etiquette for the tourism and Hospitality Industry

100 6 10

eLeCt one LAnGUAGeGerman 1A 100 6 10French 1A 100 6 10

184

YEAR 2( 90 credits)


Course Title


Financial accounting II 100 6 10

Macro economics 100 6 10Commercial Food Preparation in the Hospitality Industry

100 6 10

Customer service in tourismand Hospitality

100 6 10


Course Title


Business Law 100 6 10

events Planning 100 6 10ecotourism 100 6 10tour operations 100 6 10service Quality Management in tourism and Hospitality

100 6 10

185

Bachelor in Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management (Level 7)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 30 -Level 5 credits: 90 20Level 6 credits: 110 -Level 7 credits: 115 20Minimum total credits required: 345 20

Rationale This qualification meets the ever changing demands of tourists in this dynamic industry. The programme intends to produce a wide number of practitioners such as Customer service practitioners, Front office staff personnel, tourism and hospitality supervisors, tourism Brand marketers, tourism policy makers, tour operators, events organizers, Airline staff, sports Coordinators, Lodge supervisors/ trainee Lodge managers, Parks and Wildlife Management officers.

PurposeThe main purpose of the Bachelor in tourism, Hospitality and events Management is to develop graduates with professional knowledge, positive attitudes, practical managerial and entrepreneurial skills as well as ethical values needed to contribute in the management of travel, tourism and Hospitality industry in the country. Advances in training in travel, tourism, Hospitality and events management corresponds with the recognition of the need for scientific management of the industry and the need for qualified manpower at all levels due to the enhanced profile of tourism and hospitality industry in the national economy and policy. The programme will not only enable graduates to meet market needs, but also ensure effective management and sustainability of tourism resources for later generations as envisaged by Vision 2030.

Admission Requirements one has to satisfy the minimum admission requirements for entry to degree studies at this University as prescribed under the entry requirements in the IUM General Academic Regulations.. Grade 12 or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including english minimum D normally in not more than three examination sittings with a minimum of 25 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale. . A recognised qualification at nQF level 6 or equivalent. Mature age entry, provided that the candidate meets the following: - Are 25 years old or over in the year in which admission is sought- Have at least 2 years’ experience- Have at least a pass at grade 10

186

- Provide a suitable reference from a recognised public official Meeting of these requirements will not automatically guarantee admission into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate.

Qualification DurationThe Bachelor in tourism, Hospitality and events Management is conferred after three years of full-time or part-time study in one or more areas of tourism and hospitality concentrations. each year of study will be divided into two semesters and students are expected to take six courses in each semester. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December. outcomes of the whole QualificationUpon successful completion of this qualification holders are able to: • evaluate the basic principles and theories of tourism systems as a social phenomenon

and its inter-dependence and inter-relations with other disciplines;• evaluate knowledge, skills and competencies in tourism product development, laws

governing tourism businesses, operations management, service delivery, marketing and promotion.

• Develop competent skills in hospitality operations such as housekeeping, front office and tour operations.

• Respond to customer queries, complaints and needs as part of ensuring superior customer service delivery.

• explain the importance of demand and supply in tourism and hospitality.• Demonstrate the importance of tourism statistics and their collection.• Analyse strategic approaches in parks and wildlife management, eco-tourism,

events management and cultural tourism.• Improve ability to communicate in foreign language in German or French.• Apply technical skills and knowledge in conceptualization, design and execution of

research as a tool for decision making and furthering of academic knowledge and show skills for critical thinking, interpretation and use of research findings;

• Assess attitudes, skills and commitment to develop a career in travel, tourism and Hospitality management or motivation to pursue entrepreneurial opportunities in field.

• Develop a business proposal in Hospitality businesses for entrepreneurship purposes.

• experience the tourism and hospitality industry through job attachments.

Articulation Vertically, the Bachelor in tourism, Hospitality and events Management grants admission to the Bachelor in tourism, Hospitality and events Management Honours at nQF Level 8 or any other related qualification at nQF Level 8. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Honours Degree programme. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move

187

into existing or new related business and management qualifications.

Credit TransferCredit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. to be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses. Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting.

Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification. Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning. Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. no more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit. The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.

AssessmentCoursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) for the theory-based course attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities such as tests, group activities, assignments (group/ individual), demonstrations and presentations (in a preparation room or laboratory or work station), practical assessments through score sheets, timed observations and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course. students must score at least 50% in their practical for those courses to qualify to sit for the final examinations.

Final ExaminationsThe final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally.Whereas for practical courses; namely Housekeeping operations, Food Handling, Health, safety and security in tourism and Hospitality as well as Front office operations, Continuous Assessment (CA) will attract 70% of the CA mark from practical work. 30%

188

of CA marks will be attained from the theory. Practical examinations will be set up for the above three courses and examined. 100% of the final mark will be divided as 70% practical and 30 % written examination.

Supplementary ExaminationsA student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying more than 50% of the courses or credits

Teaching Methods/Strategiesstudent-centred approach is adopted; however, the traditional lecture method will be applied in other topics. students will be expected to make presentations and group discussions are encouraged to simulate case studies. emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read and research extensively in each of the subjects.

In the second semester of the third year, the student will have an internship that will last six months. The internship will give the student practical experience, useful recommendation, and a substantial advantage in aligning theory with practice and job placement.

189



Course Title


Mathematics 100 5 10

Micro economics 100 5 10tourism systems 100 5 10Basic It skills 100 4 10Introduction to entrepreneurship 100 4 10Applied english Language skills 100 4 10


Course Title


Hospitality operations 100 5 10

Customer services for tourism, Hospitality & events

100 5 10

tourism Geography 100 5 10Food Handling, Health, and safety in tourism and Hospitality

100 5 10

Financial Accounting I 100 5 10Principles of Marketing for tourism, Hospitality & events

100 5 10

190

YEAR 2 (110 Credits)

SEMESTER 1 (60 Credits)

Course Title


tourism operations Management 100 6 10

Commercial Food Preparation in the Hospitality Industry

100 6 10

Marketing Management for tourism, Hospitality& events

100 6 10


100 6 10

Macroeconomics: Contribution to tourism

100 6 10

French 1A 100 4 nBC1

German 1A 4 nBC

1nCB – non Credit Bearing


Course Title


Financial Accounting II 100 6 10

Business Law 100 6 10ecotourism 100 6 15Beverage services 100 6 15French 1B 4 nBCGerman 1B 4 nBC

191

YEAR 3 (135 Credits)

SEMESTER 1 (95 Credits)

Course Title


Applied entrepreneurship in tourism, Hospitality and events Management

100 7 10

Research Methodology 100 7 20Reservation systems 100 7 15tourism and the environment 100 7 15International tourism operations 100 7 15Electives (choose one + either French 2A or German 2A)strategic Human Resources 100 7 10strategic Management 100 7 10French 2A 6 10German 2A 6 10


Course Title


Electives Choose 1

Internship 400 7 40

192

Bachelor in Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management Honours (Level 8)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 6 credits: - 20Level 8 credits: 110 -Minimum total credits required: 110 10

RationaleThe Bachelor in tourism, Hospitality and events Management Honours is a one-year qualification designed to equip students with knowledge, skills and competencies needed by tourism, hospitality & events business and industry in namibia and beyond. It is intended for those who have successfully completed their Bachelor in tourism, Hospitality and events Management Level 7 or others with a similarly credit rated qualification in line with IUM entry requirements and credit transfer. It is also targeted at people currently in employment who aspire to further their studies to nQF Level 8 and increase their relevance and marketability, as well as specialize in particular fields of their choice. The curriculum is designed to equip students with diverse skills (communication in a foreign language, applied research methodology, services marketing strategies, strategic innovation management, events planning & management, sports tourism management, airline management, cultural tourism, parks and wildlife management skills).

PurposeAs the namibian economy continues growing, the demand for qualified human capital in tourism, hospitality and event supervisory or trainee management roles is fundamental. Thus the purpose of this qualification is to train and equip the human factor which is of importance in tourism.

Who is this Qualification for? This qualification is designed for students who wish to pursue a career in tourism, hospitality and events management in both the private and public sectors or to be entrepreneurs. Through the combination of tourism, hospitality and events core courses and a strong base in management sciences courses plus research. This qualification is structured to stretch and challenge the students to fulfil their true potential and to become defining players in the tourism, hospitality and events field. Admission /entry RequirementsThe minimum entry requirement is an appropriate Bachelor in tourism, Hospitality& events Management (nQF Level 7) offered by the IUM or any qualification from the nQA recognised institution.Meeting of these requirements will not automatically guarantee admission into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate.

193

Qualification DurationThe Bachelor in tourism, Hospitality& events Management Honours is conferred after one year of full-time or part-time study in one or more areas of tourism, hospitality& event specialisation and the maximum study period is two years. The year of study will be divided into two semesters and students are expected to take six examinable courses in the first semester and two year courses examinable at the end of the year. The second semester mainly focuses on research methodology and field project in addition to one elective subject. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to: • Apply technical skills and knowledge in reviewing relevant literature, identifying

problems, evaluating appropriate research methodology for execution of research as a tool for decision making and furthering of academic knowledge and showing skills for critical thinking, interpretation and use of research findings

• Analyse strategic approaches in Parks and Wildlife management, eco-tourism, events management and cultural tourism

• Demonstrate competencies and ability to communicate in a foreign language either in German or French

• Demonstrate attitudes, skills and commitment expected by industry in pursuing a career in tourism, Hospitality and event Management

• Develop a business proposal in Hospitality businesses for entrepreneurship purposes

Articulation Bachelor in tourism, Hospitality & event Management Honours grants admissions to Master in tourism and Hospitality Management offered by IUM or any related qualification at nQF Level 9. students may also, where applicable, move into other existing Management professional qualifications.

Credit transfer Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. to be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses. The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.

Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements. Coursework will be evaluated for its

194

current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification. Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.

Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. no more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit. The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is for any reason deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final. The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) for the theory-based course attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities such as tests, group activities, assignments (group/ individual), demonstrations and presentations (in a preparation room or laboratory or work station), practical assessments through score sheets, timed observations and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period.

Final Examinations The final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally. taken in this final year of study, the Bachelor in tourism, Hospitality and events Management Honour, Research Project is meant to engage students in research with a faculty member designated to a student by the faculty in order to generate knowledge necessary to complete all the requirements for the award of the qualification.

each student must independently complete a 10 000 – 15 000 words research project. The research should be original on a topic related to tourism, Hospitality, and events Management. The research should have a clearly defined problem statement, a review of the existing literature on the chosen topic, original evidence offered to support research project, consideration of alternative rival hypothesis, and a conclusion with recommendations. Upon completion of writing the research project, the student would be required to present their research findings before a faculty selected project panel.

Supplementary Examinations student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination.

195

A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying a deficit of more than 30% of the courses or credits.

Award of the qualification Candidates will be eligible to be awarded the Bachelor Degree in tourism, Hospitality& events Management when they have passed all the required courses and successfully completed the tourism, Hospitality or events Management project as specified in the relevant qualification regulations and have fulfilled any other additional requirements stipulated in the IUM student policies.

Teaching Methods/ Strategy The teaching and learning processes will take place through lectures, tutorial activities and discussions, collaborative group tasks, practical projects, tests and written assignments.

Year 1 (120 Credits)

Course Title


Compulsory Year Courses

services Marketing strategies 8 20event Management 8 15Cultural tourism 8 15Airline Management 8 15strategic Human Resources 8 10sports tourism 8 10Wildlife& Parks Management 8 10Applied entrepreneurship Management

8 10

Applied Research Methodology 8 10Research Project 8 10Semester 1 (Electives: choose 1 only)French 2B 6 10German 2B 6 10

196

Postgraduate Diploma in Events Management (Level 8)


Rationale

events management is a global dynamic business industry. It is an area which has grown rapidly in recent years and has become established as an important element in the promotional mix. This qualification offers opportunities to graduates seeking a change in their career or for those who are currently working in the industry and require further training to enhance their career opportunities. The qualification is designed to provide students with the opportunity to develop practical events manage-ment skills.

The qualification is underpinned by both academic theory and practical aspects in the fields of tourism, leisure and events and will involve students in the application of concepts in industry-related scenarios and realistic simulations. In this way, students will develop and apply the skills of critical evaluation and it is intended that they be-come self-directed, independent, reflexive learners. The course offers an opportunity to combine classroom-based learning with fieldwork activities. students will therefore be given real events to manage so as to infuse theory into practice and build competitive events management skills.

Purpose

The Postgraduate Diploma in events Management (Level 8) is designed to develop young namibians to effectively manage events. The purpose of the qualification is to equip students with the necessary tools and expertise to meet the ever growing demand for quality service in the tourism sector.

Entry Requirements

A recognised Bachelor degree at nQF Level 7 in any discipline or an equivalent qualifi-cation with a minimum one (1) year work experience in the appropriate field.


The study period for the qualification is:Fulltime/Part-time mode - Minimum: 1 Year; Maximum: 2 Years.Distance Mode - Minimum: 2 Years; Maximum: 3 Years.

197

The qualification comprises of semesters, per academic year there are two (2) semesters. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes for whole qualification

Upon successful completion of the Postgraduate Diploma in event Management, the holder of this qualification is able to:

• Plan, design, and coordinate effective site and facility operations.• Apply the principles of professionalism and ethics to event management.• Create, plan, and implement effective management of tourism and hospitality of events.• Develop and implement financial initiatives based on event objectives through meth-ods such as sponsorship programs, grant applications, and fundraising initiatives.• Apply the principles of marketing to events.• Apply strategies for effective human resource management to events.• Apply accounting and financial knowledge and skills to the operation of events.• Apply business administration skills to the operation of events.

Articulation Possibilities

Vertically, the Postgraduate Diploma in events Management (Level 8) grants admission to Master in tourism and Hospitality Level 9 or any other related qualification at nQF Level 9. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Master programme. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related tourism and hospitality qualifica-tions at nQF level 8.

Credit Transfer Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit trans-fer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. to be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equiv-alent to IUM courses. The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree program rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements. Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course

198

was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qual-ification.Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning. Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. no more than half the major area course require-ments can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit. The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruc-tion at such institutions is for any reason deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final. The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

Assessment Coursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. students must score at least 50% in each course (both coursework and practical) to qual-ify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Final ExaminationsThe final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. examiners may, in addition to written examination and practicals, test any candidate orally.


A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supple-mentary examination. A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying more than 50% of the courses or credits.Awarding of the QualificationCandidates will be eligible for the appropriate qualification when they have passed all the required courses specified in the relevant programme regulations and have fulfilled any additional requirements stipulated in the IUM student policies.teaching Methods/strategiesCourses will be delivered using blended learning modalities, including lectures, online tutorials, advanced simulations, video and audio conferencing technologies as well as

199

exposure to real practical experiences such as independence celebrations, annual heroes commemorations, national and international conferences, and other public and private functions. Learners must have access to a computer and the Internet. The teaching meth-ods adapted for this programme are student-centred. emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read and research extensively in each of the courses.

Course Title NQF Level Credits

events Management, Planning and Co-ordination 8 20Marketing and Public Relations for events 8 15Financial Budgeting in events Management 8 15Business Innovation and Development 8 15Diplomatic and Celebrity events Management 8 10event security Planning 8 10Research Project 8 10Total Credits Required 120

201

FACULTY OF HEALTH SCIENCES

202

DEPARTMENT OF NURSING SCIENCE

Bachelor in Nursing Honours Degree – Bnur Hons (Level 8)

Purpose

The purpose of the Bachelor in nursing Honours degree programme is to provide the namibian nation with nurse practitioners (nurses and midwifes) who have sufficient expertise in dealing with the most pressing health problems in the country. It aims to provide students with tHe competency to analyse, integrate, and apply scientific, theoretical, and clinical knowledge in their daily practice. The qualification is designed to train professional nurses who are able to adapt to the changing roles of the nursing profession in tandem with extending boundaries of nursing practice. It is envisaged that the qualification will equip students with high quality career-oriented nursing education that meets the lifelong learning needs of the student.

Programme OutcomesHolders of this qualification will be able to:• Demonstrate mastery of ethical, moral, legal and professional principles in caring

for patients.• Diagnose patient problems that need nursing care, draw up a nursing care plan,

implement the plan and evaluate the outcome.• Conduct nursing research and critically analyse results to be implemented in

nursing practice.• Manage a health care unit by applying and critiquing management principles.

Special School/Faculty Regulations

Progression/advancement Regulations

NS 1: The minimum duration of study for this programme shall be 4 years, with a maximum of 6 years for completion.

NS 2 : The curriculum consists of 494 credits in total gained in the following : . 14 semester courses

. 18 year courses

. 2,200 practical hours (notional)

NS 3 : A student wishing to proceed to the following year of study must pass the pre-requisite of a course or subject.

NS 4 : students register for all the courses of the programme in the first year.

203

NS 5 : to proceed to the second (2nd) year of study, a student must pass: . nursing science 1 . Community Health 1 . Biological sciences . Clinical nursing 1 . Introduction to Midwifery science

NS 6 : to proceed to the third (3rd) year of study, a student must pass: . nursing science 2 . Community Health 2 . Biological sciences . Clinical nursing 2 . Midwifery 2

NS 7 : to proceed to the fourth (4th) year of study, a student must pass: . nursing science 3 . Mental Health . Clinical nursing 3 . Midwifery 2 . Research Methodology

N8 8 : In years 4, 5, and 6 the remaining courses must also be passed.

Year I (104 Credits)• FNU0D1 - Nursing Science I: Foundation of Nursing• CMI0D1 - Community Health Nursing I • IPC0D1 - Introduction to the Philosophy of Care• CN10D1 - Clinical Nursing I• ITN0D1 - Introduction to IT for Nursing Practitioners and Administrators• CSK0D1 - Communication Skills• IAN0D1 - Biological Sciences: Applied Anatomy & Physics • IMW0D1 - Introduction to Midwifery Science• IPS0D1 - Introduction to Psychology for Nurses• CTH0D1 - Critical Thinking Skills

Year II (118 Credits)• MD20D2 - Nursing Science II: Medical & Surgical Conditions General• MW10D2 - Midwifery Science I• CM20D2 - Community Health Nursing II

204

• PHB0D2 - Biological Sciences: Physiology & Biochemistry• CN20D1 - Clinical Nursing II• PHR0D2 - Pharmacology for Nurses • MBI0D2 - Microbiology for Nurses

Year III (128 Credits)• MD30D3 - Nursing Science III: Medical and Surgical Conditions• MW20D3 - Midwifery Science II• CM20D3 - Community Health Nursing III• HRE0D3 - Research Methodology in Health Sciences• CN30D3 - Clinical Nursing III• MEH0D3 - Mental Health Nursing•

Year IV (144 Credits)• NS40D4 - Nursing Science IV: Specialised Units• MW30D4 - Midwifery Science III• PPE0D4 - Professional Practice & Ethics in Nursing• XRP0D4 - Health Research Report• HES0D4 - Health Service Management (Unit Level)• CN40D4 - Clinical Nursing IV

205

Certificate in Pharmacist Assistant (NQF level 5)Compulsory Elective

Level 4 credits: 80 -Level 5 credits: 100 -Minimum total credits required: 180 -

Rationale

The Qualification in Pharmacy Assistant is developed to provide optimal pharmaceutical care and services to the namibian society. since sufficient and efficient human resources are needed, as outlined in the Development Plan Vet sector (2016 – 2020), the pharmacist assistant has been identified as one of the categories of human resources that are needed to assist the qualified pharmacist in his or her role. The pharmacist’s assistant executes procedures and activities within their scope of practice according to the Pharmacy Act no 9 of 2004.The qualification is intended for persons who wish to pursue careers in the public and private pharmaceutical industry in namibia.

Purpose

The qualification is aimed at grade 12 and mature age learners already employed by a pharmacy and are willing to continue their education and training in the field of pharmacy. The pharmacist’s assistant has been identified as one of the key priority areas for training in namibia. The skills Development Plan for Vet sector (2016 – 2020) conducted by the namibian training Authority highlights the need for capacity building in the pharmaceutical industry to promote competency in the field of pharmacy.Competence in all areas of the pharmaceutical industry is becoming increasingly specialised as well as professional. Therefore, the content of this qualification has been developed in consultation with the Pharmaceutical society, Pharmaceutical Council of namibia and other pharmaceutical stakeholders to confirm that the content is appropriate and consistent with current practice. Upon completion of the certificate the student will be able to register as a pharmacist’s assistant with the Pharmacy Council of namibia.

Qualification duration

It is a one-year course that will be offered over a period of two years.


Holders of this qualification are able to:• Demonstrate an understanding of the basic fundamental concepts, theories and

206

frameworks of the pharmaceutical sector in namibia;• Integrate knowledge of pharmacy to assist with the manufacturing of non-sterile

or sterile medicine or scheduled substances according to a formula and standard operating procedures approved by the responsible pharmacist

• Implement the distribution and control of stock for schedule 1 to 4 medicines or other schedule substances

• Communicate effectively with patients, clients and supervisors by using correct pharmaceutical vocabularies

• Provide information to individuals in order to promote health• Practice pharmacy within the ethical and moral codes of the profession and within

the legal framework of the Pharmacy Act no. 9 2004.

Credit system

Reference is made to the internationally acceptable formula: one (1) credit equates ten (10) notional hours (learning). The general guideline for teaching and learning time per subjects are as follows:

Lectures - tutorial support that includes feedback on assignments, self- directed learning - working through study material and completing assignments and working on the internet to undertake further reading.Practicals - working in the pharmacy under supervision of the tutor dealing will all the aspects of medication prescriptions, client care, mixing of substances, stock control, customer care.Assessments - formative assessments on assignments in theory and practice

Articulation possibilities

Certificate in Pharmacist’s Assistant level 5 can grant admission to the Diploma in Pharmaceutical technician, nQF level 6 or higher and, where applicable, move into other existing professional pharmacist qualifications.

Credit transfer

Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or other qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation or recognition of prior learning.to be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combinations of courses as equivalent to IUM courses.

Generally, students who passed subjects for this qualification from other educational institutions may be granted exemptions on the subjects sat for and passed. The subjects

207

for which exemption is sought must have been sat for and passed in one sitting and the qualification must have been obtained within the last five years. Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been studied and the qualification obtained at an nQA accredited institution or equivalent. exemptions shall only be awarded for 50 % of the course. The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

Special ArrangementsThe qualification will be offered by IUM and the Pharmaceutical society of namibia through a cooperative agreement.

Assessment and Assessment StrategiesAssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Final examinationThere will be one final examination. summative assessments will be done after the completion of each model. The pass mark for a module is 50%. students must pass all the modules before the certificate can be awarded.

Supplementary assessment A student who fails the module with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary assessment of a module. A student who fails a module with an overall mark of 39 % and below will be required to repeat the same module until the module is passed. A student may not proceed from one level (4) to the next higher level (5) carrying a deficit of more than 30% of modules.

Assessment toolsDifferent assessment tools will be used to assess the students - for example assignments, simulated situations, written and oral tests, demonstrations and portfolio compilation. The pharmacist tutor will provide guidance to students. The main lecturer will provide online support to students during this time.A tutor pharmacist is a registered pharmacist who is registered with the Pharmacy Council as such.

Modes of Teaching and LearningThe course will be offered fulltime on a block release system approach. Theoretical teaching will be done on a block system. During the block time the teaching and

208

learning processes will take place through lectures, tutorial sessions and activities, group discussions, role play, demonstrations, case studies and simulation. After a block session the students will go back to their workplace (pharmacy) and under the supervision of a registered pharmacist (tutor) do their practicals. The theoretical and practical part of the course will be done with the assistance of the Pharmaceutical society.

Quality Assurance RequirementCommitment is made to ensure that the courses remain relevant, current and provide students with high quality teaching and learning experience. An effort is made to ensure meeting the course quality assurance requirements and is a continuous process through incorporating regular monitoring, review, benchmarking and improvement. An external evaluator will periodically evaluate the qualification in terms of course content, teaching methods, course resources and assessments.

Course Code HRS Credit NQF Level

Year 1Semester 1Principles of Pharmaceutical Health Care 12 4Customer service 16 4Semester 2Pharmaceutical Manufacturing skills 16 4Personal and Professional Development 12 4Year coursesPharmaceutical stock Control 24 4Total Credits

Year 2Semester 1Information Communication and technology 12 5Pharmaceutical Mathematics 16 5Semester 2Communication and Patient Counselling 16 5Year coursesWorkplace safety 24 5Pharmacology and Disease Profiles 32 5Total credits 100TOTAL credits 180

209

Postgraduate Diploma in Paediatric Nursing (NQF level 8)SEMESTER 1 SEMESTER 2

Course Code HRS Credit NQFlevel

Course Code Hrs Credit NQFlevel

Maternal and Child

Health Care

services

8 8 Communication in Paediatric

nursing

8 8

RationaleThe Postgraduate Diploma in Paediatric nursing (level 8) is designed for registered nurses working in hospitals and clinics and are interested in developing their knowledge and skills concerning the nursing and care for the sick child (Paediatric nursing). students who register for this qualification will gain a significant level of preventative, curative and rehabilitative knowledge and skills in paediatric nursing. Paediatric nursing is a specialised field in nursing and students who complete the qualification successfully will be able to execute advanced procedures within their scope of practice on children. This qualification is an urgent need in namibia because according to the Demographic and Health survey of namibia in 2014 one (1) in every twenty six (26) namibian children die before the age of one year, and one in every nineteen (19) do not survive to their fifth birthday. taking these statistics into consideration and in order to provide optimal paediatric care and services to children, it is necessary to educate and train registered nurses in the specialist field of Paediatric nursing.

PurposeThe Postgraduate Diploma in Paediatric nursing (Level 8) is designed to provide optimal paediatric care and service to children. It is necessary to educate and train nurses at postgraduate level in order to be available and to assist with the nursing care of sick children throughout namibia. nurses should be well equipped with lifesaving skills to promote healthy child care and to prevent childhood mortality throughout the country. The qualification will therefore produce graduates who will make a positive contribution to health care of children in namibia. The qualification is concerned with the education and training of nurses who are already registered and who practice as registered nurses in the private and public health care institutions. students are expected to acquire the following skills: critical thinking, leadership, interpersonal communication, psychomotor and affective skills. These skills are required by employers of health care facilities to be applied to complex paediatric issues.The qualification is offered at an institution which is accredited by the nursing Council of namibia. The holder of this qualification is a specialist resource person and a change agent with advanced knowledge and skills to put into practice and a nurse consultant

210

for the multidisciplinary team on paediatric nursing care. This person can practise in the following institutions: primary healthcare, district, regional healthcare facilities, paediatric wards in hospitals public and private, and educational institutions normally at managerial level.

Admission/entry requirementsThe entry requirements to this qualification shall be:• student must be in possession of a Bachelor Degree in nursing (Level 7 or 8) or a

Diploma in Comprehensive nursing and Midwifery science (4 years) Level 7.• Registered as a nurse and midwife with the nursing Council of namibia.• Minimum of 2 years’ experience as a registered nurse and midwife.• Recognition of prior learning will be considered where applicable.

Qualification durationThe duration of the qualification is one (1) year.

Outcomes of the whole qualificationHolders of this qualification are able to:• Apply clinical leadership skills in care of children in the paediatric field• Demonstrate management skills in a child care unit within the framework of the

multidisciplinary team• Implement comprehensive paediatric nursing care using the scientific approach• Develop and implement standards of paediatric care to ensure quality and safe care• Integrate legal aspects and ethical principles during daily practices• Demonstrate accountability and moral reasoning skills for independent clinical

decisions made regarding to paediatric care• negotiate and provide professional support to parents and families• evaluate health care outcomes of children and make innovative suggestions to

improve care where necessary• Collaborate with the multi-disciplinary team members and refer children to relevant

organisational services• Participate in research activities (fieldwork), prepare the report and publish the

findings.

Credit SystemReference is made to the internationally acceptable formula; one (1) credit equates ten (10) notional hours (learning). The teaching and learning time and the credits are indicated in a summary below;The total notional hours for the qualification amount to 1200 hours and this will be divided as follows;Theoretical teaching: will be a total of 480 hours and will include lectures, discussions, tutorials, portfolio development and will be covered with 16 hours per week for 30 academic weeks.

211

Directed learning: Advanced reading and preparation for class.self-managed learning: Practical teaching hours will be a total of 720 hours and will be covered with 24 hours per week for 30 academic weeks. Practical sessions will include completing assignments, feedback on assignments, doing case studies, practical procedures, demonstrations and more reading. This part will take up the bulk of the learning time. Articulation possibilitiesThe Postgraduate Diploma in Paediatric nursing (Level 8) grants admission to a Master Degree (Level 9) in different aspects of paediatric nursing.


to be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses of combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses. The awarded credits are governed by the IUM rules and courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years. Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with the namibia Qualifications Authority requirements. Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning. Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credits for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

AssessmentContinuous assessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and /or oral tests, assignments (group/individual), and practical evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period.students must score a mean of 50% in all the coursework (theory and practice) to be allowed to sit for the final written and practical examinations.semester courses will be finally assessed at the end of each semester while year courses will be finally assessed at the end of the academic year.

Final Examination The final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any student orally.

212

Supplementary examinationsA student who fails a subject with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination. A student who fails a subject with an overall mark of 39 % and below will be required to repeat the same subject until the subject is passed.

Methods of Teaching and LearningThe teaching and learning processes will take be offered through lectures, tutorial activities and discussions, collaborative group tasks, demonstrations, case studies, practical projects, and written assignments. Practicals will be taught in hospitals, clinics and simulation.

Quality AssuranceCommitment is made to ensure that the qualification offered remains relevant, current and provides students with a high quality of teaching and learning experiences. to ensure meeting the course quality assurance requirements is a continuous process through incorporating regular monitoring, review, benchmarking and improvement. An external evaluator will periodically evaluate the qualification in terms of course content, teaching methods, course resources and assessments.

YEAR COURSESCourse Code HRS Credit NQF

level

Child and Family Health 16 8Research Methodology 24 8Anatomy and Physiology: Capita selecta for Children 16 8Paediatric nursing science 24 8Paediatric Clinical Practice 24 8

Total Credits: 120

213

DePARtMent oF HIV/AIDs

Certificate in HIV/AIDS Management (Level 5)


RationaleHIV remains a leading cause of adult morbidity and mortality in namibia, which continues to have one of the highest HIV prevalence rates in the world. Furthermore, the attainment of Vision 2030 requires the creation of a knowledge based economy. The implementation of a knowledge based economy requires public health practitioners who are knowledgeable, skilled and innovative in all aspects of public health. The ever increasing regional and global demand for qualified personnel includes the demand for practice-oriented experts in public health who are able to make a difference in any dynamic firm in the world is confirmed by consultations with various stakeholders both the public and private sectors of namibia.

PurposeThe Certificate in HIV/AIDs Management (nQF Level 5) introduces the fundamental concepts and practices of public health to students in order to develop a broad-based understanding of its context, purpose and underlying functional areas of public health management. This certificate is designed for professionals seeking a career transition with greater public health responsibilities. The qualification provides practice-oriented education for high level public health service providers with skills that would enable graduates to succeed in any dynamic public health care settings in southern African region and beyond

The qualification will also equip students with effective working knowledge of the analytical tools and management concepts used in public, corporate and nGo sector as well as grounding them in the practical management skills required in contemporary organisation or community activities.

Admission Requirementsstudents will be admitted to this qualification if they hold a namibian secondary school Certificate (nssCo/H) with a minimum of 20 points and passed five subjects with a minimum of D in english. students may also enter through mature age entry /prior learning with three years relevant work experience in a health and wellness related sector.

214

Qualification DurationThe study period for the programme is:Minimum 1 YearMaximum 2 yearsThe programme comprises two (2) semesters per academic year. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.


• Holders of this qualification are able to: Demonstrate the ability to effectively deal with both HIV/AIDs infected and affected members of society

• Advocate and mobilise communities for Voluntary Counselling testing (VCt), sexual Reproductive Health Rights (sRHR), communicable and non-communicable diseases.

• Acquire and apply writing, speaking and organizational skills in a professional environment.

• Identify and implement community empowerment plans, strategies, and monitoring mechanisms to provide care and support to both infected and affected.

• Apply the basic standards of precautionary and preventive measures while giving first aid.

• Identify and discuss business models which underpin innovative and sustainable health related businesses.

Articulationstudents who completed the Certificate in HIV/AIDs Management (Level) will be able to articulate to the Diploma in HIV/AIDs Management (Level 6) or any other related qualification at nQF Level 6.

Credit transferAny credit recognition and credit transfer from other qualifications are granted for qualifications from accredited institutions. Internal students that apply for advanced standing or credit accumulation or credit transfer will have their cases considered by the relevant faculty. students from outside IUM will have their cases considered by the relevant faculty. Credit from outside institutions may be awarded up to fifty percent of total credits for any qualification conducted by IUM. Appeals may be submitted to senate.

AssessmentCoursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

215

Teaching Methods/StrategiesThe delivery methods for this qualification comprises of the full-time and Part-time mode. Contact hours for distance learning mode are face-to- face encounters on monthly basis. The following are the methods of delivery:• Face-to-face: Lecture and discussions,• Seminars/public lecture • Tutorials• Workshops • Self-managed learning



Course Title

Course Code

Notional Hours

NQF Level Credits

Compulsory Courses Communicable and non-Communicable Diseases

100 5 10

Basic It skills 100 5 10Applied english Language skills 100 4 10The Global Impact of HIV/AIDs 100 5 10sexual Reproductive Health Promotion

100 5 10

Introduction to entrepreneurship 100 4 10


Course Title

Course Code

Notional Hours

NQF Level Credits

Compulsory Courses Complementary and Alternative Medicine (CAM)

100 5 10

Community Based Care & support I

100 5 10

First aid and HIV/AIDs 100 5 10Health Communication skills 100 4 10Counselling skills 100 5 10

216

Diploma in HIV/AIDS Management (Level 6)


RationaleHIV remains a leading cause of adult morbidity and mortality in namibia, which continues to have one of the highest HIV prevalence rates in the world according to the recent surveillance Report. Furthermore, the attainment of Vision 2030 requires the creation of a knowledge based economy. The implementation of a knowledge based economy requires public health practitioners who are knowledgeable, skilled and innovative in all aspects of public health. The ever increasing regional and global demand for qualified personnel includes the demand for practice-oriented experts in public health who are able to make a difference in any dynamic firm in the world is confirmed by consultations with various stakeholders in both the public and private sectors of namibia.

PurposeThe Diploma in HIV/AIDs Management (Level 6) is designed for professionals seeking depth in the chosen career with greater public health responsibilities. Its contents include materials and techniques that are consistent with modern principles and best practices, providing knowledge and skills that have immediate application in the real world of work. The qualification aims to empower people who are involved in practical public health activities with the capacity to further develop their career in public health. The qualification provides practice-oriented education for high level public health service providers with skills that would enable graduates to succeed in any public health care settings in southern African region and beyond.

The qualification will also equip students with effective working knowledge of the analytical tools, programming and management concepts used in public, corporate and nGo sector as well as grounding them in the practical management skills required in organisation or community activities.

Admission Requirements students will be admitted if they hold the Certificate in HIV/AIDs Management Level 5 or equivalent.

Qualification DurationThe study period for this programme is:Minimum: 2 Years.Maximum: 4 Years

217

The programme comprises two (2) semesters per academic year. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to:• organise and effectively manage related public health and HIV/AIDs projects,

workshops, seminars, and training programmes for local communities and workplaces on prevention, voluntary testing and counselling both in the public and private sector.

• Demonstrate an understanding of HIV/AIDs policy and strategic Plan/Framework and procedures in place to support the Vision 2030 program components relating to health.

• Apply the acquired counselling skills to both the infected and affected.

Articulationstudent who possesses the Diploma in HIV/AIDs Management will articulate to the 3rd year of the Bachelor in HIV/AIDs Management Level 7.

Credit transferAny credit recognition and credit transfer from other qualifications are granted for qualifications from accredited institutions. Internal students that apply for advanced standing or credit accumulation or credit transfer will have their cases considered by the relevant faculty. students from outside IUM will have their cases considered by the relevant faculty. Credit from outside institutions may be awarded up to fifty percent of total credits for any qualification conducted by IUM. Appeals may be submitted to senate.

AssessmentCourse work/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Teaching methods/strategiesThe delivery methods for this qualification comprises of the part time and distance learning mode. Contact hours for distance learning mode are face-to- face encounters on monthly basis and block periods during IUM academic breaks and other public holidays such as easter break.The following are the methods of delivery:• Face-to-face: Lecture and discussions,• Seminars/public lecture •Tutorials

218

• Workshops • Self-managed learning

TOTAL CREDITS 191



Course Title

Course Code

Notional Hours

NQF Level Credits

Compulsory Courses Counselling skills 100 5 10

epidemiology: The Basic science of Public Health

100 5 10

Community Based Care & support II

120 6 12

Health economics and HIV/ AIDs

120 6 12


Course Title

Course Code

Notional Hours

NQF Level Credits

Counselling Practicum 150 5 15

Leadership Development in HIV/ AIDs Management

150 6 12

nutrition and Wellbeing in HIV/AIDs Management

150 6 12


150 6 10

219



Course Title

Course Code Notional Hours

NQF Level

Cred-its

Compulsory Courses networking and Partnerships 120 6 12

Corporate Governance and HIV/ AIDs

120 6 12

Health and Wellness 120 6 13Policy and Legal Frameworks in HIV/ AIDs

120 6 12


Course Title


Compulsory Courses Health systems and HIV/AIDs Management

120 6 12

occupational safety, Health and HIV/AIDs

120 6 13

Public Health Practices in HIV/AIDs Management

120 6 12

Physical Therapy and HIV/AIDs 120 6 12

220

Bachelor of HIV/AIDS Management (NQF Level: 7)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 40 -Level 5 credits: 95 -Level 6 credits: 118 -Level 7 credits: 110 20Minimum total credits required: 363 10

RationaleThe attainment of Vision 2030 requires the creation of a knowledge based economy. The implementation of a knowledge based economy requires public health practitioners who are knowledgeable, skilled and innovative in all aspects of public health. The national Human Resource Plan for 2010-2025 (pg.28) states that the impact of HIV/AIDs is a challenge as well as a threat of decreased investments in the education of namibia. The Bachelor in HIV/AIDs Level Management degree was developed in this context.

PurposeThe Bachelor in HIV/AIDs Management Level 7 aims to develop a conceptual understanding of HIV/AIDs and of how society has framed this disease, its historical background, and the social, legal, political and ethical issues associated with it. The qualification is designed for professionals seeking a career transition with greater public health responsibilities especially in the area of creating an awareness of the social and psychological implications of HIV/AIDs for people living with HIV and their families, communities and support systems. Furthermore, the holders of this qualification will be able to demonstrate an understanding of the implications of the epidemic HIV/AIDs for society by describing infection control measures, groups at greatest risk, contact tracing, education, economics, community resources, the stress of care-giving, and the prospects for the future.


Hold a namibia senior secondary Certificate (nssC) ordinary or Higher Level with passes in 5 subjects; or equivalent, with a minimum of D grade in english Language, and should total twenty five points or more; oR through mature age/prior learning with three years relevant experience in various fields in public health or related fields. Achievement of these requirements will not automatically guarantee admission into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests at the IUM.Holders of Diploma in HIV/AIDs Management (Level6) or its equivalent.

221

note: If in possession of a foreign qualification, submit an nQA evaluation report of their foreign qualifications to the IUM for consideration.

Qualification DurationThe study period for the programme is:Minimum: 3 Years.Maximum: 5 Years.The programme comprises of two (2) semesters per academic year. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to: • Implement programmes aimed at improving the conditions of those that are

infected and affected in order to enhance the quality of their lives.• Design and implement long term strategies to achieve the objectives of HIV /AIDs

and Health Management programs in the public, private and nGo sector.• Apply the acquired skills to develop expertise in public health and HIV/AIDs.• Apply the standards of precautionary and preventive measures while giving first aid• explain behaviour change and communication theories and models.• explain and differentiate the quantitative and qualitative methods used in the study

of Health Communication.• Define and analyse essential terms related to social network concepts and analytic

approaches.• Demonstrate skills in planning a health behaviour change and communication in

HIV and AIDs programmes. • examine the consequences of health literacy deficits on HIV/AIDs-related

behaviours and results.• Discuss the principles of corporate governance and HIV/AIDs.• explain the roles of governance structures, develop governance frameworks and

implement the Policy and legal Frameworks in HIV/AIDs.

ArticulationA student who holds a Bachelor in HIV/AIDs Management will be able to articulate to IUM’s Bachelor in HIV/AIDs Management Honours Level 8 or any other related qualification at Level 8.

Credit transferAny credit recognition and credit transfer from other qualifications are granted for qualifications from accredited institutions. Internal students that apply for advanced standing or credit accumulation or credit transfer will have their cases considered by the relevant faculty. students from outside IUM will have their cases considered by the relevant faculty. Credit from outside institutions may be awarded up to fifty per cent

222

of total credits for any qualification conducted by IUM. Appeals may be submitted to senate.

AssessmentCoursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. students must score at least 50% in each course /coursework to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.Practical Assessment: students will be required to do practical assessments during internship and counselling skills practicum during the second and third years. It will contribute to HIV/AIDs management, health and social sciences studies credits. The Practical Assessment will be part of the HIV/AIDs, health and social sciences modules and some tools will be used to assess students’ practical skills and experience in the work environment. The expectations and implications of marking practical skills in a variety of contexts such as workshops, work placements or industry settings are also investigated and will be part of the continuous assessment. Teaching methods/strategiesThe delivery methods for this qualification comprise of the full time, part time and distance learning mode. Contact hours for distance learning mode are face-to- face encounters on monthly basis and block periods during IUM academic breaks and other public holidays such as easter break.The following are the methods of delivery:• Face-to-face: Lecture and discussions,• Seminars/public lecture • Tutorials• Workshops • Self-managed learning

223

YEAR 1: 125 ( 363 credits)


Course Title

Course Code

Notional Hours

NQF Level Credits

Communicable and non-Communicable Diseases

100 5 10

Basic It skills 100 4 10Applied english Language skills 100 4 10epidemiology: The Basic science of Public Health

100 5 10

Counselling skills 100 5 10The Global Impact of HIV/AIDs 100 5 10Introduction to entrepreneurship 100 4 10


Course Title

Course Code

Notional Hours

NQF Level Credits

Complementary and Alternative Medicine (CAM)

100 5 10

Counselling Practicum 100 5 10Community Based Care & support I 100 5 10First Aid and HIV/AIDs 100 5 10Health Communication skills 100 4 10

224



Course Title

Course Code Notional Hours

NQF Level Credits

networking and Partnerships 100 6 12

Corporate Governance and HIV/ AIDs

100 6 12

Policy and Legal Frameworks in HIV/ AIDs

100 6 12

Community Based Care & support II

100 6 12


100 6 10


Course Title

Course Code

Notional Hours

NQF Level Credits

Leadership Development in HIV/ AIDs Management

120 6 12

nutrition and Wellbeing in HIV/ AIDs Management

120 6 12

Health economics and HIV/ AIDs 120 6 12Public Health Practices in HIV/AIDs Management

120 6 12

Health systems and HIV/AIDs Management

120 6 12

225



Course Title

Course Code

Notional Hours

NQF Level Credits

Research Methodology (Year-long Course)

200 7 20

sociology of HIV/AIDs 150 7 15Information systems in Public Health

150 7 15

strategic entrepreneurship 100 7 10Quality Improvement in Public Health

150 7 15

SEMESTER 2( 45 credits)

Course Title

Course Code

Notional Hours

NQF Level Credits

Project Management 150 7 15

Internship 200 7 20Electives : (choose one)Family life education 150 7 10stress Management 100 7 10

226

Bachelor of HIV/AIDS Management Honours (Level 8)


RationaleThe attainment of Vision 2030 requires the creation of a knowledge based economy. The implementation of a knowledge based economy requires public health practitioners who are knowledgeable, skilled and innovative in all aspects of public health. The national Human Resource Plan for 2010-2025 (pg.28) states that the impact of HIV/AIDs is a challenge as well as a threat of decreased investments in the education of namibia. The Bachelor in HIV/AIDs Honours Level Management degree was developed in this context.

The ever increasing regional and global demand for qualified personnel includes the demand for practice-oriented experts in public health who are able to make a difference in any dynamic firm in the world.

PurposeThe Bachelor Honours in HIV/AIDs Management (level 8) aims to develop a broad-based practical understanding of the complexity and multi-dimensionality of the evolving phenomenon known as HIV/AIDs as a paradigm for the relationship between disease, society, and public policy. The qualification aims to empower people who are involved in practical public health activities with the capacity to further develop their career in public health.

Admission Requirementsstudents will be admitted if they hold the Bachelor in HIV/AIDs Management Level 7 or any equivalent.

Qualification DurationThe study period for the programme is:Minimum: 1 Years.Maximum: 2 Years.The programme comprises of two (2) semesters per academic year. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the Bachelor Degree/Honours Qualification Holders of this qualification are able to: • Conduct research on HIV/AIDs and related communicable and opportunistic

diseases.• Analyse and implement the current HIV/AIDs and other communicable and

opportunistic diseases awareness and prevention programmes.

227

• Prepare reports and coordinate HIV/AIDs Management programmes within organizations.

• Create a comprehensive response framework on HIV/AIDs and related communicable and opportunistic diseases.

• Apply the acquired skills to discuss the relationship and distinctions between law, ethics, and health

• Identify and describe the inalienable fundamental rights to which a person is inherently entitled to as a human being.

• Apply strategic, organised, and interdisciplinary knowledge, skills, and competencies essential in HIV/AIDs management and public health services

• Analyse the different human societies and cultures and their development vis-à-vis HIV/AIDs.

Credit TransferAny credit recognition and credit transfer from other qualifications are granted for qualifications from accredited institutions. Internal students that apply for advanced standing or credit accumulation or credit transfer will have their cases considered by the relevant faculty. students from outside IUM will have their cases considered by the relevant faculty. Credit from outside institutions may be awarded up to fifty per cent of total credits for any qualification conducted by IUM. Appeals may be submitted to senate.

Articulationstudents who hold the Bachelor Degree in HIV/AIDs Management Honours will articulate to the IUM’s Master in HIV/AIDs Management Level 9 or any other qualification at nQF Level 9.

AssessmentCoursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations.

Practical Assessment: students are expected to conduct research projects in the second semester.

Teaching methods/strategiesThe delivery methods for this qualification comprises of the part time and distance learning mode. Contact hours for distance learning mode are face-to- face encounters on monthly basis and block periods during IUM academic breaks and other public holidays such as easter break.

Lecture Delivery strategies:The following common lecture delivery strategies shall be used depending on the lecturer:

228

• Central class presentation (PowerPoint and chalk-talk) by lecturer.• Central class presentations (PowerPoint and chalk-talk) by students.• Lecturer led class discussion• Individual and group exercises• Case analysis (where applicable).


Semester 1: course ( 74 credits)

Course Title


social Anthropology 160 8 16

strategic Management 160 8 16Research Project 320 8 32Applied entrepreneurship Management

100 8 10

Semester 2: course (64 credits)

Course Title


Human Rights and HIV/ AIDs 160 8 16

Monitoring and evaluation in HIV/AIDs Management

160 8 16

Health Law and ethics 160 16Electives : (choose one)Public Health Approaches to HIV/AIDs

160 8 16

The tools of Public Health Practice 160 8 16

229

DePARtMent oF HeALtH AnD WeLLness stUDIes

Certificate in Health and Wellness Studies (Level 5)


RationaleThe Certificate in Health and Wellness studies (level 5) has been developed in response to the need for a healthy namibian nation as envisaged in Vision 2030.

PurposeThe purpose of this qualification is to train students to acquire professional knowledge and skills of healthy lifestyles .This qualification enables the students to learn the fundamental principles, concepts, and skills applied to health education, health promotion, and disease prevention. It further trains students with skills to assist people to improve the patient’s behaviour by alleviating the impact of lifestyle diseases and conditions such as cancer, diabetes, hypertension and obesity in order to further promote healthy ways of life.


Applicants should meet the following requirements: -Hold a namibia senior secondary Certificate Higher (nssCH) or Higher International General Certificate for secondary education (HIGCse) and or in four subjects with 1- 4 grades, with a minimum of 20 points or more.

oRHold a Grade 12 namibia senior secondary Certificate ordinary (nssCo) or International General Certificate for secondary education (IGCse) with a minimum of e symbol in english Language totalling 20 points or more.oRA minimum of 20 points from a combination of nssCH/HIGCse and nssCo/IGCse.oRenter through flexible learning path – mature age/prior learning with 3 years relevant experience in various fields of world of work. oR The equivalent of any of the above as determined by the IUM senate.


230

The study period for the programme is a Minimum of 1 Year and Maximum: of 2 Years.The programme comprises 2 semesters, i.e. two (2) semesters per academic year. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to:

• Identify and implement individual components of health and wellness programmes. • Discuss and determine appropriate solutions to operational problems in programme

management. • Assess Health and Wellness systems and programmes using basic analytical

methods.• Demonstrate skills of promoting healthy lifestyles and health care programmes.

ArticulationVertically, the Certificate in Health and Wellness grants admission to Diploma in Health and Wellness. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Diploma programme. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related Certificate qualifications. IUM courses articulate from qualification to qualification as per the statement in course contents. The IUM will decide if and how course work from qualifications from other institutions will articulate with IUM courses. Appeals may be submitted to senate. This Certificate of Health and Wellness studies (Level 5) will articulate to the Diploma of Health and Wellness studies (Level 6).

Credit transferCandidates from other institutions or programmes will be treated on a case-by-case basis depending on the relevant curricula followed at the previous institution or programme. Credit recognition of another institution or programme’s courses can only be extended up to 50% of the credits needed for the qualification.


Final ExaminationsThe final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally.supplementary examinations

231

A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination. A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying more than 50% of the courses or credits.

Teaching methods/strategiesThis qualification will be offered through the following modes of delivery:• Face-to-face• Design Thinking (Case Method) • Self-learning• Social Media• Online Learning ToolsThe degree will be offered in collaboration with the other faculties within the university.



Course Title


Compulsory Courses

Mathematics 5 10

Communication skills 4 10Basic It skills 5 10Applied english Language skills 4 10Critical Thinking skills 5 10Introduction to entrepreneurship 4 10

SEMESTER 2 (54 credits

Course Title


Compulsory Courses

Introduction to Health and Wellness 5 10

Introduction to Counseling 5 10Introduction to occupational Health and safety

5 10

YEAR COURSEAnatomy and Physiology 5 24

232

Diploma in Health and Wellness Studies (Level 6)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 92Level 5 credits: 94 -Minimum total credits required: 186

RationaleThe Diploma in Health and Wellness studies (Level 6) has been developed in response to the need for a healthy namibian nation as envisaged in Vision 2030 and “strengthening the school Health Programme in namibia” (2012-2015).

PurposeThe main purpose of the Diploma in Health and Wellness studies (Level 6) is to train students to analyse, arrange, and evaluate information related to disciplines that holistically integrate strategies in promoting the health and wellbeing of individuals and groups. Furthermore, this qualification has a purpose of delivering a comprehensive understanding and application of preventative health and wellness approaches within a culturally diverse society. This qualification includes a variety of occupations within the corporate and community contexts such as of a senior health administrator, supporting staff and health and wellness officer.

Admission Requirementsstudents who meet the requirements should be holders of a Certificate of Health and Wellness studies (Level 5) or other equivalent qualification.

Qualification DurationThe study period for the programme is:Minimum: 2 YearMaximum: 3 Years.The programme comprises of 2 semesters per academic year. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole qualificationHolders of this qualification are able to:

• Discuss the influence of culture, religion, and family history on an individual’s perception of health and illness.

• Identify and apply sound health and wellness skills to develop well balanced and healthy lifestyle.

• Identify and discuss health and wellness policies in Government, organize and facilitate education and information sessions on health and wellness in the

233

workplace and at community level; non-government and private organizations; mobilize resources for health and wellness awareness programmes.

• Facilitate trainings for workforce at all levels and community resource persons (peer educators and health promoters) on Health and Wellness and explain international and legal frameworks on Health and Wellness

• Identify and use public health information, health and wellness systems and programmes.

• Use management information systems to effectively manage public and private health care services.

• explain the role of occupational health practitioners and the analysis of their effectiveness in practice and conduct assessments of the work environment, its effects on health, relevant legislation and the effective control of workplace hazards.

ArticulationVertically, the Diploma in Health and Wellness studies (Level 6) grants admission to Bachelor of Health and Wellness studies at nQF Level 7 and/or any qualification at nQF Level 7. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for students to gain admission or any related Bachelor programme. These students can also apply at other institutions for entering into Bachelor programmes at nQF Level 7. Horizontally, students may, were applicable, and moved into existing or new related Diploma programmes.

Credit transferCredit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content acquired through learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. to be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM coursesThe awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years. Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibian Qualification Authority requirements.




234




AssessmentCoursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities for example tests, assignments, mini projects, group work/discussion and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period.

students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.




Teaching methods/strategiesThis qualification will be offered through the following modes of delivery:• Face-to-face• Design Thinking (Case Method) • Self-learning• Social Media

235

• Online Learning ToolsThe degree will be offered in collaboration with the other faculties within the university.

YEAR 1 (92 credits)

Semester 1

Course Title


Management Communication 5 10

Marketing of Health and Wellness 5 10Year Courses Integrated Wellness counselling 5 24occupational Health and safety I 5 24Health and Wellness studies I 5 24

YEAR 2 94 credits

Semester 1

Course Title


Home Based Care 6 12


6 10

Project Management 6 12nutrition 6 12

Semester 2

Course Title


Year courses

Health and Wellness studies II 6 24occupational Health and safety II 6 24

236

Bachelor of Health and Wellness Studies (Level 7)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 30 -Level 5 credits: 144 -Level 6 credits: 94 -Level 7 credits: 114 -Minimum total credits required: 382 -

RationaleThe Bachelor of Health and Wellness studies (nQF level 7) has been developed in response to the national need for healthy namibian citizens as envisaged in Vision 2030.

PurposeThe purpose of this qualification is to develop students’ knowledge and skills in implementing health goals, sustain life-changing behaviours, and manage healthy lifestyles progress. It further trains students with skills to assist people to improve the patient’s behaviour by alleviating the impact of lifestyle diseases and conditions such as cancer, diabetes, hypertension and obesity in order to further promote healthy ways of life.

Admission RequirementsThe normal entry requirement to undergraduate degree programmes shall be a namibia senior secondary Certificate ( ordinary or Higher or a combination of Both ) or equivalent qualifications, provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including english at Grade D) normally in not more than three examination sittings with a 25 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale.

The above are essential requirements as the instructional design of the qualification and course assessments will be integrated with the work place experience.Applicants should also meet the following requirements: -

Hold HIGCse senior certificate in four subjects with 1- 4 symbolsoRHold a Grade 12 senior certificate (IGCse) with a minimum of D symbol in english Language totalling twenty five points or moreoRenter through flexible learning path – mature age/prior learning with five years relevant experience in various fields of world of work. oR

237

Diploma of Health and Wellness (Level 6) or equivalent

The achievement of these requirements will not automatically guarantee a place on the degree course, it will be subject to a successful interview/aptitude test (as required) and availability of places.

Qualification DurationThe study period for the programme is:Minimum: 3 YearMaximum: 4 Years.The programme comprises 2 semesters, i.e. two (2) semesters per academic year. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to: • Assess institutional needs and design health promotion and wellness programmes.• Implement and manage health promotion and wellness programmes. • evaluate private and public health care policies.• Develop policy for effective service provision in public and private health care

services.• Discuss the concepts of occupational health practice in relation to current needs

and initiatives, and analyse the role of occupational health practitioners and their effectiveness in practice.

• Design and implement public relations programmes for health promotion.• Apply business models which underpin innovative and sustainable business

ventures through identifying possible markets, business models and ways of efficiently growing a business venture.

ArticulationThe holder of this qualification will articulate to Bachelor of Health and Wellness studies Honours at nQF level 8 or any related qualification at nQF level 8.

Credit transferCredit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content acquired through learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. to be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM coursesThe awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of

238

higher learning, the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification.Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. no more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is for any reason deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.




Teaching methods/strategiesThe delivery methods for this qualification comprise of the fulltime, part time and block release learning mode. Contact hours for distance learning mode are face-to- face

239

encounters on monthly basis and block periods during IUM academic breaks and other public holidays such as easter break.The following are the methods of delivery:• Face-to-face• Design Thinking (Case Method) or Self-learning• Social Media• Online Learning Tools

The degree will be offered through a face-to-face mode in collaboration with the other faculties within the university.

YEAR 1

Semester 1

Course Title


Compulsory Courses

Mathematics 5 10

Basic It skills 4 10

Applied english Language skills 4 10Critical Thinking skills 5 10Introduction to entrepreneurship 4 10Marketing of Health and Wellness 5 10

Semester 2

Course Title


Years Courses

Health and Wellness studies I 5 24

occupational Health and safety I 5 24

Anatomy and Physiology 5 32

240

YEAR 2

Semester 1

Course Title


Compulsory Courses

Project Management 6 12

nutrition 6 12

Intermediate entrepreneurship And Innovation

6 10

Semester 2

Course Title


Compulsory Courses

Home Based Care 6 12

Year Courses

Health and Wellness studies II 6 24Integrated Wellness Counseling 7 24occupational Health and safety II 6 24

241

YEAR 3

Semester 1

Course Title


strategic entrepreneurship 7 10

Professional ethics 7 12

Semester 2

Course Title


Years Courses

Health and Wellness studies III 7 24

Health and Wellness Management 7 24

occupational Health and safety II 7 24Research Methodology 7 20

242

Bachelor of Health and Wellness Studies Honours (Level 8)


RationaleBachelor of Health And Wellness studies Honours level 8 has been developed in response to the need for a healthy namibian nation as envisaged in Vision 2030 and “strengthening the school Health Programme in namibia” (2012-2015). The qualification addresses the need for improved management skills throughout all levels of health and wellness whether public or private. In doing so, it meets the immediate needs of the health and wellness sector of providing quality service to all namibians. over the long term, a cadre of qualified managers in health and wellness will assist in reaching the Vision 2030 goal of health for all.

PurposeThe Bachelor of Health and Wellness studies Honours is designed for health care providers and people who want to equip themselves with the skills required to build and design health and wellness promotion projects. It therefore provides an avenue for candidates to assess and evaluate health care topics in greater depth and detail. This qualification addresses the need for improved management skills throughout all levels of the health and wellness sector whether public or private in planning and implementing health care policies. Graduates will not only have practical hands on approach, competency and proficiency but also discover new trends and developments in the health and wellness sector through the research expertise to be acquired in this qualification.

Admission RequirementsApplicants must be holders of a Bachelor of Health and Wellness studies degree at nQF Level 7 or equivalent.

Qualification DurationThe study period for the programme is:Minimum: 1 Year.Maximum: 2 Years.The programme comprises of two (2) semesters per academic year. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

outcomes of the whole qualification

Upon successful completion of this qualification, holders are able to:• Plan, manage and ensure the quality of health and wellness provision.• Design, implement and manage health and wellness projects.

243

• Develop public relations strategies regarding health and wellness.• Examine the strategic roles of health and wellness providers. • Analyze all relevant health and wellness information.•Draft and implement health care policies.

Articulation

IUM courses articulate from qualification to qualification as per the statement in course contents. The IUM will decide if and how course work from qualifications from other institutions will articulate with IUM courses. Appeals may be submitted to senate. The holders of this qualification will articulate to Masters degree or any qualification at nQF Level 9.

Credit transfer

Candidates from other institutions or programmes will be treated on a case-by-case basis depending on the relevant curricula followed at the previous institution or programme. Credit recognition of another institution or programme’s courses can only be extended up to 50% of the credits needed for the qualification.

Assessment

Coursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Final ExaminationsThe final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally. supervisors will allocated to students to supervise the research projects. The projects must be completed by the set date. Projects will marked by the supervisors and will be externally moderated.

Supplementary ExaminationsA student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination. A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course

244

as per IUM examination regulations. student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying more than 50% of the courses or credits.


This qualification will offered through the following modes of delivery:• Face-to-face• Design Thinking (Case Method) • Self-learning• Social Media• Online Learning ToolsThe degree will be offered in collaboration with the other faculties within the university.

Course Title


Semester 1

Health education Practice 8 12

Semester 2

strategic Management in Health and Wellness

8 12

Applied entrepreneurship Management

8 10

Year courses Marketing of Health and Wellness 8 32Public Relations for Health and Wellness

8 32

Research Project 8 32Health Informational Promotion 8 32Total Credits Required 130

245

FACULTY OF EDUCATION

246

DIPLOMA IN EDUCATION - PRE AND JUNIOR PRIMARY: (NQF LEVEL 7)

Purpose Of The Qualification

There is an urgent need for qualified pre and junior primary school teachers in namibia. enrolment in early childhood education has suddenly increased and this increase is mainly due to the government initiative to help make public education accessible to all by abolishing school fees as well as a strategic emphasis by the namibian Government to increase learner access to education opportunities.Though the initiative is a step in the right direction, it has stressed the education system. today there are large inequalities in educational access between rural and urban areas and a pupil-to-teacher ratio that exceeds 40:1 in some rural areas. overall, The Ministry of education estimates that another 5000 teachers must be trained to reach universal primary education by 2030.early childhood education is a vital investment for the country’s future, setting an early foundation for life-long learning for early childhood school teachers help to give young learners the best possible start in life. They inspire young learners through learning and they have a greater opportunity to relate well with learners and their parents. The students studying the International University of Management Diploma in education (Pre and Junior Primary) will be actively involved in their learning and development. For this qualification has been carefully designed, in collaboration with the major stakeholders, to be responsive to the needs of the profession and aims to model what outstanding teaching and learning in the pre and junior primary classroom looks like. The student learning experiences will be varied and will include educational visits, lectures, conferences, seminars, tutorials, practical workshops and independent study supported by research and online learning materials. In addition to this, the students will spend a significant proportion of time on professional placement (school based studies). Assessment methods are varied according to the courses but include, among others, posters, essays, presentations and portfolios. All of these have an explicit focus on supporting each student’s development as an outstanding pre and junior primary school teacher.The Diploma in education (Pre and Junior Primary) will enable the students to develop a deep understanding of how learners learn. The students will learn about current initiatives and their impact on classroom practices. The students will be supported in their learning to become creative and flexible practitioners prepared to make a positive impact on learners’ lives and meet the needs of early childhood education of the future. This qualification will not only meet but also implement all the requirements for training quality early childhood educators as articulated by the Ministry of Basic education in its ministerial policy documents. Apart from aligning itself directly with the ministerial policy documents on pre and junior primary education, this qualification considers the ever growing pool of an unqualified teachers who do not meet the present minimum requirement for entry into Bachelor of education (Junior Primary) Honours at the International University of

247

Management. This qualification, therefore, will provide a suitable bridge for entry into Bachelor of education (Junior Primary) Honours and further training.

This qualification targets anyone who has the zeal to be become a pre and primary school teacher and has the necessary requirements to pursue this study to become a professionally qualified pre and primary school teacher in order to meet the high demand for academically and professionally qualified pre and primary school teachers in namibia and the sADC region.

Outcomes of the Qualification Holders of this qualification are able to:

• identify some of the key areas associated with teaching and learning at pre and junior primary school level;

• identify key techniques for using songs, play and games to enhance learners’s learning;

• understand how different learning styles affect the way learners learn and identify different techniques for exploiting different learning styles;

• define how lesson planning is linked to syllabus and curriculum and explain how the curriculum can define what and how you teach;

• identify a variety of classroom management factors which affect the learning conditions in the young learner classroom;

• demonstrate ability to carry out both formal assessment methods (quizzes, short tests, oral tests and worksheets) and informal assessment methods (observation of each learner’s progress in learning and practice situations);

• provide high quality teaching of core skills (literacy, numeracy, ICt, thinking skills, problem solving);

• develop in the learners an awareness of their personal learning styles and strengths and encourage them to assume more responsibility for their progress;

• encourage lifelong learning;• demonstrate knowledge and understanding of learners’s early childhood

development process in cognitive, emotional, social, aesthetic, spiritual and ethical, and physical domains; and

• demonstrate an ability to teach the whole of the junior primary school curriculum

Qualification DurationThe study period for the qualification is:Fulltime/Part-time/Block release mode - Minimum: 3 Years; Maximum: 5 Years.The qualification comprises of two (2) semesters per academic year. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

248

CoURsesYEAR 1

1. educational Foundations I2. english for teachers3. Children’s Literature and Reading support4. Physical education I (PJP)5. Introduction to Religious and Moral education6. Principles and Approaches of early Childhood education7. technology Application in early Childhood education8. Arts education I (PJP)9. Introduction to Life skills (PJP)10. It skills for teachers11. Academic Writing12. Assessment in education

YEAR COURSE(S)

13. Micro teaching I (PJP)14. english Language Practice I15. namibian Language Practice I16. Basic Mathematics I

YEAR 21. Introduction to early Childhood Curriculum Development2. Physical education II (PJP)3. Intermediate Religious and Moral education4. educational Foundation II5. Multi-Grade Classroom teaching6. Introduction to environmental education7. Arts education II (PJP)8. Counselling and Learner support9. Intermediate Life skills II (PJP)YEAR COURSE(S)10. school Based studies I

249

11. english Language Practice II12. namibian Language Practice II13. Basic Mathematics II14. Micro teaching II

YEAR 31. educational Psychology for Young Learners2. early Childhood Classroom Management 3. Inclusive education4. First Aid

YEAR COURSE(S)

5. school Based studies II6. namibian Language Literacy and Development7. english Language Literacy and Development 8. Learning support in Mathematics and science

CREDIT TRANSFER



The awarded credits are governed by the IUM diploma qualification rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.

Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning, the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.


250

Credits earned at an unaccredited institution of higher learning may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in the IUM diploma qualification.


Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions of higher learning is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM diploma in education qualification. no more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.

The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions of higher learning, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is for any reason deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.


MODES OF TEACHING AND LEARNING IN TEACHER EDUCATION

The teaching and learning processes will take place through lectures, tutorial activities and discussion, school-based activities, collaborative group tasks, practical projects and written assignments.

ASSESSMENT

Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period.

students must score at least 50% in each course /coursework to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Final Examinations


251



A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying a deficit of more than 30% of the courses or credits.

Practical Teaching

All students should acquire field experience in the first, second and third year of study and submit a report. For the: o first year - this field experience amounts to 40 hours (consecutive 2 weeks) of class observation per year (each level -10 hours);o second year - this period of practice teaching amounts to 80 hours (consecutive 4 weeks) per year (Pre and Grade 1 – each 40 hours); and o third year - this period of practice teaching amounts to 240 hours (consecutive 6 weeks) hours per year (Pre and Grade 1 – each 40 hours, and Grade 2 and Grade 3 – 80 hours each).

each and every one of these field experiences are examinable and are a requirement for graduation. Assessment is by means of observation of the student, student assessment by learners and staff, and by submission of a portfolio. Furthermore, students will be required to practice teaching in at least one (1) school in the rural setting during the 3 years of practice teaching.

ARTICULATION Vertically, the Diploma in education (Pre and Lower Primary) grants admission to Bachelor of education (Primary) Honours. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Bachelor honours programme. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related Diploma teachers qualifications.

252

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION HONOURS (PRE AND JUNIOR PRIMARY) (NQF LEVEL: 8)

Rationale and the purpose of the Qualification The namibia’s occupational Demand and supply outlook Model (noDsoM) of 2012 and other several reports issued by the Ministry of education highlights the shortage of professionally qualified teachers at all levels of the education system in namibia. There is a high demand for appropriately qualified teachers especially for early childhood education which brought about the design and development of the Bachelor of education (Pre and Junior Primary) Honours.

This qualification is designed to train early childhood education classroom teachers in thematic approach to teaching and learning, ability to locate learning within the child’s context (environment) and help children understand why they are doing what they are doing. Furthermore, this qualification aims to equip early childhood education teachers with an in-depth understanding of the subject matter (classroom activities), sound professional teaching skills including multi-grade teaching skills (application), and ability to adapt to the ever-changing early childhood educational needs in namibia (contextualisation).

The Bachelor of education (Pre and Junior Primary) Honours qualification is designed to produce early childhood education teachers with an in-depth understanding of the early childhood education classroom activities, sound professional skills and ability to adapt to the ever-changing early childhood educational needs in namibia. Its focus is on quality early childhood teaching and learning as well as management of early childhood classroom environment. Hence, the qualification content has been research-based and infusing best practices in early childhood education and strategies for classroom teaching and learning. This qualification combines early childhood education theoretical components with practical application and the basis for this approach are the principles and insights of leading pedagogues such as Rudolph Joseph steiner, emmi Pikler, Thomas Gordon, Lori Malaguzzi and Maria Montessori.

Furthermore, this qualification also provides future early childhood educators with a foundation in classroom, department and school management, curriculum development, and methods of early childhood teaching and learning, including multi-grade teaching skills, as well as skills for working with children age five (5) through nine (9) years, Grade 0 through Grade 3. Furthermore, an emphasis is placed on the integration of appropriate technology in the school curriculum at this level.

The three-year course leading to the qualification Bachelor of education (Pre and Junior Primary) Honours aims at equipping students with necessary competencies in early childhood classroom teaching and learning and school managerial skills which are presently largely lacking in early childhood education across namibia. This qualification

253

will not only meet but also implement all the requirements for training quality early childhood educators as articulated by the Ministry of Basic education in its ministerial policy documents.

It can, therefore be deduced that through the design of this qualification, the IUM intends to make available quality pre and junior primary education that will promote learner-centred and inclusive education and meaningful access to early childhood education. The effort made here is to improve the quality of classroom teaching and learning and management, increase availability and access to quality education at early childhood education level as well as reduce the vulnerability of children to failure and dropout at later stages of education. Therefore, students completing this qualification will be well versed in teaching strategies that are not only varied but flexible as well within the well-structured sequences of fun lessons with stories, song and movement. These students upon graduation will be prepared for pre and junior primary school class teaching and learning as well as administration.

Qualification DurationThe study period for the qualification is:o Fulltime/Part-time mode block release - Minimum: 4 Years; Maximum: 6 Years.The qualification comprises of two (2) semesters, per academic year. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.


Holders of this qualification are able to:• demonstrate ability to teach school subjects;• demonstrate understanding of the concepts, theories, principles and facts related to

the pre and junior primary school curriculum subjects;• demonstrate expertise in teaching methodologies and strategies that are consistent

with the theme teaching approach, and in the facilitating integration of learning;• demonstrate knowledge and understanding of children’s early childhood

development process in cognitive, emotional, social, aesthetic, spiritual and ethical, and physical domains;

• demonstrate understanding of learner-centred education and theories on literacy and literacy development;

• demonstrate expertise in implementing strategies developed to cope with code-switching and developing in learners the ability to think in the target language;

• demonstrate competency in curriculum design, development, implementation and analysis;

• demonstrate competency in developing a scheme of work that accommodates the challenges around first and second language issues;

• demonstrate competence in the well-structured sequences of fun lessons with stories, song and movement;

254

• create and maintain a learning environment that is conducive to effective early childhood learning;

• facilitate learning in such a way that different needs of learners, including the exceptionally talented children and those with learning disabilities and challenges, as well as emotional and behavioural problems, are taken into account within the framework of inclusive education;

• use information and communication technologies to enhance teaching and learning;• demonstrate ability to locate learning within the children’s context (environment)

and help children understand why they are doing what they are doing; and• Demonstrate ability to carry out both formal assessment methods (quizzes, short

tests, oral tests and worksheets) and informal assessment methods (observation of each learner’s progress in learning and practice situations).

Articulation Vertically, the Bachelor of education (Pre and Junior Primary) Honours grants admission to Master of education. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Masters programme. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related undergraduate teachers qualifications.This qualification is designed for teachers willing to take up teaching assignments in both the private and public schools. It is structured to stretch and challenge the teachers to fulfil their true potential and to become defining players in the education system. The basis for the argument is that a teacher must first be a student and these programmes target those individuals willing to become students and then be transformed into professional teachers. Furthermore, a key concern of the qualification is the importance of literacy and numeracy to personal fulfilment.

Credit transferCredit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content acquired learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. to be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses

Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning, the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.Courses will be evaluated for their current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an unaccredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification.

255

Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. no more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is for any reason deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average

Major Combinations

This qualification has no option of specialisation, but all courses are core and compulsory to all students perusing their studies for a Bachelor of education in Pre and Junior Primary Honours.

Assessment

Coursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. students must score at least 50% in each course /coursework to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.Final examinationsThe final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally.


Practical Teaching All students should acquire field experience in the second, third and fourth year of study and submit a report. For the:

256

• second year - this field experience amounts to 2 weeks of class observation per year; • third year - this period of teaching practice amounts to 4 weeks per year; and • fourth year - this period of teaching practice amounts to 12 weeks per year. teaching Methods/strategies

The delivery methods for this qualification comprise of the part time and distance learning modes. Contact hours for distance learning mode are face-to- face encounters on monthly basis and block periods during IUM academic breaks and other public holidays such as easter break.The following are the methods of delivery:• Face-to-face• Design Thinking (Case Method) or self-learning• social Media• online Learning tools


Qualification structure /Courses

YEAR 11. english for teachers 2. teaching Reading with Learners’ Literature I3. Physical education I (PJP)4. Religious and Moral education I5. It skills for teachers6. Integrated technology in early Childhood education I7. Academic Writing8. Guidance and Counselling (PJP)9. Arts education I (PJP)10. Life skills I (PJP)11. Assessment in education12. educational FoundationsYear course(s) (40 Credits)13. Micro teaching I (PJP)14. english Language I15. namibian Language I16. numeracy and Mathematics education I

257

YEAR 2Course Title1 early Childhood Curriculum Development I2 Multi-Grade Classroom teaching3 teaching Phonemic Awareness and Phonics4 Physical education II (PJP)5 Religious and Moral education II (PJP)6 teaching Reading with Learners’ Literature II7 Integrated technology in early Childhood education II8 environmental education I9 Arts education II (PJP)10 Life skills II (PJP)11 educational Foundations IIYear course(s)1. school Based studies I2. Micro teaching II3. english Language II4. namibian Language II5. numeracy and Mathematics education II

258

YEAR 3Course Title1. early Childhood Curriculum Development II 2. Research Methodology in education3. Physical education III (PJP)4. environmental education II5. Life skills III6. Arts education III (PJP)7. Inclusive education8. educational Foundations IIIYear course(s) (45 Credits)1. school Based studies II2. Micro teaching III3. namibian Language III4. english Language education III5. numeracy and Mathematics education III

YEAR 41. Project Management in education2. educational Foundations IV3. education systems4. First AidYear Course1. school Based studies III2. english Language IV3. namibian Language IV4. education Research Project

Namibian LanguagesAvailable

Afrikaans Khoekhoegowab, oshindonga, oshikwanyama, otjiherero, Rukwangali, Rumanyo, silozi Thimbukushu

Foreign LanguageAvailable on De-mand

German and French

259

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION HONOURS (SENIOR PRIMARY)

(NQF LEVEL: 8)

Rationale and Purpose of the Qualification

education is an important factor both in the day-to-day development of the child and in contributing to the personal, social, cultural and economic fulfilment of the future adult. The design and introduction of this qualification by the IUM is, therefore, a significant educational development for it bridges early childhood education with adolescence - secondary school education in ensuring that there is proper continuity in the education process. This qualification also incorporates new content and embraces new approaches and methodologies in teaching and learning, building on the earlier emphasised nu-meracy and reading. A key concern of the qualification is the importance of literacy and numeracy to personal fulfilment. The curriculum also responds to changing needs, par-ticularly in the areas of science and technology, social, personal and health education, and citizenship, and in taking account of the initiative in modern languages.

In preparing teachers for the senior primary education sector, this qualification guides and facilitates student teachers’ initial entry into teaching and provides a solid theo-retical foundation to support and aid their preparation for professional practice with-in the classroom. This qualification is designed to produce teachers with an in-depth understanding of the subject matter, sound professional skills and ability to adapt to the ever-changing educational needs in namibia. Its focus is on quality instruction and teaching in the senior primary school. This qualification aims at improving the compe-tency of senior primary school teachers in quality teaching and class management skills which are presently largely lacking mainly in public schools in namibia. This qualifi-cation, therefore, intends is to improve the quality of senior primary school teaching, instruction and classroom management.


The study period for the qualification is:• Fulltime/Part-time mode/block release - Minimum: 4 Years; Maximum: 6 Years.The study period comprises of two (2) semesters, per academic year. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes for the whole qualification Holders of this qualification are able to:• Demonstrate mastery in teaching at least two (2) school subjects taught at senior

primary school level;• Demonstrate competency in at least two (2) subject matter content and pedagogical

260

knowledge and skills;• Demonstrate creativity and ingenuity to discovery, comprehension, control and

adaptation of senior primary school teaching methodologies to new technologies;• Demonstrate ability to develop the learners’ ability in creative thinking, problem

solving and communication skills.• Demonstrate awareness, understanding and commitment to professional ethics, ba-

sic human rights and sound environmental responsibility;• Demonstrate capability and capacity to produce and use relevant learning materi-

als; and• Demonstrate leadership and classroom managerial skills.

Articulation

Vertically, the Bachelor of education (senior Primary) Honours grants admission to Master of education. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Masters programme. Horizon-tally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related undergraduate teaching qualifications.This qualification is designed for senior primary school teachers willing to take up teaching assignments in both the private and public schools. It is structured to stretch and challenge the senior primary school teachers to fulfil their true potential and to become defining players in the education system. The basis for the argument is that a senior primary school teacher must first be a student and this qualification targets those individuals willing to become students and then be transformed into professional senior primary school teachers.

Credit transferCredit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content acquired learn-ing outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. to be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equiva-lent to IUM courses. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years. Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning, the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements. Courses will be evalu-ated for their current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting.

Credits earned at an unaccredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification. Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning. Acceptance of credits earned at oth-

261

er institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. no more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.

The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is for any reason deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average

Major CombinationsThe core courses for this qualification are fixed and cannot be exchanged. The qualifica-tion is offered in four (4) specialisations and each specialisation has a number of school subject combinations. In addition to that students have option to elect one course from pre-vocational subjects and one course from supportive subject that runs up to year three. no deviation from the prescribed combinations as reflected in the course content will be allowed.

Assessment Coursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examina-tions. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.Final ExaminationsThe final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally.

Supplementary ExaminationsA student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a sup-plementary examination. A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one oppor-tunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying more than 50% of the courses or credits.

262

Practical Teaching All students should acquire field experience in the second, third and fourth year of study and submit a report. For the: • second year - this field experience amounts to 2 weeks of class observation per year; • third year - this period of teaching practice amounts to 4 weeks per year; and • fourth year - this period of teaching practice amounts to 12 weeks per year. teaching Methods/strategies

The delivery methods for this qualification comprise of the part time and distance learn-ing modes. Contact hours for the distance learning mode are face-to- face encounters on a monthly basis and block periods during IUM academic breaks and other public holidays such as easter break.The following are the methods of delivery:• Face-to-face• Flipped Classroom• Design Thinking (Case Method) or self-learning• social Media• online Learning tools


CoursesYEAR 1Course Title1. educational Foundations I2. english For teachers3. It skills for teachers4. Academic Writing5. Theories of Human Development6. 1 supportive subject7. Integrating technology in education I8. Guidance and Counseling9. Life skills I10. 1 Pre Vocational subject11. Assessment in education

263

Year courses1. Micro teaching2. school subject 13. school subject 2

YeAR 21. education foundations II2. Curriculum planning and Development I3. Multi-Grade Classroom teaching 4. Life skills II5. 1 supportive course6. Integrated educational technology II7. educational law and Policies8. 1 Pre-vocation subjectYear courses1. school subject 12. school subject 23. school Based studies I

YeAR 31. education Foundations III2. Life skills III3. Curriculum planning and Development II4. First Aid

5. 1 supportive subject6. school Management and Leadership7. Inclusive education 8. evaluation in education9. 1 Pre-Vocational subject

Year courses1. school subject 12. school subject 23. school Based studies II4. Research Methodology in education

264

Year 4 1. education Foundation IV2. Project Management in education3. education systemsYear courses1. school subject 12. school subject 23. school Based studies III4. education Research Project

Subject Combination

Mathematic and natural scienceenglish and namibian Languagessocial science and namibian LanguageMathematics and english

Supportive Subjects

Arts education, Physical education, Religious and Moral education

Namibian LanguagesAvailable

Afrikaans Khoekhoegowab, oshindonga, oshikwanyama, otjiherero, Rukwangali, Rumanyo, silozi Thimbukushu

Foreign LanguageAvailable on demand

German and French

265

Bachelor Of Education Honours (Secondary Education) : (NQF Level 8)

PURPOSE

The main purpose of Bachelor of education in secondary education honours qualification is to produce professionally qualified teachers who are able to apply a combination of subject matter knowledge with the relevant pedagogical approaches to ensure improved learning outcomes under various contexts. The qualification will contribute to the national efforts for the production of innovative and competent secondary school teachers who would make lasting impressions in the lives of learners. The qualification will also equip teachers with the necessary teaching skills, competencies, and strategies to be effective secondary school teachers, academic manager and administrators. namibia’s occupational Demand and supply outlook Model (noDsoM) of 2012 and other reports issued by the Ministry of education highlight the shortage of professionally qualified teachers at all levels of the education system in namibia. The Bachelor of education (secondary) Honours has been developed in response to the high demand for appropriately qualified teachers in namibia.The rationale for the development of this qualification was motivated by the need to meet the above mentioned challenge because the targets cannot be achieved without the necessary inputs from qualified teachers who are able to implement the national curriculum and assessments.

OUTCOMES FOR THE WHOLE QUALIFICATIONHolders of this qualification are able to:• Teach secondary school subjects of their respective specialisation;• Utilise teaching methods that foster learners’ independent and dependent inquiry and in-depth understanding;• Develop authentic means for assessing learning and to inform their teaching and learners` learning;• Demonstrate a commitment to working ethically and collectively with colleagues to achieve high quality, equitable outcomes for learners and the wider community;• Design curriculum that meets the changing secondary education needs of Namibia with special reference to outcomes-based education;• Promote, coordinate and conduct research into secondary school problems through the prescribed subjects offered at particular levels;• Interpret, systemise and utilise in practice existing knowledge in view of the education task;• Apply various techniques to carry out different roles of a secondary school educator, i.e. as a lifelong learner, facilitator, mediator of learning, curriculum designer, administrator, assessor, agent of change, specialist in the selected subject(s) and a responsible citizen.

266

QUALIFICATION DURATIONThe study period for the qualification is:Fulltime/Part-time / Block release Mode - Minimum: 4 Years; Maximum: 6 Years.The study period comprises of two (2) semesters, per academic year. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

Major CombinationsThe core courses for this qualification are fixed and cannot be exchanged. The qualification is offered five groups of specialisations: Mathematics and science, Languages education, Humanities, Commerce and Information technology. each group of specialisation comprises of two school subjects.no deviation from the prescribed combinations as reflected below will be allowed.

The following are the fields of studies and subject combination:1. Mathematics and Science grouping a. Mathematics and Computer studies b. Mathematics and Agriculture

2. Language Grouping a. english and namibian Languages: CHoose one (otjiherero/oshikwanyama/oshindonga/Rukwangali/silozi/Afrikaans/ Khoekhoegowab,Thimbukushu,Rumanyo,) b. english and Foreign Language: CHoose one (Portuguese/French/German) 3. Humanities Grouping a. Geography and History b. Geography and Development studies4. Commerce Grouping a. Accounting and Mathematics b. Accounting and economics c. Accounting and Business studies d. Accounting and entrepreneurship e. economics and Business studies f. office practice and Business studies g. entrepreneurship and Business studies h. office practice and Accounting 5. Information Technology Grouping a. Computer studies and office Practice

267

COURSES

YEAR 1:educational Foundations Ienglish for teachersTheories of Human DevelopmentLife skills IPhysical educationIt skills for teachersIntegrating educational technology in teaching IGuidance and counsellingAssessment in education

Year Coursesschool subject 1school subject 2Micro teaching

YEAR 2educational Foundations IICurriculum, Planning and Development IResearch Methodology in education ILife skills IIeducational law and PoliciesCritical ThinkingIntegrating educational technology IIYear Coursesschool subject 1school subject 2

268

YeAR 3educational Foundations IIICurriculum planning and Development IIschool Management and LeadershipInclusive and special educationevaluation in educationLife skills IIIFirst AidInclusive educationYear coursesschool subject 1school subject 2school Based studies IIResearch Methodology in educationteaching Methods school subject 1teaching Methods school subject 2

YeAR 4educational Foundations IVProject Management in educationeducation systemsschool subject 1school subject 2educational Research projectschool Based studies III

CREDIT TRANSFER Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content acquired learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. to be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM coursesCourses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning, the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.Courses will be evaluated for their current relevance and may not transfer if the material

269

is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an unaccredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification.Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. no more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

ASSESSMENT AND EVALUATION Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period.

students must score at least 50% in each course modes to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Practical Teaching All students should acquire field experience in the second, Third and Fourth year of study and submit a report. For the:

o second year - this field experience amounts to 40 hours (consecutive 2 weeks) of class observation per year (each level - 8 hours);o Third year - this period of practice teaching amounts to 80 hours (consecutive 4 weeks) per year (Grade 8 and 9 – each 40 hours); and o Fourth year - this period of practice teaching amounts to 240 hours (consecutive 6 weeks) hours per year (Grade 8 and 9 – each 24 hours, and Grade 10 through Grade 12 – 64 hours each). Note: The above is a provisional working formula for practical teaching hours’ distribution. The actual distribution of the hours will vary accordingly to the area(s) of specialisation.

each and every one of these field experiences are examinable and are a requirement for graduation. Assessment is by means of observation of the student, student assessment by staff (both respective school and IUM), and by submission of a portfolio. Furthermore, students will be required to practice teaching in at least one (1) school in the rural setting during the 3 years of practice teaching.

270

Final ExaminationsThe final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally. Supplementary Examinations



TEACHING METHODS/STRATEGIES The teaching and learning processes will take place through lectures, tutorial activities and discussion, school-based activities, collaborative group tasks, practical projects and written assignmentsstudents must have access to a computer and the Internet and other modern technology especially appreciated in the secondary school instruction. The teaching and learning methods adapted for this qualification are student-centred learning methods. emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read and research extensively in each of the courses. each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning. The role of the lecturer, therefore, is to stimulate learning and to support and guide that process. Guided reading materials and research will support these endeavours.The delivery methods for this qualification comprise of the fulltime, part time and block release learning modes. Contact hours for block release mode are face-to- face encounters on a monthly basis and block periods during IUM academic breaks and other public holidays such as easter break.The degree will be offered in collaboration with the other faculties within the university.

ARTICULATION Upon the successful completion of the requirements for an award of the Bachelor of education (secondary) Honours a candidate may be granted admission to a Master of education programme. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Masters programme. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related undergraduate teachers qualifications.

271

Postgraduate Diploma In Education (NQF Level 8)

PURPOSE This qualification is designed for the professionally unqualified and/or underqualified senior primary or secondary school teachers, who earned a qualification in a subject matter, but who do not have qualification in pedagogy and/or other teacher education professional qualification. It is a one-year qualification aimed at providing participants with the requisite pedagogical knowledge and skills to be more effective and competent teachers, lecturers or trainers. The focus of the qualification is to equip participants with good pedagogical practices in the design, delivery and evaluation of curricula. The qualification also aims to equip participants with critical self-reflection in relation to current international trends and challenges in pedagogy. It enables participants to become familiar with the delivery of curricula to a variety of students, through various modes of delivery, in a wide range of contexts.

students will acquire theoretical and practical pedagogical methodologies that can be applied in the art of imparting knowledge and skills (leaching/learning process) in different contexts. This qualification is designed for the professionally unqualified and/or underqualified senior primary or secondary school teachers, who earned a qualification in a subject matter, but who do not have qualification in pedagogy and/or other teacher education professional qualification. With this qualification, these teachers will be professionally qualified to undertake teaching assignments in both the private and public schools. The qualification will equip the teachers with the right tools to fulfil their true potential and to become defining players in the education system.

OUTCOMES FOR THE WHOLE QUALIFICATION


• Apply appropriate pedagogics to their teaching contexts;• Design curricula including learning and teaching methodologies, assessment strategies and evaluation models in accordance with the set standards;• Organise and maintain a learning climate and classroom environment that supports learning and growth.• Integrate and apply appropriate teaching methodology to the subject matter• Demonstrate professional growth, competence, values, reflection and evaluation• Integrate knowledge, experience, and skills across domains and contexts.

QUALIFICATION DURATIONThe study period for the qualification is:Fulltime/Partime/Block Release mode - Minimum: 1 Year; Maximum: 2 Years.The qualification comprises of two (2) semesters, per academic year. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

272

COURSES

Course Titleeducation Theory & PracticeClassroom Management and supervisionenglish ProficiencyGuidance and Counsellingeducational Research ProjectCurriculum Planning and Development in educationteaching Methods school subject Iteaching Methods school subject IIAssessment in educationteaching Practice

CREDIT TRANSFER Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications.

Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.

to be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.

Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning, the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibian Qualification Authority requirements.


Credits earned at an unaccredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification.


Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits

273

required for an IUM qualification. no more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.



ASSESSMENT AND EVALUATION Coursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.



TEACHING METHODS/STRATEGIESCourses will be delivered using blended learning modalities, including lectures, online tutorials, advanced simulations, video and audio conferencing technologies. Learners must have access to a computer and the Internet. The teaching methods adapted for this programme are student-centred learning methods. emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read and research extensively in each of the courses. each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning. The role of the lecturer, therefore, is to stimulate learning and to support and guide that process. Guided reading materials and research will support these endeavours.

274

ARtICULAtIon Vertically, the Postgraduate Diploma in education grants admission to Master of education. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Masters programme. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related teachers qualifications at nQF level 8.

275

Postgraduate Diploma in Higher Education (NQF Level 8)

PURPOSE

The International University of Management (IUM)’s Faculty of educational Administration and Management is committed to the development of human resources in order to address the needs of the education sector in namibia as articulated in the national Human Resources Plan 2010-2025. In this regard, the focus is to contribute to the production of professionally qualified teachers who are able to interpret and implement the curriculum in a holistic way as innovative educators, instructional leaders, planners, counsellors and researchers.

This qualification is designed for tertiary educators to attain good pedagogical practice in the quality delivery of the curriculum. The qualification aims to equip tertiary educators with critical self-reflection in relation to current international trends and challenges in pedagogics. It enables tertiary educators to become familiar with the delivery of curriculum to a variety of students, through various models of delivery, in a wide range of contexts.

Conventionally, the proficiency in one’s own discipline has been the most respected feature of a tertiary educator. In recent years, however, there has been a growing entreaty to improve tertiary educators’ pedagogical thinking and skills as well. As a consequence, training of tertiary educators is becoming a widespread trend in many countries. And it is in this line that the IUM designed this qualification - Postgraduate Diploma in teaching and Learning (Higher education) to encompass instruction in all educational disciplines; helping tertiary educators to build confidence in a teaching environment.

It is the IUM’s belief that this qualification on pedagogical training will have an effect on scales measuring conceptual change/student-focused approach and self-efficacy beliefs in tertiary education for this qualification will provide the requisite pedagogical knowledge and skills needed for value results.

Vertically, the Postgraduate Diploma in teaching and Learning (Higher education) grants admission to Master of education. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Master qualification. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related teachers qualifications at nQF level 8

OUTCOMES FOR THE WHOLE QUALIFICATION

Holders of this qualification are able to:• Design and implement instructional practices to produce a positive impact on teaching and learning.

276

• Demonstrate an understanding of the process of educational change and how to communicate effectively to stakeholders.• Analyse the educational needs of the students.• Create innovative strategies and incorporate technology in tertiary education.• Demonstrate deep and thorough conceptual understanding of identified aspects of the subject matter.

QUALIFICATION DURATION

The study period for the qualification is:Full time/Part time/Block Release mode - Minimum: 1 Year; Maximum: 2 Years.The qualification comprises of tWo (2) semesters, per academic year.. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

COURSES

Course titleteaching and Learning in Higher educationCurriculum Planning, Development and AssessmentAssessment in Higher educationDesign and implement e- Learning in Higher educationResearch supervision In Higher educationeducational ManagementGeneral teaching Methodology

CREDIT TRANSFER Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.to be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning, the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an unaccredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification.

277

Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. no more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is for any reason deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

ASSESSMENT AND EVALUATION Coursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.




TEACHING METHODS/STRATEGIESCourses will be delivered using blended learning modalities, including lectures, online tutorials, advanced simulations, video and audio conferencing technologies. Learners must have access to a computer and the Internet. The teaching methods adapted for this programme are student-centred learning methods. emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read and research extensively in each of the courses. each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own

278

learning. The role of the lecturer, therefore, is to stimulate learning and to support and guide that process. Guided reading materials and research will support these endeavours.

ARtICULAtIon Vertically, the Postgraduate Diploma in teaching and Learning (Higher education) grants admission to Master of education. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Masters programme. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related teachers qualifications at nQF level 8.

279

Bachelor in Education : Educational Leadership, Management and Policy Honours Degree

This two-year programme is for candidates who already have level 7 or 6 (nQA or equivalent) qualification with experience of at least three years in education or in a related organization as determined by senate.The programme will be offered part-time and by distance learning.

PurposeThe purpose of this qualification is to impart knowledge and skills in leadership, management, and policy to students with a view to enabling them to interpret texts, work with conflict, diagnose group dynamics, and improvise with competence. The students will, in addition, by means of the questions they ask, be able to enhance the ability of their societies and education systems to face various challenges and thrive as a result. This qualification is valuable because it addresses the pressing need for education leadership in differing institutions and contexts.

Programme OutcomesHolders of this qualification will be able to:. synthesise information on educational Management and Leadership and integrate theory and practice. devise a comprehensive range of learning resources to demonstrate independence, reflective learning, and Continuing Professional Development. critically evaluate current thinking and research in educational management and leadership and apply it to the school system. initiate and effect change in the area of education management

Year 3 (70 Credits)• LME0D3 - Leadership and Management Theories and Practices in Education• PRM0D3 - Project Management• ERM0D3 - Educational Research Methodology• LEI0D3 - Legal and Ethical issues in Education• FOM0D3 - Financial and Operational Management• CDS0D3 -Computer Modelling for Decision Support

Choose one from the following:• OSH0D3 - Occupational Safety and Health Management• ILC0D3 - Instructional Leadership and Curriculum Management• EMM0D3 - Education and the Mass Media

280

Year 4 (120 Credits). sts0D3 - systems Thinking and strategic Management• CMD0D3 - Change Management and Organisational Development in Education• PPG0D3 - Principles and Practices of Good Governance• LCD0D4 - Leading Change in the Digital Age• MIO0D4 - Managing Innovation in Organisations• XEL0D4 - Case Study: Educational Leadership, Management and Policy

Choose one from the following:• EPP0D4 - Education Policy and Planning• LME0D4 - Leading and Managing People in Education• LEC0D4 - Leading for Educational Change in Organisational Settings

281

CENTRE FOR IMPROVED INSTITUTIONAL PERFORMANCE

(CIIP)

282

The Centre for Institutional Improvement and Performance (CIIP)

About the CentreThe mission of the Centre for Improved Institutional Performance (CIIP) is to be a source or base for the improvement of institutional management performance. Underpinning this mission is the recognition of the need to improve professional management performance at all levels in the private and public sectors.

PracticeIn pursuing this ideal and driven by good governance and integrity, the Centre will not only hone individual, group, and institutional by means of Career Development Programmes, consultancies, and commercial research, but will also significantly improve communication and bridge gaps between academics and managers of public and private sectors.

In addition, the Centre will run short courses/programmes and/or internships in the principles and practice of management for graduates intending to enter the public and private sectors.

At IUM itself, the Centre will diligently run sessions/programmes for the Continuing Professional Development of its own academic, administrative and managerial staff throughout the year.

Functions of the Centre

The functions of the Centre are, inter alia, to:

• Deliver Executive Development Training Programmes• Deliver Continuing Professional Development (CPD) to IUM staff• Offer consultancy services in the improvement of organisational performance to industry, commerce and the private sector• Offer Commercial Research Services to both public and private organisations.• Offer non-accredited short courses

SHORT COURSEs

Missionto be a source for the improvement of institutional management performance, at all levels in the private and public sectors.

Deliverytraditional short courses as well as soft skills training on site for the public and private sectors.

283

IUM Staff TrainingThe centre will deliver regular IUM staff training so as to ensure that IUM can deliver to its customers only the best service.

Certificationto be awarded an IUM [International University of Management, CIIP [short Course] certification, the participant must attain a pass mark of 50%

Courses Presenteda) Administrative Short Courses:Certificate: secretarial & office AdministrationDiploma: office Administrationexecutive Diploma: office Administration

b)Finance Short Courses:Certificate: BookkeepingDiploma: Bookkeeping

c) Computer Studies Short Courses:Certificate: BaseCertificate: standardCertificate: expert

d) Management Short Courses:Certificate: Managers Development Course [1,2 &3]Certificate: supervisory skills

e) Preparatory CourseCertificate: Preparing students to enter IUM academic realm

f) Soft Skill Workshops:Certificate of attendance: Ad-hoc

284

CERTIFICATE: Secretarial and Office Administration

About this course A qualified and competent secretary is central to the smooth running of any business, ensuring that day to day activities happen in the most efficient manner. As a secretary you will require excellent skills in It, organisation, good composure, flexibility, plus strong interpersonal and communication abilities – all of which you will get from this course.

What you will learnThis course is designed to develop your keyboard skills, teach you how to master the most common business software packages, and give you excellent communication techniques which enable you to understand the language of business.

Who should attend?Anyone needing the essential skills to be highly regarded, working under pressure and prioritising workloads which allow executives and managers to work more effectively. Durationone semester [This period includes all activities that will take place, including holidays, class and examination.]

Entry CriteriaGrade 10

Cost: Application & Registration fee - as per registration requirement. Course fee –n$ 6 000All fees must be paid 4 weeks before the final exams

285

Programme Modules Duration & Assessments

Cost excl. App & Reg

Certificate: secretarial and office Admin-istrationsCsoA

Keyboard and Basic typing KBt0sC

1 week in class1 week self study1 day exam

n$ 6000.00

IUM Computer studies: Base Profile - Word Processing IWP0sCIUM Computer studies: Base Profile - spread sheets IsP0sCIUM Computer studies: Base Profile - online essentials Ioe0sCIUM Computer studies: Base Pro-file - Computer essentials ICe0sC office Administration 1 oA10sCBasic numeracy Bn0sCenglish Language Basics eLB0sC

286DIPLOMA: Office Administration

About this courseWith this course you will improve on the high quality, office skills training learnt in the Certificate in secretarial and office Administration course and you will also learn how to speak the language of business.

What you will learnYou will learn how to master in-demand software packages for presentations, project planning and databases, as well as excellent computer keyboard skills and creating complex business documentation.

Who should attend?Anyone who has completed the Certificate: secretarial and office Administration. Durationone semester [This period includes all activities that will take place, including holidays, class and examination.]

Entry CriteriaCertificate: secretarial and office Administration or 5 years work experience.

Cost: Application & Registration fee - as per registration requirement. Course fee –n$ 8 500All fees must be paid 4 weeks before the final exams



Diploma: office Admin-istrationsCDoA

Advanced typing & speed Devel-opment tsD0sC

semester-long.[see note above]

Admissions in semester 1 and semester 2

2 x CA1 x exam May & november

n$ 8,500.00

IUM Computer studies: standard Profile Presentation IPt0sCIUM Computer studies: standard Profile Using Databases IUD0sCIUM Computer studies: standard Profile It security IseosCoffice Administration 2 oA20sC Business Communication BC0sC Introduction to Bookkeeping IBK0sCBusiness ethics – Be0sCwith reference to CV & Interviews CV1osC

287EXECUTIVE DIPLOMA: Office Management

About this courseThis course is the ideal stepping-stone for anyone seeking a promotion or job upgrade in an office or small business environment.

What you will learnYou will learn to make sure that the office runs smoothly - which includes keeping supplies in stock, making sure administrative and office staff are doing their jobs, working with vendors, planning events, making sure the facilities are clean, orderly, and safe, and analysing supply and energy consumption to determine cost-saving and efficiency savings.

Who should attend?This course is designed for people whose job involves organizing, planning and overseeing a large pool of administrative assistants, or working with one or two people in a smaller office. DurationTwo separate semesters [This period includes all activities that will take place, including holidays, class and examination.]

Entry Criteria – Diploma office Administration plus/or 6 years work experience.Cost: Application & Registration fee - as per registration requirement. Course fee –n$ 11 000All payments must be completed 4 weeks before entry to final exams)

288



executive Di-ploma: office ManagementsCeDoM

Understanding Business organisa-tions UBo0sC

one academic yearAdmissions in January

The modules will be spread over the year. some will be finalised the first semester while other will run the whole year.

2 x CA sem 12x CA sem 2

1 x exam May & november

n$ 11,000.00

Principles of team Leading PtL0sC Principles of Accounting PoA0sC Principles of Marketing Theory PMt0sC Principles of Customer Relation-ships PCR0sC Business Writing and Report Writ-ing BWR0sC Manage Personal Performance and Development PPD0sC IUM Computer studies: Advanced Word Processing IAW0sC

IUM Computer studies: Advanced spread sheets IAs0sC

IUM Computer studies: Advanced Presentation IAP0sC

289

CERTIFICATE: BookkeepingAbout this courseThe purpose of this course is to give students with no prior knowledge of bookkeeping a foundation in the fundamentals of bookkeeping.

What you will learn? You will learn these main functions:• Basic English and Numeracy for a better understanding of Bookkeeping terms and calculations.• The ability to maintain up-to-date record keeping of financial transactions.• Correct accounting books i.e. Ledger• Double entry bookkeeping and notes.• Introduction to financial statements.• Basic Word Processing.

Who should attend? This qualification is designed for people who wish to start a career in bookkeeping or as a financial clerk Durationone semester [This period includes all activities that will take place, including holi-days, class and examination.]

Cost: Application & Registration fee - as per registration requirement. Course fee –n$ 6 200

Final Payment must be paid 4 weeks before the final exams

290

Programme Subject Duration & Assessments


Certificate in BookkeepingsCCBK

Introduction Bookkeeping IB-KosC

semester-long

Admissions in semester 1 and

semester 2


n$ 6, 200

IUM Computer studies: Base Profile - Word Processing IWP0sCIUM Computer studies: Base Profile - spread sheets IsP0sCIUM Computer studies: Base Profile - online essentials Ioe0sCIUM Computer studies: Base Profile - Computer essentials ICe0sC english Language Basics eLB0sCBasic numeracy Bn0sC

291

DIPLoMA: Bookkeeping

About this courseThe purpose of this course is to give students essential skills in, and knowledge of, double-entry bookkeeping.

What you will learnYou will learn these main functions:• Books of original entries.• The ability to maintain up-to-date records of all financial transactions in an• Appropriate format using accounting record books (the ledgers).• Double entry book-keeping.• Introduction to financial statements.

Who should attend? This qualification is designed for people who are already in the role, and for those who are aspiring to a role where they are responsible for the detailed recording of all the financial transactions of a business, maintaining these records using books of orig-inal entry and double-entry bookkeeping and for ensuring that all monetary transac-tions made by the business are recorded accurately. Duration: one semester [This period includes all activities that will take place, including holi-days, class and examination.]

Entry Criteria:Min of one year’s previous experience in a finance related role


Programme Subject Duration & Assessments


Diploma: BookkeepingsCCBK

Bookkeeping ACB1sC semester-long.


semester 2


n$ 9 000.00Computerised Accounting PAs0sCIUM Computer studies: Advanced spread sheets IAs0sCIntroduction to Financial state-ments

292

IUM: Computer Studies

About this courseIUM Computer studies programmes are based on the world’s leading computer skills certification. It is a high-quality, internally-recognized certification designed, validated, and approved by IUM.

What you will learnIUM Computer studies programmes offer a wide range of modules including Computer essentials, Word Processing and It security. Candidates take tests in the modules which are most relevant to their educational and professional requirements.

Who should attend?IUM Computer studies programmes are for anyone who wishes to become fully competent in the use of a computer and common applications. IUM Computer Literacy skills enable people of all ages to understand and use technology to improve their personal and professional lives. IUM Computer Literacy modules provide a practical programme of up-to-date skills and knowledge areas which are validated by a test. Durationone semester [This period includes all activities that will take place, including holidays, class and examination.] Entry Criteria: NoneCost: Application & Registration fee - as per registration requirement plus course fee.

293

Programme Modules Duration &

Assessments

Cost excl.

App & Reg

IUM Computer studies: Base Profile

SICDLB

Computer essentials - ICe0sConline essentials - Ioe0sCWord Processing - IWP0sCspread sheets - IsP0sC

semester-long. Admissions in semester 1 and

semester 2Final external

exam only May and november

n$ 4,800.00

IUM Computer studies: standard

ProfileSICDLS

Presentation - IPt0sCUsing Databases - IUD0sCIt security - Ise0sC

semester-long. Admissions in semester 1 and

semester 2

Final external exam only May and

november

n$ 5,500.00

IUM Computer studies: expert

ProfileSICDLE

3 out of 4 Advanced Modules:Advanced Word Processing - IAW0sCAdvanced spread sheets - IAs0sCAdvanced Databases - IAD0sCAdvanced Presentation - IAP0sC

semester-long.


semester 2Final external

exam only May and november

n$ 6,600.00

294

MDP: Management Development Programme [Only in Windhoek]

About this courseThis course offers the skills you need to evaluate information and address business challenges. You learn fundamental business concepts and proven management analysis tools typically needed on a daily basis to guide your analysis, planning, decision and implementation

What you will learn Leverage organisational structures, operations and systems to achieve business objectives; Apply finance and accounting techniques to support decision-making; Formulate a comprehensive marketing plan; Integrate business practices to optimise organisational effectiveness; Develop strategies that create on-going competitive advantage.

Who should attend?Managers at all levels, business analysts, It professionals and anyone who wants a fast-track course to improve their business knowledge and decision-making, or needs to better interact with marketing, sales, finance or operations staff. Duration: See table below

Entry CriteriaMinimum of 3 years in a fully-appointed supervisory role & one programme leads to the next.

Application & Registration fee - as per registration requirement plus course fee.

295

Module Subject Duration & Assess-ments


new new Managers: MDP Pro-grammesCnMDP

Leadership skills required of a new manager Lsn0sC

Windhoek only.Course is made of : ‘contact’ sessions with tutors; self-study; Research and “Formal’ class room work

total time – 200 hours. semester-long.

evaluation – Group work, Individual & examinations.

n$ 8,500.00

Goal setting and planning management GsP0sCtime management and communication tMC0sCBusiness Writing skills & Report Writing BWR0sCPrinciples of Marketing Theo-ry PMt0sC

senior Managers: MDP Pro-grammesCsMDP

Building effective interperson-al interactions BeI0sC

Windhoek only.

Course is made of : ‘contact’ sessions with tutors; self-study; Research and “Formal’ class room work


evaluation – Group work, Individual & examinations.

n$ 10,500.00

on boarding & Hiring for success oHs0sC PWP0sC - Developing personal and work group improvement plansDeveloping High Performance teams DHP0sC Managing Diversity and Inclusion MDI0sC Professional supervision & Delegation PsD0sC

Professional Performance Reviews PPR0sC

296

Managing Disciplinary and Grievances effectively MDG0sC

executive Managers: MDPsCeMDP

Finance for non-Financial Managers FnF0sC

Windhoek only.

Course is made of : ‘contact’ sessions with tutors; self-study; Research and “Formal’ class room work


evaluation – Group work, Individual & examinations

n$ 12,500.00

Introduction to Corporate Finance ICF0sC Budgets & Money BM0sC GAP Analysis for strategy Formulation GAs0sC Introduction to Business eco-nomics IBe0sC Introduction to Business sta-tistics IBs0sC

297

PREPARATORY COURSE

About this courseThe Preparatory Course is a qualification which prepares students for study at university.

What you will learnThe Preparatory Course provides a good foundation in the knowledge and skills required for studying at university level, so that students are confident and well prepared when they go on to higher education

Who should attend?students who do not meet the minimum entry point for academic courses.

Duration: Preparatory runs from end of February to end of october with examinations with Academic classes. [This period includes all activities that will take place, including holidays, class and examination.] Entry Criteria18 or 19 points at Grade 12


298



PreparatoryPReP

IUM Computer studies: Base Profile SICDLB

February - september

n$12 000.00

Basic Arithmetic skills PREBASenglish for Academic Purposes PREEAP• Essay Writing• Note-taking and note-making• Speaking and Listening Skills• Reading and Comprehension of Academic texts• Writing Standard Academic english

examination skills: Preparing for and succeeding in an examination PREEXSUsing the Internet for Researching Information PREIRICritical Thinking and Reasoning PRECTRIntroduction to Management PREIM• Personal Organisation • Time Management

299

Certificate In Professional Web Design

About this courseThis course will provide you the software skills, design knowledge, and professional portfolio needed to effectively compete in this exciting and dynamic field.

What you will learnYou will learn fundamentals of visual design, Adobe Photoshop and Dreamweaver, and learn standards-based Web coding in HtML, Css, and Javascript. Your Web design portfolio at the end of the programme will include published Web sites that showcase your front-end visual designs and your coding skills

Who should attend?This course is ideal if you have always wanted to create your own website but lacked the skills or knowledge to do so. Aimed at both the novice and intermediate web-designer, this comprehensive, easy-to-understand course will enhance your understanding of web development tools and techniques.

Durationone semester [This period includes all activities that will take place, including holidays, class and examination.]

Entry CriteriaBasic It skills are essential




Certificate in Professional Web DesignsCCPWD

HTML Authoring HTM0SC semester-long.


semester 2


n$ 4, 500.00JavaScript JS0SC Dreamweaver DW0sC CSS CSS0SCProject XP0SC

300

soFt sKILLs: skill Workshops on site - Public and Corporate

Subjectssoft skill subjects will be listed as demand and requirements set.

CostingCost of the workshop will be calculated on quotation

Durationeach workshop will differ in time i.e. one day to max 4

english Language Upgrade Course

About this course: This intensive course will prepare those who have not scored a pass in english at grade 12 for the demands of writing University level reports and essays.

What you will learn: Advanced english for Academic Purposes

Who should attend: Anyone who has scored e in Grade 12 english.

Duration: one semester

Entry Criteria: none

Tuition Fee: N$ 2,400.00

Programme Cost Durationenglish Upgrade Course SENGL n$ 2,400.00 1 semester

301

Foreign/Second Language Courses

About this course: each of these courses gives an introduction to the language.

What you will learn: each course is designed to give you basic written and spoken skills in the language course of your choice.

Who should attend: Anyone interested in learning english, French or German as a second language.

Duration: February to end October

Entry Criteria: none

Cost: see table Below

Programme Cost DurationFrench sFRen n$ 2,000.00

Application (N$100.00) + Registration (N$600.00)

1 year

German sGeRM n$ 2,000.00Application (N$100.00) + Registration (N$600.00)

1 year

english - Foreign/second Language senGB

n$ 3,300.00Application (N$100.00) + Registration (N$600.00)

1 year

303

DISTANCE AND E-LEARNING CENTRE

304

DISTANCE AND E-LEARNING CENTRE

IUM launched its Distance and open Learning programme several years ago. This gave opportunity to persons who, for various reasons, could not access full-time or part-time university programmes opportunity to enroll in all the programmes the university offered on full-time and part-time modes at all levels : Certificate to Bachelor Honours degree levels..

IUM outsourced the administrative aspects of this service to the Institute of open Learning (IoL). But the university produced study manuals and tutorial letters. It also set and marked assignments and examinations. This arrangement is ceasing soon and the university is getting ready to develop its own Distance and e-Learning Centre and Distance Learning Materials.

IUM was admitted to the membership of the Distance education Association of southern Africa (DeAsA) in 2012.

305

SCHOOL OF POSTGRADUATE STUDIES

306

IntroductionThe International University of Management school of Postgraduate studies is designed to facilitate a sustainable transition for an aspiring candidate from acquiring knowledge towards an advanced stage of its creation and application beyond the curriculum. Through various academic programmes, the Postgraduate school aims at establishing a holistic nature and legitimacy of a research culture, to motivate candidates to cultivate ability for intercultural and transnational communication, in scientific, economic, business, social and political spheres.

Programmes

The school of Postgraduate studies currently offers studies leading to the following awards:

Master of Business Administration (Marketing)Master of Business Administration (Finance)Master of Business Administration (Management)Master of Business Administration (Human Resources)Master in HIV/AIDS ManagementMaster of Education – Educational Leadership, Management and Policy EducationMaster of Science in Information TechnologyMaster of Science in Tourism and Hospitality ManagementMaster in International Relations Diplomacy and ManagementMaster in Public Policy and ManagementPhD in Business AdministrationPhD in Information and Communication TechnologyPhD in EducationPhD in Tourism and Hospitality

307

Master of Business Administration (NQF Level 9)Details common to all MBA specialisms

PurposeThe purpose of the Master of Business Administration degree (in Marketing, Finance, Management, Human Resources, and related areas) is to provide skills for aspiring senior managers and to further develop managerial skills of men and women already holding positions of authority and influence in organisations who wish to grow up or climb up the organizational ladder. The programme especially sharpens managers’ capacities in research, interpretation, decision making, design, implementation, and monitoring and evaluation. The curriculum of the programme integrates skills and competencies of statistics, computer technology, research, and project planning and management. Through case analysis and fusion of work experiences, captains of industry and commerce are taken deeper into the theories and concepts learnt earlier in their academic pursuits. The MBA programme will be offered on a part-time basis.

Programme OutcomesHolders of this qualification will be able to:

. Demonstrate mastery of principles, concepts, knowledge and skills/talents of efficient and effective organizational management.. engage in rigorous intellectual analysis, interpretation, criticism and problem-solving demonstrating analytical thinking skills and innovativeness on given case problems and problems on the ground.. Research, analyse and argue factually from situational evidence and recommend appropriate strategic courses of action.. exercise morality and ethical behaviour in managing risks and ensuring effective corporate governance.. Marshall resources efficiently and ethically in a manner that ensures attainability of the organisation’s primary objective.

Qualification RequirementsThe MBA degree will be awarded to candidates with a minimum of 255 credits made up of 299 credits from the compulsory modules/courses and 26 credits from two electives.

Special Programme Regulations

SPReg 1: Credit Recognition and Transfer ArrangementsHolders of academic qualifications from other bona fide educational institutions may be granted exemptions on the subjects taken and passed. The subjects must have been sat for and passed in one sitting and the qualification must have been obtained within a period of five years. In addition, the subjects for which exemption is sought must

308

have been studied and the qualification obtained at an nQA accredited institution or equivalent. Credits from other universities and/or institutions may be awarded up to 50% of total credits for the qualification at IUM.

SPReg 2: AssessmentBoth formative and summative assessment techniques are used. summative assessment will consist of examinations, Papers, Projects, Presentations, and Portfolios.

Assessment shall consist of two components: Continuous Assessment (CA) : 40% of the final grade. Formal examinations (Fe) : 60% of the final mark.

SPReg 3: ElectivesIn addition to the compulsory courses/modules, MBA students shall also successfully complete two electives/options.

309

Master Of Business Administration (Marketing) (NQF Level 9)

• OMS0M5 - Operations Management & Information Systems Strategy• CGS0M5 - Corporate Governance & Social Responsibility• STS0M5 - Strategic Management & Systems Thinking• LCM0M5 - Leadership & Change Management• BRI0M5 - Business Risk & Intelligence for Management• CFM0M5 - Contemporary Managerial Finance• AQDM05 - Applied Quantitative Decision-Making Techniques• RME0M5 - Research Methodology• CAN0M5 - Case Analysis• XMB0M6 - Dissertation• SMP0M5 - Strategic Marketing Management & Action Planning• MED0M5 - Managerial Economics & Decision-Making• IMS0M6 - International Marketing & Strategies• MKR0M6 - Market Research• INM0M6 - Innovative Marketing Techniques

electives:• PDI0M6 - Product Development & Innovativeness• BMA0M6 - Brand Management

Master Of Business Administration (Finance) ( NQF Level 9)

• OMS0M5 - Operations Management & Information Systems Strategy• CGS0M5 - Corporate Governance & Social Responsibility• STS0M5 - Strategic Management & Systems Thinking• LCM0M5 - Leadership & Change Management• BRI0M5 - Business Risk & Intelligence for Management• CFM0M5 - Contemporary Managerial Finance• AQDM05 - Applied Quantitative Decision-Making Techniques• RME0M5 - Research Methodology• CAN0M5 - Case Analysis• XMB0M6 - Dissertation• SMP0M5 - Strategic Marketing Management & Action Planning• MED0M5 - Managerial Economics & Decision-Making• FSD0M6 - Financial Strategies and Decision-Making• PEM0M6 - Performance Evaluation Management• IFM0M6 - International Finance Managementelectives:• FRA0M6 - Financial Reporting and Analysis• FUF0M6 - Fundamentals of Financial Risk Management

310

Master of Business Administration (Management) (NQF Level 9)

• OMS0M5 - Operations Management & Information Systems Strategy• CGS0M5 - Corporate Governance & Social Responsibility• STS0M5 - Strategic Management & Systems Thinking• LCM0M5 - Leadership & Change Management• BRI0M5 - Business Risk & Intelligence for Management• CFM0M5 - Contemporary Managerial Finance• AQDM05 - Applied Quantitative Decision-Making Techniques• RME0M5 - Research Methodology• CAN0M5 - Case Analysis• XMB0M6 - Dissertation• SMP0M5 - Strategic Marketing Management & Action Planning• MED0M5 - Managerial Economics & Decision-Making• ODC0M6 - Organisational Development & Change Management• ESB0M6 - Entrepreneurship & New and Small Business Management• GMK0M6 - Competing in the Global Marketplace (International Business)Electives:• BLS0M6 - Business Logistics & Supply Chain Management• PCC0M6 - Public Relations & Corporate Communications

Master of Business Administration (Human Resources) ( NQF Level 9)

• OMS0M5 - Operations Management & Information Systems Strategy• CGS0M5 - Corporate Governance & Social Responsibility• STS0M5 - Strategic Management & Systems Thinking• LCM0M5 - Leadership & Change Management• BRI0M5 - Business Risk & Intelligence for Management• CFM0M5 - Contemporary Managerial Finance• AQDM05 - Applied Quantitative Decision-Making Techniques• RME0M5 - Research Methodology• CAN0M5 - Case Analysis• MB0M6 - Dissertation• SMP0M5 - Strategic Marketing Management & Action Planning• MED0M5 - Managerial Economics & Decision-Making• SRM0M6 - Strategic Thinking in Human Resources Management• SRD0M6 - Strategic Human Resources Development• LLA0M6 - Labour LawElectives:• GLE0M6 - Global Labour & Employment Law• LUW0M6 - Labour Unions, Workers’ Rights and Democracy

311

Masters of Business Administration (MBA - 257 NQF credits)

12 Core Courses (130 credits) Creditsstrategic operations Management 10Corporate Governance & social Responsibility 10Contemporary Managerial Finance 10strategic Marketing Management and Action Planning 10Leadership and Change Management 12Research Methodology 12Applied Quantitative Decision Making techniques 10strategic Management and systems Thinking 12Managerial economics & Decision Making 12entrepreneurship & new and small Business Management 12Project, Programme and Portfolio Management 10Information systems strategy 10

Compulsory 48 Credits (4 courses per Specialization)Management Human Resource

ManagementMarketing Finance Credits

Business Risk & Intelligence of Man-agement

Strategic Thinking in HRM

International Marketing strategies

Financial strategies

& Decision Making

12

Advanced Business ethics

strategic HRD Marketing Research

Performance evaluation

Management

12

Competing in the Global market Place (International Business

Personal Growth and Interpersonal effective-

ness

Product De-velopment & Innovation

International Finance Man-

agement

12

strategic sustain-ability Management

organizational Devel-opment & Change

Management

Integrated Marketing

Communica-tions

Fundamental of Financial

Risk Manage-ment

12

Electives 13 credits (Choose 1 course per Specialization)

312

Business Logistics & supply Chain Management

Global Labour & em-ployment Law

services Marketing

Financial Reporting &

Analysis

13

Management of technology and Innovation

Compensation & Benefits

Brand man-agement

Auditing and Assurance

13

Dissertation/Thesis (64 Credits) 64Required Credits 255Credits Available 438

313

Master in HIV and AIDS Management ( NQF level 9)

Purpose

The Masters degree in HIV/AIDs Management is a guided research programme whose purpose is to make a strong, relevant, contextual and practical response to the HIV/AIDs epidemic. The programme focuses on research, design, action planning, development, implementation, and monitoring and evaluation of efforts against the epidemic. The programme also enhances the need to find a sustainable solution to the devastating epidemic. In addition, the programme is designed to develop and improve managerial skills of men and women holding supervisory positions in institutions involved in efforts aimed at mitigating the HIV/AIDs menace.

Programme outcomes

Holders of this qualification will be able to:

. Investigate HIV/AIDs cases (that is, measure, record, present, and analyse real life problems in their local environment).. Plan, budget, design, and execute research on HIV/AIDs (that is, use a variety of resources in the community to find information and to capture data, and apply knowledge and skills acquired during their studies).. organise, present, and interpret data from investigations for the benefit of society.. Design, develop and implement feasible programmes and projects for combating the HIV/AIDs epidemic.

RequirementsThe Masters degree in HIV/AIDs will be awarded to candidates credited with a minimum of 240 credits made up of 4 compulsory courses (40 nQF Credits) and a 200- nQF Credit Research Project/Dissertation of between 20,000 to 25,000 words.

Qualification Requirements in Brief

Course code - title Level CreditsssR0M5 - social science Research Methodology 9 10eHs0M5 - essentials of HIV/AIDs science 9 10PMH0M5 - Project Management for HIV/AIDs Management 9 10IsM0M5 - Information systems Management 9 10XMH0M6 - Research Project/Dissertation 9 200

314

Special Programme Regulations

SPR1 : Admission

SPR 1.1 : to be admitted to the Masters degree programme in HIV/AIDs, a candidate must normally have at least successfully completed a bachelors degree or a postgraduate diploma in HIV/AIDs Management with an average of at least 65% or a lower second class IUM degree or equivalent from a recognised university or institution of Higher Learning and a minimum of 3 years work experience in an HIV/AIDs related field.

SPR 1.2 : Candidates may also be admitted through a flexible learning experience approved by senate.

SPR 2 : Credit Recognition and Transfer Arrangementsstudents from other accredited institutions may be awarded exemptions in respect of related courses passed and qualifications obtained within a period of 5 years. Credits from other universities and/or institutions may be awarded up to 50% of total credits for the qualification at IUM.

SPR 3 : Attendancestudents are expected to:. attend and pass all the four (4) courses prior to the commencement of the dissertation /project proposal. submit a dissertation/project proposal within the first year of study. complete the programme within a maximum period of four(4) years

SPR 4 : AssessmentThe assessment of the four courses comprises of two components, namely: . Continuous Assessment (CA) shall be 50% of the overall assessment of a course.. Formal examinations (Fe) shall account for 50% of the overall assessment of the course.to pass a course, a candidate must obtain a composite mark of 50%.

NB : All work submitted by students shall be examined and moderated internally and externally.

315

Master of Education – Educational Leadership, Management And Policy Education

(NQF Level 9)

Purpose Of The QualificationThe purpose of this qualification is to train professionals who are seeking to broaden their knowledge in the field of educational Leadership in order to manage public and private organisations. This qualification can be used to secure management cadre leadership positions within a variety of professional settings such as hospitals, government, private and community organisations. The Master of education – educational Leadership, Management and Policy programme is solidly anchored on the following:

o A work-based practical approach to facilitate integration of work-based learning and experience with theories of leadership and managemento Reflective practice including use of an electronic portfolio to facilitate self-assessment of practical leadership and management skillso A constructivist approach to knowledge and learning that emphasises integration of skills, attitudes, knowledge and experience across courses, and collaboration within a community of learnersThis qualification targets professionals such as school principals, vice principals, senior teachers, subject teachers, deans, department heads, team leaders and other educational professionals in public and private sectors. Candidates should have a minimum of two years of working experience in an educational institution; and must have been employed in – public and private education institutions.Additional qualifications and work experience may be required from all candidates.This qualification grants admission to a Doctor of Philosophy, educational Leadership, Management and Policy programme or any other related PhD qualifications or any qualification at nQF Level 10.

Outcomes for the whole Qualification Holders of this qualification are able to:

• Demonstrate evidence of advanced knowledge about a specialist field and demonstrate mastery of sophisticated theoretical subject matter;• Evaluate critically the findings and discussions in the literature, research, analyse and argue from evidence;• Demonstrate ability to work independently and apply knowledge to new situations; and engage in rigorous intellectual analysis, criticism and problem-solving;• Analyse effectively Education Management and Leadership role and critically evaluate the current thinking its application to the school system;• Demonstrate in-depth knowledge and systematic understanding of Education Management and Leadership; • Apply initiative, adaptability and professional responsibility in the workplace and rest of the school system;

316

• Originate the necessary skills required for lifelong independent and devise a comprehensive range of learning resources and reflective learning (self-evaluation and problem solving); and• Demonstrate the skills to manipulate complex data from a variety of sources, and use It effectively in the analysis of the data to inform managerial and professional decisions.

Admission Requirementsto be registered for the Master in education – educational Leadership and Management programme, the candidate must have a Bachelor Honours Degree in education or an equivalent. In keeping with the work-based approach to this qualification, new entrants:o Must have a minimum of two years of working experience in an educational institution; ando Must have been employed in an educational institution – public or private, the Ministry of education. Proof of employment is required.The above are essential requirements as the instructional design of the qualification and course assessments will be integrated with the work place experience and the equivalent will be determined by the IUM senate.

Qualification DurationThe Master in education – educational Leadership and Management is a two-year full time postgraduate study programme leading to nQF Level 9 qualificationThe study period for the qualification is:Full time mode - Minimum: 2 Years Maximum: 4 Years.Contact hours will only be given over weekends and some of the public holidays.The qualification comprises of a minimum of four (4) semesters, i.e. two (2) semesters per academic year. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

CoURsesCourse titleorganisational Behaviour in teaching & LearningLeadership in educationethics in educational Leadership and PracticesInstructional supervision for educational LeadersLeading and Managing Human Relations in educationLaw and Policy in educationResearch Methodologyeducational statisticsDigital-Age Leadership to enhance teaching and LearningThesis

317

Credit Transfer

Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications.

Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.


Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.

Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning, the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.


Credits earned at an unaccredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification.



The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.

The IUM reserves the right to disallow transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

318

Assessment And Evaluation Assessment

Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. students must score at least 50% in each course/coursework to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

(a) Final Examinations


(b) Supplementary Examinations


(c) Dissertation Writing

taken in the last year of study, dissertation writing is meant to engage students in research with a faculty member designated by student and approved by the Postgraduate school in order to generate the research necessary to complete their Masters degree.

each student must complete a 20 000 – 25 000 word dissertation. This project should involve original research on a topic related to the studied field. The dissertation will have a clearly defined problem statement, a review of the existing literature on the chosen topic, original evidence offered to support the dissertation, consideration of alternative rival hypothesis, and a conclusion with recommendations.Upon completion of the research, the results are to be presented for oral defence before an examination panel. The students shall score a minimum of 50% in order to pass the dissertation.

319

Teaching Methods/StrategiesCourses will be delivered using blended learning modalities, including lectures, online tutorials, advanced simulations, video and audio conferencing technologies. Learners must have access to a computer and the Internet. The teaching methods adapted for this programme are student-centred learning methods. emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read and research extensively in each of the courses. each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning. The role of the lecturer, therefore, is to stimulate learning and to support and guide that process. Guided reading materials and research will support these endeavours.

Articulation

The Master of education – educational Leadership, Management and Policy qualification grants admission to a Doctor of Philosophy in education or any other related PhD qualifications or any qualification at nQF Level 10.

320

Master of Science in Information Technology (NQF Level 9)


• Rationale

The shortage of It and computing technical skills in namibia is often commented on. equally, the acute shortage of It related management skills receives less attention. Yet It related management skills are just as critical for national development.

• Purpose

The Master of science in Information technology is designed for people working in information computer technology appointments who wish to pursue information computer technology to a higher level. It seeks to empower those in the ICt related fields with management oriented skills within a technical environment.The development of the Master of science in Information technology is in response to the Government of the Republic of namibia`s economic blue print, Vision 2030. Vision 2030 envisages a knowledge based namibian economy revolving on digital information communication technology.

• Admission Requirements

to be registered for the Master of science in Information technology, the candidate must have a Bachelor Honours Degree in Information technology or an equivalent. In keeping with the work-based approach to this programme, new entrants:• Must have a minimum of two years of working experience in an Information Technology sector; and• Must have been employed in an Information Technology sector. Proof of employment is required.

The above are essential requirements as the instructional design of the programme and course assessments will be integrated with work place experience.

• Qualification Duration

The qualification is studied over a minimum period of two years and not more than a maximum of four years.

321

• Outcomes of the whole Qualification

Holders of this qualification are able to: • Demonstrate mastery in the field of software development, systems acquisition, systems implementation or systems integration.• Demonstrate analytical thinking skills, an innovative mindset and an ethical sense in managing risks, solving problems and identifying opportunities• Evaluate critically the current thinking and research within IT and its application to the advancement of the industry• Demonstrate an in depth comprehensive range of managerial skills in the IT industry• Apply initiative, adaptability and professional responsibility in the workplace and rest of the It industry • Originate the necessary skills required for lifelong independent and reflective learning (self-evaluation and problem solving).

• Credit transfer

Holders of academic qualifications obtained from other bona fide educational institutions may be granted exemptions on the subjects sat for and passed. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been sat for and passed in one sitting and the qualification must have been obtained within a period of five years. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been studied and the qualification obtained at an nQA accredited institution or equivalent. Credits from other universities and/or institutions may be awarded up to fifty percent of total credits for the qualification at IUM.

• Special Arrangements• special Delivery RequirementsThe delivery methods for this qualification comprise of the part time and distance learning modes. Contact hours for distance learning mode are face-to-face encounters on a monthly basis and block periods during IUM academic breaks and other public holidays. In addition, all subjects shall be delivered in the following form • Engineering subjects shall be delivered in the form of lectures and laboratories • Non-Engineering subjects shall be delivered in the form of lectures and seminars• special Assessment Arrangementsspecial assessment arrangements are based on the following: • Course-related knowledge and skills (including prior knowledge, recall and understanding; analysis and critical thinking skills; synthesis and creative thinking skills; problem solving skills; and application and performance skills) • Student attitudes, values, and self-awareness (including students’ awareness of their own values and attitudes; students’ awareness of their own learning processes; and

322

course-related learning and study skills awareness) • Reactions to instruction methods (including student and peer reactions to lecturers and lecturing, class activities, assignments, and materials

Both Formative and summative assessment techniques are used.

• Teaching methods/strategies

The delivery methods for this qualification comprises of the part time and distance learning mode. Contact hours for distance learning mode are face-to-face encounters on monthly basis and block periods during IUM academic breaks and other public holidays. In addition, all subjects shall be delivered in the following form • Engineering subjects shall be delivered in the form of lectures and laboratoriesnon-engineering subjects shall be delivered in the form of lectures and seminars

Courses



Course Title


Compulsory Courses

software engineering soe90Ps 2 9 20

Information systems strategy oMI90Ps 2 9 10

Information technology Project Management

ItM0M5 2 9 20

Electives Courses (choose one)Information technology Law and ethics

ILe90Ps 2 9 20

Advanced systems Analysis and enterprise Modelling

AsA90Ps 2 9 20


Course Title


Compulsory Courses

Information security Management IsM90Ps 2 9 20

323

Data Management and Business Intelligence

DMI90Ps 2 9 20

network Computing neC90Ps 2 9 20

Research Methodology RMe90Ps 2 9 20Electives Courses (choose one)Distributed and Mobile systems DMs90Ps 2 9 20Internet And Web Application Development

IWA90Ps 2 9 20

YEAR 2 (90 credits)


Course Title


Compulsory Courses

Thesis XI190Ps 2 9 30

Master’s Practicum MP190Ps 2 9 30

Electives Courses (choose one)n/A n/A n/A n/A n/A


Course Title


Compulsory Courses

Thesis II XI290Ps 2 9 60

Electives Courses (choose one)n/A n/A n/A n/A n/A

324

Master of Science in Tourism and Hospitality Management (NQF Level 9)


Rationale

The importance of developing a professional, effective and efficient tourism and hospitality sector with emphasis on good leadership and management skills has, in recent years, taken a central place at both local and global levels. The Master of science in tourism and Hospitality Management is designed to prepare tourism professionals for leadership in tourism and hospitality and/or similar managerial settings. The qualification focuses on building and enhancing leadership capacity in aspiring and existing leaders so as to equip them with the necessary tools to be at the forefront of ever-changing tourism and hospitality sector.This qualification draws on strong research and teaching traditions in the areas of management, leadership, policy, facility and service delivery improvement, international development and comparative studies anchored on tourism and hospitality.It offers a selection of courses that recognise the global context of tourism and hospitality, the importance of culture and context in implementing sustainable tourism, and the centrality of management and leadership in the implementation of lifelong improvements in tourism and hospitality sector.It is aimed at tourism and hospitality professionals who are seeking to broaden their knowledge of the tourism and hospitality sector and prepare themselves for the next stage in their career, leadership and management. The qualification uses an innovative leadership model to prepare students to assume dynamic roles, leading transformative change in tourism and hospitality and focuses on the levers of improvement—how the tourism and hospitality sector creates conditions in start-up tourism and hospitality facilities and services, or transforms the existing facilities and services into top notch facilities and services. At the same time, the qualification is intensely personal, focusing on the leadership development of each participant—his or her sense of purpose and commitment, skills in working effectively with other tour operators, and courage in tackling one of the biggest challenges the tourism and hospitality sector faces today—providing the knowledge, skills and social development.In short, this qualification offers participants the opportunity to undertake a general study of the theory and practice of tourism and hospitality management.

Purpose

The purpose of this qualification is to enable participants to understand and critique theories and practices of tourism and hospitality management in the light of current

325

research and professional experience. The integration of theory and practice is central to the qualification. The qualification is based upon current research and best practices in tourism and hospitality management. Participants are expected to read and analyse current research.

The Master of science in tourism and Hospitality Management is solidly anchored on the following:o A work-based practical approach to facilitate integration of work-based learning and experience with theories of leadership and management in tourism and hospitality managemento Reflective practice including use of an electronic portfolio to facilitate self assessment of practical leadership and management skills in the tourism and hospitality sectoro A constructivist approach to knowledge and learning that emphasises integration of skills, attitudes, knowledge and experience across courses, and collaboration within a community of tourism product providers

Who is this qualification for?This qualification targets the following categories in the tourism and hospitality sector:o Qualified staff in the tourism and hospitality sector with a Bachelor Honours Degree in tourism and Hospitality or equivalent.o staff within the tourism and hospitality industry e.g. hotel managers, front office, department heads, team leaders.o other tour operators, managers and professionals involved in the management of tourism and hospitality facilities.

Admission/entry Requirementsto be registered for the Master of science in tourism and Hospitality Management, the candidate must have• Bachelor Honours Degree in Tourism and Hospitality Management or an equivalent qualification at nQF Level 8.• Relevant working experience in the field of Tourism and Hospitality (may be required). • All prospective students shall be approved by IUM SENATE.


The Master of science in tourism Hospitality is a two-year full time post graduate study qualification leading to nQF Level 9 qualification.The study period for the qualification is:Fulltime mode - Minimum: 2 Years; Maximum: 4 YearsContact hours will only be given over weekends and some of the public holidays.

Outcomes of the whole QualificationThe holder of this qualification is able to:

326

• synthesise information on tourism and Hospitality Management and integrate theory and practice;

• Combine complex data from a variety of sources, and use It effectively in the analysis of the data to inform managerial and professional decisions;

• Devise a comprehensive range of learning resources to demonstrate independence, reflective learning and effective Continuing Professional Development;

• Generate informed judgements as a thinking professional and contribute to the tourism and hospitality industry’s effectiveness;

• Analyse the tourism and Hospitality industry and communicate the outcomes effectively;

• evaluate critically the current thinking and research within tourism and hospitality management and its application to the tourism and hospitality industry;

• Critique the concepts, theories and techniques relating to the tourism and hospitality industry;

• evaluate and critically reflect upon current research, relevant scholarship and professional practice related to the tourism and hospitality management;

• Build in-depth knowledge and systematic understanding of the tourism and hospitality industry;

• Demonstrate initiative and personal responsibility for their own learning which can become part of their future career development;

• Demonstrate ability of self-direction, autonomy and originality in problem solving;• Demonstrate a comprehensive range of managerial skills in the tourism and

hospitality industry;• Apply initiative, adaptability and professional responsibility in the workplace and

rest of the tourism and hospitality industry; and • originate the necessary skills required for lifelong independent and reflective

learning (self-evaluation and problem solving).

Articulation

The Master of science in travel and tourism qualification grants admission to Doctorate of Philosophy in travel and tourism or any other related PhD qualifications or any qualification at nQF Level 10.

Credit Transfer Holders of academic qualifications obtained from other educational institutions may be granted exemptions on the subjects sat for and passed. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been sat for and passed in one sitting and the qualification must have been obtained within the last five years. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been studied and the qualification obtained at an nQA accredited institution or equivalent. Under no circumstance shall exemptions be awarded in excess of 50% credits.

327

Assessment

Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Final Examinations





Dissertation Writing

taken in the last year of study, dissertation writing is meant to engage students in research with a faculty member designated by student and approved by the Post Graduate school in order to generate the research necessary to complete their Masters degree

each student must complete a 20 000 – 25 000 word dissertation. The dissertation should involve original research on a topic related to the studied field. It will have a clearly defined problem statement, a review of the existing literature on the chosen topic, original evidence offered to support the dissertation, consideration of alternative rival hypothesis, and a conclusion with recommendations.Upon completion of the research, the results are to be presented for oral defence before an examination panel. The students shall score a minimum of 50% in order to pass the dissertation.

328

Teaching Methods/Strategies

Courses will be delivered using blended learning modalities, including lectures, online tutorials, advanced business simulations, video and audio conferencing technologies. Candidates must have access to a computer and the Internet. The teaching methods adapted for this qualification are student-centred learning methods. emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read extensively in each of the courses. each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning. The role of the lecturer, therefore, is to stimulate learning and to support and guide that process.

YEAR 1 (135credits)


Course Title


operations Management & Information systems strategy

150 9 16

Managerial economics in tourism 150 9 16

Contemporarily Managerial Accounting & Finance

150 9 16

tourism Policy & Planning 150 9 16strategic Marketing Management & Action Planning

150 9 16


Course Title


tourism & Hospitality Law and ethics

150 9 16

tourism and the environment 150 9 16

strategic Hospitality & tourism Branding

150 9 16

329



Course Title


Research Methodology 150 9 20

Electives (chose any two)

Cultural Heritage tourism Management

150 9 16

Parks & Wildlife Management 150 9 16Conventions and event Management

150 9 16

Resort Amenity and Attraction Development

150 9 16

sports tourism Management 150 9 16


Course Title


Dissertation 70

330

Master in International Relations, Diplomacy and Management (NQF Level 9)


The RationaleThe demand for International Relations, Diplomacy and Management (IRDM) has existed throughout recorded history for as long as distinct human communities have sought ways to communicate, to trade and to collaborate with other communities. In modern times, international connections, communications and collaboration have become increasingly important in all spheres of human endeavour including social, cultural, political, economic, and scientific spheres. There is a growing demand for greater understanding and innovations in international relations, diplomacy and management as one of the fastest growing areas where postgraduate studies are needed worldwide. Globalizing forces in economics together with the dynamic state of the post-cold war international politics have made the field of international relations, diplomacy and management a compelling one for the twenty-first century professionals and students who would like to help shape our new world. The most coveted international relations careers such as positions in high profile International organisations are hotly contested and studying a specialised Masters degree in International Relations, Diplomacy and Management (MIRDM) is a definite asset.The MIRDM is unique in that it offers students a multi-disciplinary introduction in the field and blends this with an academic approach to the advanced study of International Relations, Diplomacy and Management based on real world practices.

PurposeThe qualification prepares students for careers in diplomacy, international governmental and non-governmental organisations, management, national and international administration “Think tank”, international interest association or international business. The qualification offers a special blend of academic education in International Relations and political affairs with graduate education and training in world affairs, diplomacy and management.The qualification is designed for students who have relevant working experience at supervisory levels and above. This enables the students to combine classroom acquired knowledge with what they do in the workplace. students bring to class their organisational experiences for critiquing, and take classroom acquired knowledge for experimentation at their work places. This dual learning approach is intended to generate a body of knowledge and skills through exploratory research and as experimental implementers who wouold contribute to the advancement of knowledge and/or prepare others for advanced and specialised employment.

331

The qualification introduces students to the theory and practice of modern diplomacy and statecraft. It explores the evolution of the diplomatic system and its extension throughout the world together with the impact of technology on diplomacy such as the changing role of the resident Ambassador, and the growth of summitry. The instrument of diplomatic craft, both formal (such as International Law) and informal (such as negotiating techniques and public diplomacy) are examined as some of phenomena which diplomats are forced to deal with revolutionary and economic diplomacy.

Who is this Qualification for?

The qualification targets professionals working in the public and private sectors, including entry and mid-level career diplomats, other public service officials, post graduate students and staff from nongovernmental organisation, especially those whose work or studies is linked to the United nations and other international organisations. It can also lead to employment in the civil service or a career as an analyst or policy advisor for numerous organisations that require international relations expertise.

Admission RequirementsThe Master in International Relations, Diplomacy and Management is open to students who must meet the following pre-requisites: 1. A Bachelor Honours degree or an equivalent qualification at nQF Level 8 in AnY field of study.

2. Have at least a 70% or B+ grade average (or equivalent) in the final year of study.

3. All prospective students to the qualification shall be approved by the International University of Management (IUM) senate.

4. Additional qualifications and work experience may be required from all candidates.Qualification Duration

The MIRDM is a two-year full time postgraduate study programmes leading to nQF Level 9 qualification.The study period for the qualification is:Fulltime mode - Minimum: 2 Years; Maximum: 4 YearsThe qualification comprises a minimum of four (4) semesters, i.e. two (2) semesters per academic year. semester 1 runs from January to June. semester 2 runs from July to December.

332


The holder of this qualification is able to:• Interpret the key concepts, models, theories and debates involved in the study of contemporary international relations and diplomacy;• Evaluate interactions between politics and economics in the International System;• Analyse an institutional backdrop underpinning international politics including the international organisations;• Analyse prevailing global issues, such as international conflicts, global health, and environmental challenges;• Demonstrate an in-depth knowledge of a particular functional era and /or region in the world;• Demonstrate advanced skills to collect, sort, and evaluate information relating to international relations, diplomacy, and management; and• Analyse complex situations and synthesize information by integrating different fields of study in a complex world.

Articulation

This Master in International Relation, Diplomacy and Management qualification grants admission to Doctorate of Philosophy in International Relations, Diplomacy and Management or any other related PhD qualifications.

Credit transfer

Holders of academic qualifications obtained from other educational institutions may be granted exemptions on the subjects sat for and passed. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been sat for and passed in one sitting and the qualification must have been obtained within the last five years. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been studied and the qualification obtained at an nQA accredited institution or equivalent. Under no circumstance shall exemptions be awarded in excess of 50 credits.

Assessment

Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Final ExaminationsThe final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations

333

will be of three hours duration. examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally.



Dissertation Writing

taken in the last year of study, dissertation writing is meant to engage students in research with a faculty member designated by student and approved by the Post Graduate school in order to generate the research necessary to complete their Masters degree.



The IUM MIRDM blends work with learning in a win-win style. students attend face-to-face classroom learning with highly qualified Lecturers. The traditional classroom chalk-talk approach, individual study and group study, workshops conducted by highly qualified lecturers in international relations, presentations by students, case analysis and conceptual exercises are all fused into a synergistic package of delivery methodologies that amalgamates theory with practice. The methodologies used encourage analysis, critical thinking and discussion of the real issues impacting on the current world affairs. nevertheless, courses will be delivered using blended learning modalities, including lectures, online tutorials, simulations, video and audio conferencing technologies. The teaching methods adapted for this programme are student-centred learning methods. emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read extensively in each of the courses. each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning. The role

334

of the lecturer, therefore, is to stimulate learning and to support and guide that process. Programmed reading and reading guides will support these endeavours.



Course Title


International Relations Theories IRt90Ps 9 20

Diplomacy Theories and Practice DtP90Ps 9 20

French for Communication Purposes

nFP90Ps 5 none-Cred-it Bearing (nCB)

Foreign Policies Analysis FPA90Ps 9 25


Course Title


namibia Foreign Policy nFP90Ps 9 25


International & Multilateral organizations

IMo90Ps 9 25

Management of trade and Investment Disputes

MtI90Us 25

International Political economy IPe90Ps 5 25



Course Title


Research Methodology RMe90Ps 9 25

Electives (chose any one)

Management of International Conflicts

MAI90Ps 9 25

335

International Law ILA90Ps 9 25


Course Title


Year course

Dissertation MID90Ps 9 60

Total Credits 260

336

Master in Public Policy & Management (NQF Level 9)

Details of the Qualification & syllabi


Rationale today’s professionals especially those with a bias in leadership, management and policy, in and out of government, appreciate that theirs is a distinguished calling. Faced with many of today’s most difficult policy issues, these professionals need inventive solutions that they know can be politically and administratively effective. The Master in Public Policy and Management is a degree for professionals with significant practical experience who have a desire to be with essential management and analytic skills that would allow them to meet policy management challenges. The Master in Public Policy and Management hones and integrates professionals’ talents to enhance their effectiveness in the world of policy. The Master in Public Policy and Management is useful to the public service practitioners and other practitioners who are involved in policy design, implementation and evaluation as well as governance. It is also useful to those who are interested in developing their leadership capacities, knowledge, skills and talent. This qualification can be used to secure leadership positions within management in the public sector, within non-governmental organisations, and within a variety of other professional settings such as hospitals, parastatal, private and community organisations.

employing authorities are likely to continue to view postgraduate study such as the Master in Public Policy and Management as a valuable form of professional development.PurposeThe purpose of the Master in Public Policy and Management degree is to strengthen the public policy and managerial skills of future leaders, senior managers and professionals from both the public and private sectors. This programme provides committed policy professionals with the theoretical foundation and practical tools they need to make a difference.The qualification is aimed at enabling participants to synthesise and critique theories and practices of public policy and management in the light of current research and professional experience. The integration of theory and practice is central to the programme.

Who is this programme for?

This programme targets the following categories in the education sector:• Qualified staff in the public sector with a Bachelor’s Honours Degree in Public

337

Policy and Management or equivalent.• other managers and professionals involved in policy design, implementation and

analysis at various levels and with necessary qualifications.• other managers and professionals involved in governance and/or public

management at various levels and with necessary qualifications.• other candidates with necessary qualifications and who aspire to attain the necessary

tools for policy design, implementation and analysis, and good governance.

Admission/Entry Requirementsto be registered for the Master in Public Policy & Management candidate must have• A Bachelors degree in Public Policy and Management at level 8 or equivalent

qualifications • Relevant working experience in the field Public Policy and Management (maybe

required) • All prospective students shall be approved by the IUM senAte

Qualification DurationThe Master in Public Policy & Management is a two-year full time postgraduate study qualification leading to nQF Level 9 qualification.The study period for the qualification is:Fulltime mode - Minimum: 2 Years; Maximum: 4 YearsContact hours will only be given over weekends and during some public holidaysoutcomes of the whole qualification

Holders of this qualification are able to: • Produce evidence of advanced knowledge about a specialist field of enquiry or professional practice;• Demonstrate mastery of sophisticated theoretical subject matter;• Evaluate critically the findings and discussions in the literature;• Research, analyse and argue from evidence;• Work independently and apply knowledge to new situations; and• Engage in rigorous intellectual analysis, criticism and problem-solving;• Analyse subject matter and communicate the outcomes effectively;• Evaluate critically the current thinking and research within the subject matter and its application to the school system;• Critique the concepts, theories and techniques relating to subject matter; • Evaluate and critically reflect upon current research, relevant scholarship and professional practice related to the subject matter;• Demonstrate initiative and personal responsibility self-direction, autonomy and originality in problem solving;• Generate informed judgements as a thinking professional and contribute to educational and managerial effectiveness;• Apply initiative, adaptability and professional responsibility in the workplace and rest

338

of the school system;• Originate the necessary skills required for lifelong independent and reflective learning (self-evaluation and problem solving);• Devise a comprehensive range of learning resources to demonstrate independence, reflective learning and effective Continuing Professional Development; and • Combine complex data from a variety of sources, and use IT effectively in the analysis of the data to inform managerial and professional decisions.

ArticulationThe Master in Public Policy and Management qualification grants admission to Doctorate of Philosophy in Public Policy and Management or any other related PhD qualifications or any qualification at nQF level 10.

Credit Transfer Holders of academic qualifications obtained from other educational institutions may be granted exemptions on the subjects sat for and passed. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been sat for and passed in one sitting and the qualification must have been obtained within the last five years. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been studied and the qualification obtained at an nQA accredited institution or equivalent. Under no circumstance shall exemptions be awarded in excess of 50% credits.




A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one

339

level to the next higher level carrying more than 50% of the courses or credits.

Dissertation Writingtaken in the last year of study, dissertation writing is meant to engage students in research with a faculty member designated by student and approved by the Post Graduate school in order to generate the research necessary to complete their Master Degree


Teaching Methods/StrategiesCourses will be delivered using blended learning modalities, including lectures, online tutorials, advanced business simulations, video and audio conferencing technologies. Candidates must have access to a computer and the Internet. The teaching methods adapted for this qualification are student-centred learning methods. emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read extensively in each of the courses. each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning. The role of the lecturer, therefore, is to stimulate learning and to support and guide that process.



Course Title


Good Governance and Compliance GGC90Ps 160 9 16

systems Thinking and strategic Development

ssD90Ps 160 9 16

Innovations in Public Management InP90Ps 160 9 16

technology and economic Growth teC90Ps 160 9 16

340


Course Title


systems synthesis and Policy Analysis

sPA90Ps 160 9 16

Fiscal Planning and Management Control systems

FsM90Ps 160 9 16

Policy, strategy and Resources PsR90Ps 160 9 16

ethics, Legal and Institutional Dynamics

eLI90Ps 160 9 16


SEMESTER 1 (52credits)

Course Title


Research Methodology RMe90Ps 160 9 20


The state, Public Policy and Management

sPP90Ps 160 9 16

Global Labour & employment Law GLe90Ps 160 9 16

Corporate Governance & social Responsibility

CGs90Ps 160 9 16

Business Risk & Intelligence for Management

BRI90Ps 160 9 16


Course Title


Dissertation XPM90Ps 70

341

Doctor of Philosophy (PhD) Degree in Business Administration (NQF Level 10)

Purpose of the PhD Qualifications:

The purpose of the doctorate degree In Business Administration is to provide opportunities for deserving students from IUM and other universities who have successfully completed Master’s degree programmes in the relevant and/or related fields, and who fulfill the requirements for admission to a doctorate (Ph.D.) programme in Business Administration..

Outcomes of the PhD Qualification in Business Administration:

Holders of the PhD qualification in Business Administration are able to:• Demonstrate comprehensive, systematic and in-depth mastery of knowledge,

research and analytical skills used in the formulation of new, cutting-edge learning, practice principles or processes relevant to Business Administration.

• Demonstrate advanced knowledge of existing discourses on issues related to the area of research and the thesis.

• exhibit knowledge of advanced research methods and methodology and techniques for data collection and analysis using qualitative, quantitative and/or mixed methods.

• Formulate and undertake research on new areas and generate new ideas that add value and new knowledge to the area of specialization.

• Contribute to development discourses and paradigms at national, regional and international level in the area of their thesis specializations;

• Apply the knowledge acquired to improve theory and practice in their specific area of specialization;

• Use research skills acquired to advance research in their areas of specialization after graduation; and

• Disseminate widely the research results through scholarly publications, analytical briefs and contributions to academic and policy platforms in namibia and abroad.

Admission requirementsa. A Master’s Degree registered at nQF Level 9 in a relevant discipline. orb. Any qualification at nQF Level 8 in a related discipline plus either at least five years of work experience at a senior management or professional level plus the publication of a peer-reviewed paper(s) or other publication(s).

It is also a requirement that people entering into supervised learning leading to the award of this qualification have been recognized as having attained or shall undertake noncredit bearing courses at nQF Level 8 or above relating to:

342

• postgraduate report writing and academic writing in a variety of genre or styles• the proficient use of advanced qualitative research methods• the proficient use of advanced quantitative research methods and applications• the proficient use of information and communication technologies relevant to the analysis and presentation of data• understandings of ethical practices in research• awareness of current research practices.

Delivery requirements

The attainment of this qualification requires significant levels of self-directed study and research actions that require access to specialized research resources and/or facilities. The availability of such resources and/or facilities shall be verified by the IUM Postgraduate Committee.students preparing for the award of this qualification must be supervised by recognized experts in the field of study. At least one of these recognized experts must hold a PhD Degree, preferably in the field of study. supervisors allocated to students shall be approved by the Postgraduate Committee and shall act in accordance with instructions issued by the Committee and approved by the Council.

• In preparation for field work students will be expected to sharpen their general conceptual analysis and research methodology in order to bring them up to date with new theoretical knowledge and advanced qualitative, quantitative and mixed methods of research approaches.

• students must submit a draft research proposal on a topic selected in consultation with their supervisors.

• Preparation for the thesis work will begin during the general conceptual analysis and research methodology phase that will focus on broad education issues. The research methodology phase will also be used to provide guidance on proposal writing and supervisors will be appointed before the beginning of the phase.

• As the research methodology course proceeds students will be guided on the preparation of their research design starting with a concept paper stating the problem, its background, why it is important to undertake research on it and its relevance to the development of new knowledge that may address the problem in a specific area. The concept paper will be developed into a research proposal through various stages with the support of supervisors leading to the development of a draft research proposals and research design.

• The drafts will be presented for peer review by fellow students and comments by supervisors.

• After the first presentation students will incorporate comments from peers and supervisors and prepare the final draft research design and/or field research or data collection plan for submission to their supervisors.

343

• The final research design and plan will be approved by the higher degrees/postgraduate committee of senate on recommendations from supervisors and forwarded to senate for noting only.

• During field work students will work independently but will remain in close contact with their supervisors.

• As the field work is completed supervisors will provide guidance, coaching, counselling and other support on how to prepare a thesis.

• First drafts of the theses will be presented for peer review and comments from supervisors and other persons at IUM interested in the area of study. students can also invite colleagues from their places of work or interested persons from the places where research was conducted.

• After presentation students will incorporate comments and submit their theses for external and internal examination.

Assessment arrangements

The award of this qualification first requires the presentation and defence of a research (dissertation) proposal that is accepted by the Higher Degrees/Postgraduate Committee of senate. As a minimum, the dissertation proposal must comply with the format specified by the Committee and be inclusive of:

a. A review of literature relevant to the proposed area of research and which clearly establishes a conceptual framework upon which the research problem is based and provides insight into existing knowledge related to the problem.b. A clear outline of the purpose of the research study and the research questions, the relevant theoretical and/or conceptual framework on which the study shall be based, any delineations regarding the scope of the study, and defines terms specific to the study.c. A clear outline of the research design and procedures, data collection and analysis methods to be applied, and measures to ensure the research shall be ethical and, where relevant, cognisant of the need to protect the welfare and wellbeing of any persons who and/or environs that are the subject of the research.d. A proposed timeline for the completion of the research and the presentation of a thesis and/or associated innovative or creative works.

The award of this qualification shall ultimately depend on the recommendation made by a panel of independent experts to the Postgraduate Committee who, in applying current international standards, would consider that a thesis submitted to the panel and defended by the candidate:

a. Represents scholarly and/or innovative work significantly higher than a Master’s degree in that it represents comprehensive, systematic and in-depth mastery of knowledge, research and analysis techniques relevant to the field of study, andb. Contributes significantly and originally to the ideas, practices and current debates at

344

the cutting edge of the field of study, andc. Warrants publication and/or presentation as a peer-reviewed work.

There shall be at least three examiners for each thesis. The examiners shall be experts/specialists in the field of the study approved by senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Postgraduate Committee. At least one of the examiners shall not be an employee of the IUM and shall not have been one of the supervisors of the candidate being examined.

All the processes of the PhD programme shall be conducted under the oversight of the each faculty under the supervision and/or coordination of the Postgraduate Committee and normally all external examiners shall be senior academics at senior Lecturer level and above with considerable experience in teaching and research at postgraduate studies level and at least three years after their PhD graduation.

Courses

Course Title Outcomes of Learning Level CreditsConceptual Analysis & Research Methodol-ogy

Demonstrate highest level of skills for critical en-quiry, theoretical and discourse analysis and apply in-depth mastery of advanced research methods and techniques for data collection and analysis in Business Administration.

10 non-credit Bearing (nCB)

Full PhD Thesis(Disserta-tion)

Demonstrate a capacity to conduct independent research and make original contribution to the body of knowledge in Business Administration.

10 360

345

Doctor of Philosophy (PhD) Degree in Information and Communication Technolohy (Level 10)

Purpose of the PhD degree in Information and Communication Technology

The purpose of the doctorate degrees Information and Communication technology is to provide opportunities for deserving students from IUM and other universities who have successfully completed Master’s degree programme in the relevant and/or related fields, and who fulfil the requirements for admission to a doctorate (PhD) programme Information and Communication technology.

Outcomes of the PhD Qualification in Information and Communication Technology

Holders of the PhD degree in Information and Communication technology are able to:• Demonstrate comprehensive, systematic and in-depth mastery of knowledge,

research and analytical skills used in the formulation of new, cutting-edge learning, practice principles or processes relevant to Information and Communication technology.

• Demonstrate advanced knowledge of exiting discourses on issues related to the area of research and the thesis.

• exhibit knowledge of advanced research methods and methodology and techniques for data collection and analysis using qualitative, quantitative and/or mixed methods.






Admission requirementsA Master’s Degree registered at nQF Level 9 in a relevant discipline. orAny qualification at nQF Level 8 in a related discipline plus either at least five years of work experience at a senior management or professional level plus the publication of a peer-reviewed paper(s) or other publication(s).It is also a requirement that people entering into the supervised learning leading to the award of this qualification have been recognized as having attained or shall undertake non-credit bearing courses at nQF Level 8 or above relating to:

346

• postgraduate report writing and academic writing in a variety of genre or styles• the proficient use of advanced qualitative research methods• the proficient use of advanced quantitative research methods and applications• the proficient use of information and communication technologies relevant to the analysis and presentation of data• understandings of ethical practices in research• awareness of current research practices.

Delivery The attainment of this qualification requires significant levels of self-directed study and research actions that require access to specialized research resources and/or facilities. The availability of such resources and/or facilities shall be verified by the IUM Postgraduate Committee.students preparing for the award of this qualification must be supervised by recognized experts in the field of study. At least one of these recognized experts must hold a PhD Degree, preferably in the field of study. supervisors allocated to students shall be approved by the Postgraduate Committee and shall act in accordance with instructions issued by the Committee and approved by the Council.• In preparation for field work students will be expected to sharpen their general

conceptual analysis and research methodology in order to bring them up to date with new theoretical knowledge and advanced qualitative, quantitative and mixed methods of research approaches.







• During field work students will work independently but will remain in close contact

347

with their supervisors.• As the field work is completed supervisors will provide guidance, coaching,

counselling and other support on how to prepare a thesis.• First drafts of the theses will be presented for peer review and comments from

supervisors and other persons at IUM interested in the area of study. students can also invite colleagues from their places of work or interested persons from the places where research was conducted.

• After presentation students will incorporate comments and submit their theses for external and internal examination

Assessment • The award of this qualification first requires the presentation and defence of a

research (dissertation) proposal that is accepted by the Higher Degrees/Postgraduate Committee of senate. As a minimum, the dissertation proposal must comply with the format specified by the Committee and be inclusive of:

• A review of literature relevant to the proposed area of research and which clearly establishes a conceptual framework upon which the research problem is based and provides insight into existing knowledge related to the problem.

• A clear outline of the purpose of the research study and the research questions, the relevant theoretical and/or conceptual framework on which the study shall be based, any delineations regarding the scope of the study, and defines terms specific to the study.

• A clear outline of the research design and procedures, data collection and analysis methods to be applied, and measures to ensure the research shall be ethical and, where relevant, cognisant of the need to protect the welfare and wellbeing of any persons who and/or environs that are the subject of the research.

• A proposed timeline for the completion of the research and the presentation of a thesis and/or associated innovative or creative works.

• The award of this qualification shall ultimately depend on the recommendation made by a panel of independent experts to the Postgraduate Committee who, in applying current

• international standards, would consider that a thesis submitted to the panel and defended by the candidate:

• Represents scholarly and/or innovative work significantly higher than a Master’s degree in that it represents comprehensive, systematic and in-depth mastery of knowledge, research and analysis techniques relevant to the field of study, and

• Contributes significantly and originally to the ideas, practices and current debates at the cutting edge of the field of study, and

• Warrants publication and/or presentation as a peer-reviewed work.

There shall be at least three examiners for each thesis. The examiners shall be experts/specialists in the field of the study approved by senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Postgraduate Committee. At least one of the examiners shall not be an employee

348

of the IUM and shall not have been one of the supervisors of the candidate being examined.


Courses


Demonstrate highest level of skills for critical enquiry, theoretical and discourse analysis and apply in-depth mastery of advanced research methods and techniques for data collection and analysis in Information and Communication technology.

10 non-Credit Bearing (nCB)


Demonstrate a capacity to conduct independent research and make original contribution to the body of knowledge Information and Communi-cation technology.

10 360

349

Doctor of Philosophy (PhD) in Education (NQF Level 10)

Purpose of the PhD Qualification in Education

The purpose of this qualification is to provide opportunity to deserving students from IUM and other universities who have successfully completed Master’s degree programmes in various fields of education and related fields, and who fulfill the requirements for admission to the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in education.

Outcomes of the PhD Qualification in Education:

Holders of this qualification are able to:• Demonstrate comprehensive, systematic and in-depth mastery of knowledge, research and analytical skills used in the formulation of new, cutting-edge learning, practice principles or processes relevant to education.• Demonstrate advanced knowledge of exiting discourses on issues related to the area of research and the thesis.• Exhibit knowledge of advanced research methods and methodology and techniques for data collection and analysis using qualitative, quantitative and/or mixed methods.• Formulate and undertake research on new areas and generate new ideas that add value and new knowledge to the area of specialization.• Contribute to development discourses and paradigms at national, regional and international level in the area of their thesis specializations;• Apply the knowledge acquired to improve theory and practice in their specific area of specialization;• Use research skills acquired to advance research in their areas of specialization after graduation; and• Disseminate widely the research results through scholarly publications, analytical briefs and contributions to academic and policy platforms in namibia and abroad.

Admission requirementsA Master’s Degree registered at nQF Level 9 in a relevant discipline. orAny qualification at nQF Level 8 in a related discipline plus either at least five years of work experience at a senior management or professional level plus the publication of a peer-reviewed paper(s) or other publication(s).

It is also a requirement that people entering into supervised learning leading to the award of this qualification have been recognized as having attained or shall undertake noncredit bearing courses at nQF Level 8 or above relating to:

• postgraduate report writing and academic writing in a variety of genre or styles• the proficient use of advanced qualitative research methods• the proficient use of advanced quantitative research methods and applications

350

• the proficient use of information and communication technologies relevant to the analysis and presentation of data• understandings of ethical practices in research• awareness of current research practices.


The attainment of this qualification requires significant levels of self-directed study and research actions that require access to specialized research resources and/or facilities. The availability of such resources and/or facilities shall be verified by the IUM Postgraduate Committee.students preparing for the award of this qualification must be supervised by recognized experts in the field of study. At least one of these recognized experts must hold a PhD Degree, preferably in the field of study. supervisors allocated to students shall be approved by the Postgraduate Committee and shall act in accordance with instructions issued by the Committee and approved by IUM Council.









351





The award of this qualification first requires the presentation and defence of a research (thesis/dissertation) proposal that is accepted by the Higher Degrees/Postgraduate Committee of senate. As a minimum, the dissertation proposal must comply with the format specified by the Committee and be inclusive of:







• Contributes significantly and originally to the ideas, practices and current debates at the cutting edge of the field of study, and

• Warrants publication and/or presentation as a peer-reviewed work.

There shall be at least three examiners for each thesis. The examiners shall be experts/specialists in the field of the study approved by senate on the recommendation of the

352

Faculty Postgraduate Committee. At least one of the examiners shall not be an employee of the IUM and shall not have been one of the supervisors of the candidate being examined.


Courses


Demonstrate highest level of skills for critical enquiry, theoretical and discourse analysis and apply in-depth mastery of advanced research methods and techniques for data collection and analysis in education.

10 non-Cred-it Bearing (nCB)


Demonstrate a capacity to conduct independent research and make original contribution to the body of knowledge in education.

10 360

353

Doctor of Philosophy (PhD) Degree in Tourism and Hospitality (NQF Level 10)

Purpose of the PhD degree in Tourism and Hospitality:

The purpose of the doctorate degree in tourism and Hospitality is to provide oppor-tunities for deserving students from IUM and other universities who have successfully completed Master’s degree programmes in the relevant and/or related fields, and who fulfil the requirements for admission to a doctorate (Ph.D) programme in tourism and Hospitality.

Outcomes of the PhD Qualifications:

Holders of the PhD qualifications are able to:• Demonstrate comprehensive, systematic and in-depth mastery of knowledge, re-

search and analytical skills used in the formulation of new, cutting-edge learning, practice principles or processes relevant to tourism and hospitality.

• Demonstrate advanced knowledge of exiting discourses on issues related to the area of research and the thesis.

• exhibit knowledge of advanced research methods and methodology and tech-niques for data collection and analysis using qualitative, quantitative and/or mixed methods.






Admission requirements• A Master’s Degree registered at nQF Level 9 in a relevant discipline. or• Any qualification at nQF Level 8 in a related discipline plus either at least five

years of work experience at a senior management or professional level plus the publication of a peer-reviewed paper(s) or other publication(s).

It is also a requirement that people entering into the supervised learning leading to the award of this qualification have been recognized as having attained or shall undertake noncredit bearing courses at nQF Level 8 or above relating to:

354

• postgraduate report writing and academic writing in a variety of genre or styles• the proficient use of advanced qualitative research methods• the proficient use of advanced quantitative research methods and applications• the proficient use of information and communication technologies relevant to the

analysis and presentation of data• understandings of ethical practices in research• awareness of current research practices.


The attainment of this qualification requires significant levels of self-directed study and research actions that require access to specialized research resources and/or facilities. The availability of such resources and/or facilities shall be verified by the IUM Post-graduate Committee.students preparing for the award of this qualification must be supervised by recog-nized experts in the field of study. At least one of these recognized experts must hold a PhD Degree, preferably in the field of study. supervisors allocated to students shall be approved by the Postgraduate Committee and shall act in accordance with instructions issued by the Committee and approved by the Council.







• The final research design and plan will be approved by the higher degrees/post-

355

graduate committee of senate on recommendations from supervisors and forward-ed to senate for noting only.

• During field work students will work independently but will remain in close con-tact with their supervisors.

• As the field work is completed supervisors will provide guidance, coaching, coun-selling and other support on how to prepare a thesis.




The award of this qualification first requires the presentation and defence of a research (dissertation) proposal that is accepted by the Higher Degrees/Postgraduate Commit-tee of senate. As a minimum, the dissertation proposal must comply with the format specified by the Committee and be inclusive of:







• Contributes significantly and originally to the ideas, practices and current debates

356

at the cutting edge of the field of study, and• Warrants publication and/or presentation as a peer-reviewed work.

There shall be at least three examiners for each thesis. The examiners shall be experts/specialists in the field of the study approved by senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Postgraduate Committee. At least one of the examiners shall not be an employ-ee of the IUM and shall not have been one of the supervisors of the candidate being examined.

All the processes of the PhD programme shall be conducted under the oversight of the each faculty under the supervision and/or coordination of the Postgraduate Committee and normally all external examiners shall be senior academics at senior Lecturer level and above with considerable experience in teaching and research at postgraduate stud-ies level and at least three years after their PhD graduation.

Courses


Demonstrate highest level of skills for critical enquiry, theoretical and discourse analysis and apply in-depth mastery of advanced research methods and techniques for data collection and analysis in tourism.

10 non-Credit Bearing (nCB)

Full Thesis/Dissertation

Demonstrate a capacity to conduct independent research and make original contribution to the body of knowledge in tourism.

10 360

357

Regulations for the Degree of Master

PGS 1 : Admission RequirementsIn order to be admitted to a postgraduate degree programme at the International University of Management (IUM), prospective students must meet the following minimum requirements:

. Have the relevant Bachelor Honours degree in the upper class division or equivalent from a reputable university, institution, or institute/organization oR have the requisite degree for the intended programme by the time they are matriculated.• Must have obtained such professional qualifications or membership of professional

institutions deemed equivalent to a diploma or first degree by the IUM Higher Degrees Committee and approved by the IUM senate.

• Must have obtained an undergraduate degree in any discipline from IUM and/or from another recognised university or institution of Higher Learning.

• Additional qualifications and work experience may be required from all candidates.• 2.75 or higher GPA on the last 60 semester credits or 65% pass rate.• 3 letters of recommendations from university senior lecturers/professors.• A two-page motivation write-up on why the candidate intends to join the Master`s

programme.• Departments may decide to have additional requirements.• students with first Masters degrees will follow the standard admission requirements

stipulated in these regulations.• Admissions shall be once a year, in January.• students may be required to sit for a Graduate english examination (Gee) before

admission. The exam will be set, marked and administered by the school of Postgraduate studies.

• Departments may have additional requirements.

PGS 2: Submission of Application• Paper-based forms: These forms are available from the Admissions office.

Potential graduate students can come and collect the forms upon payment of a non-refundable application fee of n$200.

• Via Electronic forms: The application form may be downloaded from the IUM Website by prospective graduate students who wish to apply for the Master’s program or other postgraduate programmes.

PGS 3: Application DeadlinesThe application deadline shall be end of october of each year. While the deadline shall stand, IUM students may be exempted from the specific application deadline. As soon as an application is complete, a recommendation is made by the appropriate department to the Head of the school of Postgraduate studies, who with the Higher Degrees Committee, shall approve all admissions and report to senate accordingly.

358

official notification of acceptance or rejection will come from the office of the Registrar.

PGS 4: Full-Time StatusA full-time student must meet one of the following requirements:• Maintain graduate student record pass of more than 70%. If a graduate student fails

to score 70% twice, then the student will be put on academic probation for one semester; in which time a passing grade is expected.

• Register for one module with all required coursework completed and only the research component of the degree remaining.

• Register for at least one module during the semester of the final thesis/dissertation defence or, in a non-thesis degree programme.

PGS 5: Part-Time Postgraduate StudentDuration of the course can be up to 4 years taking the required modules upon approval for an extension to do so.

PGS 6: Graduate StudentsA postgraduate student is accepted by a department, with the concurrence of the Head of the school of Postgraduate studies to an approved graduate degree programme and is enrolled at the University. The department in which the graduate student studies for the Master’s degree may require a graduate student to re-apply if the student stays out of the programme for one year. Although the requirements for the masters programme stand, the faculty, the department and the school of Postgraduate studies can waive these requirements.

PGS 7: Non-thesis OptionThis option will depend on departmental requirements where some Masters degrees may be earned without a thesis. students in this category will take a comprehensive examination set by the school of Postgraduate studies. A minimum of 3 specialization electives courses shall be taken by each student in conjunction with a course in Research Methodology in the respective discipline. students will need to complete practicums, internships, or other experiences useful to the student`s future professional career. Registration in one course that requires a substantial paper involving significant independent study shall be considered.

PGS 8: Thesis OptionThe minimum requirements for a thesis option for a Master’s degree programme are; submission of an acceptable thesis and the passing of an oral examination in defence of the thesis. A maximum of 12 courses plus a thesis shall be taken by each student in the respective discipline. A research proposal must be submitted in the last semester of the first year.

359

PGS 9: Thesis Supervisoreach research student shall work under the guidance of a supervisor. The minimum academic requirement for a supervisor is a Master`s degree or PhD with a minimum of three years lectureship experience of which at least two years must be at the postgraduate level or any other equivalent research contribution. The responsibilities of the supervisor are to:i. supervise the students in finalizing the research problemii. supervise the students in doing literature surveyiii. help the students in selecting research toolsiv. regularly monitor the research work of the studentsv. facilitate clarification of research queries by the studentsvi. supervise the students regarding writing and submission of the thesisvii. submit monthly reports regarding students progressviii. cooperate and collaborate with the Head of the Postgraduate schoolix. ensure that students sign the Masters study agreement together with the guide and must be submitted to the Head of school of Postgraduate school before the commencement of the thesis.

PGS 10: Conduct of ClassesAcademic staff of each discipline will arrange for the conduct of classes. They will submit course plans and a list of academic staff to the Head of the Postgraduate school before the beginning of each semester. The classes conducted and the attendance of students will be monitored by the HoD. The staff will conduct regular teaching, seminars, paper presentation, colloquia and compulsory end of semester examinations. examinations will be centralized and controlled by the Chief examinations officer. Monthly academic reports are to be submitted, during the coursework period, by the HoD to the Head of the Postgraduate school .The students doing a Masters` degree will have to take 12 courses, including Research Methods which is a compulsory course at Masters level. Full-time students will do coursework in the first year and do research in their second year. Part-time students will take one year and half to do coursework and 6 months will be reserved for research.

PGS 11: Assessment of Course workContinuous assessment will be based on;i. Continuous Assessment (CAs) of course work at 40/60 marks.ii. end semester examination – 70 marks.iii. students are required to have a score of 70% on the final examination in order to pass the module.iv. After successful completion of all the 14 courses plus research methodology, a student will be admitted to the final stage of the programme which is thesis writing.v. The students must score an average of 60% on final thesis assessment and if they fall short of the required marks, they will have to re-do the weak areas in the thesis. The weak areas will be identified by the Higher Degrees Committee.

360

vi. The non-thesis option students will be required to enrol in research methods courses and at the end of the courses, they will have to produce a research proposal.vii. The internal assessment should be done periodically and the CAs submitted to the Chief examinations officer.viii. students who fail to complete CAs requirements on the specified date may be given another chance to repeat the CA before the next CA, at the discretion of the lecturer with the consent of the Head of the school of Postgraduate studies.ix. Maximum marks for each end semester examination will be 100, for the duration of 3 hours.x. two sets of independent question papers for each subject, completely sealed, should be sent to the Ceo through the Head of the school of Postgraduate studies. The question papers should reach the Ceo at least 15 days in advance.

PGS 12: Submission of ThesisThe title page of the thesis, cover format, University logo, etc. should strictly conform to the format of presentation by the University and the thesis should carry a declaration by the candidate and certificate duly signed and issued by the supervisor. The thesis should be hardbound in blue colour. All theses shall be written in english. Final submission of the thesis shall be 30 october of each year. In exceptional cases, candidates may be allowed extension of time to submit their dissertation on the payment of the prescribed fee subject to successful completion of applicable coursework. However, such extension shall be for a maximum period of one year only. All Masters dissertations shall not be accepted for assessment, unless the candidate has paid the prescribed fees fully. The candidate shall submit three- hard-bound copies and a soft copy (CD with word and Pdf files of his/her dissertation work) for assessment.

PGS 13: Assessment of the Master’s ThesisThe thesis submitted by the candidate under the guidance of a supervisor will be assessed by two experts (one Internal and one external) recommended by the Higher Degrees Committee and approved by senate. The candidates will also appear for final viva voce. The viva voce will be arranged by the Head of the school of Postgraduate studies.

PGS14: Cancellation of Masters AdmissionThe admission of candidate will be cancelled under the following circumstances where a student;i. Fails to secure 80% attendanceii. Fails to submit the documents/requirements related to Course Assessmentiii. Does not pay the annual fee within the stipulated timeiv. Fails to submit the dissertation within the stipulated time.

361

Regulations for the Degree of Doctor of Philosophy (PhD)

PhD Research and Thesis Programme

PGS 15 : Policy

The PhD programme is by research and full Thesis. The Faculty level requirements will normally include offering compulsory, but non-credit bearing courses which must be taken by students to the satisfaction of the Postgraduate studies Committee (PsC).

except with the permission of senate, no PhD candidate shall be admitted or registeredconcurrently for more than one programme of study.

A full-time PhD candidate may, at the same time, lecture at IUM, provided that the maximumload of teaching shall not exceed eight (8) contact hours per week. PGS 16 : PhD Programme

PGS 16.1: Programme coverageApart from higher degrees at Master’s level, the school of Postgraduate studies currently offers studies leading to the following awards:

• PhD in Business Administration• PhD in Information and Communication Technology• PhD in Education• PhD in Tourism and Hospitality

PGS 16.2: Admission requirementsA Master’s Degree registered at nQF Level 9 in a relevant discipline. orAny qualification at nQF Level 8 in a related discipline plus either at least five years of work experience at a senior management or professional level plus the publication of a peer-reviewed paper(s) or other publication(s).ortransfer from a PhD by research and thesis programme in a reputable university or institution, provided that all related documentary evidence is provided and confirmation of this evidence by the university’/institution’s Registrar or delegated authority.

Applicants with qualifications higher than Masters but below PhD (MPhil, MD, etc.) or professional degrees may be considered for admission into the PhD programme on a case-by-case basis.

It is also a requirement that people entering into supervised learning leading to the award of a PhD qualification have been recognized as having attained or shall undertake

362

noncredit bearing courses at nQF Level 8 or above relating to:

• postgraduate report writing and academic writing in a variety of genre or styles• the proficient use of advanced qualitative research methods• the proficient use of advanced quantitative research methods and applications• the proficient use of information and communication technologies relevant to the analysis and presentation of data• understandings of ethical practices in research• awareness of current research practices

PGS 16.3: Delivery requirementsThe attainment of this qualification requires significant levels of self-directed study and research actions that require access to specialized research resources and/or facilities. The availability of such resources and/or facilities shall be verified by the IUM Postgraduate Committee.

students preparing for the award of this qualification must be supervised by recognized experts in the field of study. At least one of these recognized experts must hold a PhD Degree, preferably in the field of study. supervisors allocated to students shall be approved by the Postgraduate studies Committee and shall act in accordance with instructions issued by the Committee and approved by Council.• In preparation for field work students will be expected to sharpen their general

conceptual analysis and research methodology in order to bring them up to date with new theoretical knowledge and advanced qualitative, quantitative and mixed methods of research approaches.



• As the research methodology course proceeds students will be guided on the preparation of their research design starting with a concept paper stating the problem, its background, why it is important to undertake research on it and its relevance to the development of new knowledge that may address the problem in a specific area. The concept paper will be developed into a research proposal through various stages with the support of supervisors leading to the development of a draft research proposal and research design.



363

• The final research design and plan will be approved by the Postgraduate studies Committee (PsC) of senate on recommendations from supervisors and forwarded to senate for noting only.





PGS 17: ProcessPGS 17.1: Postgraduate studies CommitteeThe higher degree programme at IUM will be managed by the Postgraduate studies Committee (PsC), a Committee of the senate, charged with the responsibility of considering recommendations from the Faculty Committees on matters relating to the pursuit of higher degrees at the university.

The Postgraduate studies Committee will operate within the existing university regulations in monitoring the supervision of postgraduate students and ultimately the award of respective PhD Degrees upon satisfactory completion of their requirements.

PGs 17.2: Composition The composition of the Postgraduate studies Committee shall be as follows:• Pro-Vice Chancellor, Academic & Research• Director, Postgraduate School• Dean, Faculty of Business Administration• Dean, Faculty of Strategic Management• Dean, Faculty of Educational Administration and Management• Dean, Faculty of Health Sciences• Dean, Faculty of Information and Communication Technology• Dean, Faculty of Tourism and Hospitality• Registrar

PGS 17.3: terms of Reference:• The Chair of the Committee will be an experienced Professor from the university staff.• The Committee will meet regularly, at least once a month, as stipulated in the university calendar.• The Committee will be served by a Secretary, to keep records of its meetings and decisions.• The Committee will report to the University Senate.

364

PGS 17.4: Faculty Postgraduate Committeeeach Faculty will have a Faculty Postgraduate Committee for the purpose of coordinating the processing of student admission, teaching and supervision, in accordance with the directive of the Postgraduate studies Committee.

Faculty Postgraduate Committees will report to the university Postgraduate studies Committee, which will make final decisions on admission, teaching, supervision and award of postgraduate degrees.

PGS 17.5: Faculty inductionUpon admission into the PhD programme students will normally be taken through a general orientation programme by the Management. Postgraduate students will be expected to go through an induction process individually, led by the Dean and in collaboration with prospective supervisor.

The process will also involve familiarisation with Faculty resources for research, the current staff situation in relation to areas of specialization, and procedure for academic progression from the time of entry through to graduation.

The Dean will inform students about their duties and Faculty expectations regarding choice of research topic, courses that must be taken and passed, research proposal writing, participation in Faculty seminars, and related management processes.

PGs 18: teaching and supervisionPostgraduate academic staff members are based in the University Faculties and their inputs into the decision-making processes of the Postgraduate school are made through their respective Deans of Faculties, and Heads of Departments who are the Chief examiners of departmental postgraduate examinations.

PGS 18.1: Teachingteaching of postgraduate courses can only be done by the following categories of staff:

a) Lecturers of the rank of Lecturer and above who are not pursuing higher degree studies under supervision;b) Lecturers who have at least one year’s post-doctoral university teaching experience.c) In special circumstances, other categories of academic staff approved by the Postgraduate studies Committee on the recommendation of the appropriate Faculty Postgraduate Committee. PGS 18.2: supervisiononly the following categories of staff may supervise postgraduate students:

365

a) Lecturers who have MPH, MBA, MD or PhD degrees in the relevant discipline can supervise candidates at Master levels.b) Lecturers who have a minimum of 3 years post-doctoral research/teaching experience can supervise candidates for PhD.c) A candidate for the degree of MBA, MA or PhD shall have one lead supervisor and one or two co-supervisors. d) A supervisor must have a minimum of three years of postdoctoral research/teaching experience, except that a lecturer without PhD or equivalent but of Professorial cadre shall be eligible to serve as supervisor provided that such a lecturer is not pursuing higher degree studies. Qualified staff of other universities or research institutions, from the relevant Department, as approved by the Postgraduate studies Committee on the recommendation of the candidate’s Faculty Postgraduate Committee may also serve as supervisor.

The supervisor shall:a) Have primary academic responsibility for mentoring and coaching candidates.b) Provide research guidance and supervision in respect of all components of the specified PhD course of study.c) Design/develop, formulate and prescribe course activity for a duration of six months in consultation with the Head of the Postgraduate school.d) Conduct and monitor the prescribed course activity and report its progress to the Postgraduate school.e) suggest and guide the candidate for participation and paper presentations in conferences, seminars and other colloquia of relevance.f) Regularly follow up and monitor progress made by the candidate.g) enable/connect the PhD candidate to active research groups or networks of relevance within accessible contacts.h) Provide six monthly or yearly progress reports on each candidate to the Head of the Postgraduate school.i) Consult, cooperate and collaborate with the Postgraduate school in the best possible way so as to ensure quality and compliance. PGs 18.3: Capacity for supervisionThere shall be a limit on the number of students that can be supervised by a Lecturer or Professor: a) A supervisor shall not have more than six full-time Research students equivalent at MBA and MA level.b) For PhD, supervision, the Committee system will be in use; the chair of the committee will be the main supervisor; and the committee will have the Methodology Professor/Lecturer as a member. A main supervisor may not serve as chair in more than three committees.

366

PGS 19: Course work and Seminars The Faculty level requirements include:i) Undertaking the following compulsory non-credit bearing courses:

1st Year of study:• Research Methodology/Ethics • Advanced Statistics• Academic Proposal Writing

2nd Year of study:• Seminars shall serve as a means for presentation of PhD research proposals• Participating and making presentation at Conferences/Workshops• Publishing at least 2 papers in reputable Academic Journals/Peer Reviewed Books; at least 1 publication should be done jointly with the supervisor.

3rd Year of studyii) Preparation and presentation of a Full PhD Thesis (360 Credits).

PGS 20: Research Proposaltowards the end of the 1st Year of study, each student will be expected to prepare his/her research proposal with the guidance of the supervisor.

PGS 20.1: PhD research proposal preparation – annotated outline

i. Introduction: an overview and description of the topic and its potential research significance; the study’s purpose, and its limitations; the time & geographic scope. [Avoid sensitive topics: human sexuality, the death penalty, secret society, earnings from illegal sources, etc.]ii. Literature Review: a thorough review of the literature on the research topic; how the research hopes to contribute to the intellectual knowledge available, how will this study be different (new insights, fresh evidence; resolution of apparently contradictory conclusions and findings; methodological refinement; or new techniques of data analysis)? iii. Theoretical basis for Research: theoretical traditions in previous research; an assessment of theory or framework and its relationship to the proposed research. iv. Research questions/hypotheses: the general and specific research questions to be addressed in the research; what are the issues for investigation and specific research questions? What are the implications of the investigation for broader areas of knowledge and practice (for example, theory, policy, practice)?v. Research Design: the overall approach and rationale for the design (qualitative or quantitative, or both); study population in relation to anticipated sample; the rationale for the choice of analytic strategy; data sources and limitations.vi. Research Methodology: a) Method of data collection and analysis: data sources and

367

limitations; time dimension; research site and method of data selection (sampling) ; b) Analytical Framework: Formulation of the framework; relevance of the framework to current research; how the framework will facilitate data collection, analysis and presentation of results; the definition of variables - dependent & independent; c) Data processing, analysis & consolidation: organizing data for computer operations; choice of statistical techniques for data analysis; computer applications for data processing; data consolidation with reference to the variables to be analysed (rates, ratios, etc); and Interpretation & presentation of results.vii.mstructure of Presentation: 1) Introduction; 2) Literature review; 3) Methodology; 4) Analysis of data and findings; 5) Implications of the findings; 6) Conclusions.viii. Research Capacity and Resources: research experience and performance; quantitative/qualitative ability; computer applications and availability of packages to be used, e.g. sPss; research budget and funding sources; expected duration of research from time proposal approval to the submission of final research report/thesis; anticipated constraints in the process of executing the research proposal, and a review of ethical and political considerations.

PGS 20.2: Presentation of PhD research proposalPresentation of PhD proposal will be undertaken by each candidate at two levels; namely, i) Faculty and; ii) Postgraduate studies Committee. At each level, management may decide to accommodate the presentation of proposal in a seminar environment by inviting other qualified academics to participate.

Following the approval of the proposal at Faculty level, the same proposal or a modified version of it will be presented to the Postgraduate studies Committee at which the project supervisors must be present.

Comments from the Committee will be considered in revising the proposal before finalization by the Faculty responsible.

PGS 21: Candidacy and Thesis preparation

PGS 21.1: Candidacy for PhD thesis preparationBy the end of the first year of course work and mentoring, students should prepare their PhD research proposals in anticipation of seminar participation in the second year of study.

each student will have a slot in the Faculty seminar time table to make a presentation of his/her proposal.

Unless and until a student has satisfactorily completed the 1st Year Faculty requirements, he/she may not advance to the 2nd Year of the programme. similarly, a student may not formally start to write his/her Thesis until the 2nd Year Faculty requirements have been satisfactorily completed, including satisfactory presentation of PhD research proposal.

368

PGS 21.2: Duration of research and thesis preparationA full-time PhD student will normally be expected to complete the programme within 3 years.

Part-time students may extend their programme to a maximum of 6 years beyond which a special justification in the form of appeal must be made to the Postgraduate studies Committee of the university. If the appeal is declined, such a student will be informed in writing to withdraw from the PhD programme.

PGS 22: Research Ethics And ClearancePGS 22.1: ethicsThe purpose of this statement is to ensure that no one is harmed physically, psychologically,culturally, or socially as a result of the intended research process.

If people/human beings are involved as research subjects, doctoral candidates shall berequired to include an ethics statement in the research proposal.

such statement is normally an indication of the ethical considerations and agreement toconduct the research in accordance with established ethical principles and procedures as arefully elaborated in the IUM Research and Consultancy Policy.

PGS 22.2: ClearanceUpon satisfactory completion of all the stipulated programme requirements every student, before graduation and formal award of certificates, must go through the university clearance procedure involving the following:

• Finance• Library• Computer Centre• Ministry of Home Affairs (for foreign students)

Following the completion of the clearance process, a certificate of ‘satisfactory Clearance’ will be issued to the student by the office of the Registrar. Inability to obtain the clearance certificate could cause delay in the actual date of graduation by a student.

PGS 23: Progress reportBased on a standard university ‘student Progress Report Form’, each student must go through periodic process of progress reporting. The reporting form will be in three parts:

a) Part 1: to be completed by student

369

b) Part 2: to be completed by supervisorc) Part 3: to be completed by Dean of Faculty/Representative

Upon completion of the progress report form, the Dean’s representative will send the signed form with his/her recommendation and possible advice.

PGS 24: Editorial SpecificationsThe following guidelines must be observed in the course of preparation of PhD Thesis:

1: title Format:- Justified 2: Pagination Format:- Bottom and Centre of page - Roman numerals i, ii, iii - Arabic numerals 1,2,3 For Chapter 1-5, references and appendices

3: Font: times new Roman

Font size: 4: title 16 Abstract 12 • The Abstract should not exceed 500 words • Abstract should provide a brief summary of key findings, methods (sample) used and main conclusions and recommendation derived from the research work

-table of Contents 12 -Paragraphs 12 •Paragraphs should be kept reasonably short to enhance clarity of thoughts•Good writers suggests that a paragraph should not exceed three complete sentences•K.I.S.S: keep it simple and straight

-Chapters, References 12

10.1 spacing: • 1.5 for proposals and final thesis

10.2 Italics: • Not at all unless it is in a quote, sentence or word that you strongly want to emphasize•nItalics should be normally discouraged

10.3 no. of pages/ number words guidelines- 4th Year- 8 000-10 000 words- Masters 20 000-25 000 words

370

- PhD 54,000 – 80,000 pages, excluding references/bibliography, annexures. The length of the PhD Thesis shall not normally exceed 300 type written pages on A4 paper.10.4 Book presentation of Final Dissertation- 4th Year project, bound book in blue colour- Masters: bound book in red colour - PhD: bound book in black colour

10.5 title on cover- Centre aligned- order- University name, title of research, name of student, student number, Year

Example:

tHe InteRnAtIonAL UnIVeRsItY oF MAnAGeMent(IUM)

tItLe oF ReseARCHBY

nAMe oF stUDent

stUDent nUMBeR

A ReseARCH tHesIs In FULFILLMent oF ReQUIReMents FoR tHe DeGRee oF

DoCtoR oF PHILosoPHY

YeAR…………………………

371

10.6 Format and order of Final Dissertationi. First page blankii. title page- title of dissertationiii. Abstract iv. Declaration (see Annexure A) v. Copyright (see Annexure B) vi. Acknowledgementvii. Dedication viii. table of Contents ix. List of Acronyms and abbreviations x. List of tables and figures xi. Chapter 1-5 xii. References xiii. Appendices

DECLARATION

I _________do hereby declare that this research project is my own work. I also affirm that no part of this work was published before except those sources which have been dully acknowledged. The work has never been submitted, nor will it ever be submitted to any institution, or college, or university in awarding of degree.student’s name: ________________________________________signature: ________________________________________Date: ________________________________________

supervisor’s name: ________________________________________signature: ________________________________________Date: ________________________________________

COPYRIGHT

All rights reserved. no part of this dissertation may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, and recording or otherwise from scholarly purpose without the prior written permission of the author or University on behalf of the author.

PGS 25: Publicationseach doctoral student shall be required to publish at least two (2) scholarly articles/papers inrefereed or professional journals before they submit their final thesis and themselves toexamination.

372

The articles/papers may be prepared independently by the candidate; but, at least, one should be jointly with the supervisor.

In the case of a joint publication, the percentage of the candidate’s contribution must beshown in the appropriate form.

PGS 26 : Submission and Examination of ThesisPGS 26.1: notice to submit Thesisnormally, three (3) months prior to the submission of the thesis, a candidate must submit a notice to that effect to the Registrar copied to the supervisor and Director of Postgraduate studies and the Registrar, upon receipt and registering such notice, shall send it officially to the Postgraduate studies Committee for consideration by the candidate’s supervisor.

once the supervisor is satisfied that the student’s thesis is ready and is of such standard as merits submission, s/he then grants his/her consent accordingly and returns it to the candidate through the Registrar.

If no consent is given by the supervisor, this position must also be communicated to the candidate through the Registrar.

PGS 26.2: Appointment of external examinersFor each PhD thesis, there shall be at least three examiners beside the candidate’s supervisors, i.e. one (1) Internal examiner (from the University) and two (2) external examiners (outside the University) appointed according to the university’s policy on this matter. The Internal examiner, preferably, need not be the candidate’s supervisor.

normally, the Postgraduate studies Committee (PsC) identifies suitable candidates and asks them to submit their CVs to the university for consideration. After due consideration, PsC may recommend the examiners to senate for appointment as such.

PGS 27 : Examination of ThesisPGS 27.1: :The ThesisFor examination purposes, candidates shall submit three (3) loose-leaf bound copies to the school of Postgraduate studies which shall distribute them to the appointed examiners.

each such thesis shall be accompanied by examiner’s Report Forms and other related forms. The examination of a doctoral thesis shall normally last anything from three (3) to six (6) months.

373

PGS 27.2 :The viva voce/ oral examination All PhD candidates shall defend their theses, normally in a period of two hours following the submission by examiners, of their Reports. The examination shall be open to the university’s academic staff, students, and the public and the notice for the examination shall be so stipulated and shall be advertised as such.

While the audience is as varied as stated, only the examining committee and the student’s supervisor(s) appointed by the PsC shall conduct the examination.

Unanimous approval of the examining committee is required for passing. If the student does not perform satisfactorily, the committee may recommend to the PsC that the student take one re-examination under stated conditions and the candidate shall be informed as such by the Registrar.

For oral defence, at least 20 calendar days before the viva voce, a sufficient number of copies of the synopsis of the thesis, acceptable in form and substance, shall be submitted to the school of Postgraduate studies (sPs) and shall be distributed to each member of the examining committee.

Following a successful defence, and after all changes and corrections have been made, 3 bound copies prepared in accordance with the university’s requirements/guidelines must be submitted to the Postgraduate studies Committee. The colour of the thesis shall be black.Doctoral students must submit an additional abstract, not exceeding 350 words.

PGS 28: Approval of ThesisFollowing successful defence of the PhD thesis, the PsC and/or the host faculty/Department shall accordingly communicate such successful completion of PhD research/studies to senate for noting.

PGS 29: Application for Graduationonce senate has noted the successful completion of PhD research/studies, it shall, through the Registrar, notify the candidate that s/he can apply to the Registrar to proceed to graduation.

PGS 30: Withdrawal from the PhD programmeWithdrawal from the PhD programme shall occur under the following conditions:i. Failure to submit six monthly or yearly reports continuously.ii. Failure to pay the annual fee within the stipulated time.iii. Failure to submit the thesis within six years of the registration.iv. Voluntarily by a candidate.

prospectus - 2020/2021 - namibia hubnamibiahub.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/prospectus.pdf ·...

Documents